2011 Honda Pilot Manual

10/01/26 18:22:32 31SZA620_002
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2011 Honda Pilot was a wise investment. As you read this manual, you will
It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance information shown in

the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it
preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in
mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many
systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction
and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:22:36 31SZA620_003
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:22:49 31SZA620_004
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
responsibility. Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed These signal words mean:
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
other information on labels and in HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
hurt you or others. HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

possible to warn you about all the instructions.
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
use your own good judgement. Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iii
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:22:55 31SZA620_005
Important Handling Information
Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 410 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 449 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control, a crash, or rollover.
iv
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:23:07 31SZA620_006
2011 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual

Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3

Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 65
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, rear entertainment, security, cruise control, and HomeLink ) ... 191
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 393
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 409
Maintenance (information, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage) ............................................ 453
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ......................................... 507
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 535
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 553
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 557
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures)
1
00X31-SZA-6200
© American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:23:29 31SZA620_007
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Technical Information

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load and technical information.
luggage and other cargo.
Your Vehicle at a Glance Warranty and Customer
A quick reference to the main Driving Relations
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, (U.S. and Canada only)
shift the transmission, and park; plus A summary of the warranties
Driver and Passenger Safety what you need to know if you’re covering your new vehicle, and how
Important information about the planning to tow a trailer. to contact us for any reason. Refer to
proper use and care of your vehicle’s your warranty manual for detailed
seat belts, an overview of the Maintenance information.
supplemental restraint system, and The maintenance information shows
valuable information on how to you when you need to take your Authorized Manuals
protect children with child restraints. vehicle to the dealer for maintenance (U.S. only)
service. There is also a list of things How to order manuals and other
Instruments and Controls to check and instructions on how to technical literature.
Explains the purpose of each check them.
instrument panel indicator and gauge, Index
and how to use the controls on the Taking Care of the Unexpected
dashboard and steering column. This section covers several problems Service Information Summary
motorists sometimes experience, A summary of the information you
Features and details how to handle them. need when you pull up to the fuel
How to operate the climate control pump.
system, the audio system, rear
entertainment system, and other
convenience features.
2
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:23:38 31SZA620_008
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER’S FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL MOONROOF SWITCH＊ HomeLink BUTTONS＊ MIRROR CONTROL

AIRBAG (P.11, 29) INDICATORS (P.67) (P.168) (P.357) AUTO BUTTON＊
GAUGES (P.82) (P.170)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM＊ PASSENGER’S
(P.173) FRONT AIRBAG
(P.11, 29)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.169) AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.208)
POWER DOOR LOCK HEATING/COOLING
MASTER SWITCH CONTROLS (P.192)
(P.138) CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.199)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES AUTOMATIC
(P.165) TRANSMISSION
(P.413)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE REAR HEATING/
(P.395) COOLING CONTROLS
(P.197)
GLASS HATCH REAR CLIMATE
RELEASE BUTTON/ CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER TAILGATE (P.204)
SWITCH＊
(P.145) HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
HANDLE (P.397) PEDAL (P.169) AUXILIARY INPUT HEADPHONE ACCESSORY POWER
JACKS＊ (P.347) CONNECTORS＊ (P.348) SOCKET (P.186)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
＊: If equipped CONTINUED
3
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:23:48 31SZA620_009
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS＊3 HAZARD WARNING

FRONT FOG LIGHTS＊3 (P.311) BUTTON (P.130) PASSENGER AIRBAG
(P.126) BLUETOOTH OFF INDICATOR
HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM (P.36)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS＊3
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (P.361)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (P.432) WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM (P.124)
SWITCH＊3 (P.386) VTM-4 LOCK
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY BUTTON＊4 (P.418)
SYSTEM＊3 (P.173) REAR WINDOW
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.171) DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTON＊3
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER (P.130, 172)
SWITCH (P.138)
ACCESSORY POWER
POWER WINDOW SOCKET (P.186)
SWITCHES (P.165)
SEAT HEATER
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE SWITCHES＊3 (P.164)
HANDLE (P.395)
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON/ CRUISE CONTROL
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH＊3 HORN＊1 BUTTONS (P.350)
(P.145) PARKING BRAKE RELEASE VOICE CONTROL STEERING WHEEL MULTI-INFORMATION
HANDLE (P.169) BUTTONS＊2 ADJUSTMENT BUTTONS＊3
Vehicle with navigation system is shown. (P.133) (P.87)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
＊3 : If equipped
＊4 : 4WD models only
4
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:23:53 31SZA620_010
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Additional Information About All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Your Seat Belts ........................ 22 Back Seat .................................. 40
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 22 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 23 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 40

explains how your airbags work. And Automatic Seat Belt If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Tensioners ................................ 24 Children .................................... 42
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 25 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Attention ................................... 42
Your Airbags ............................ 26 Additional Safety Precautions .... 43
Airbag System Components ....... 26 Protecting Infants and
How Your Front Airbags Small Children.......................... 44
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Work.......................................... 29 Protecting Infants ........................ 44
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 8 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32 Protecting Small Children .......... 45
Seat Belts ........................................ 9 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 47
Airbags .......................................... 11 Work.......................................... 34 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 48
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 35 With LATCH ................................ 49
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13 How the Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 53
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 15 Indicator Works ....................... 35 With a Tether ............................... 54
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 16 How the Passenger Airbag Protecting Larger Children ............ 57
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16 Off Indicator Works ................ 36 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 57
5. Fasten and Position the Airbag Service .............................. 37 Using a Booster Seat ................... 58
Seat Belts .............................. 17 Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children − General Front .......................................... 59
Position ................................. 19 Guidelines ................................. 39 Additional Safety Precautions .... 60
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 20 All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 61
Additional Safety Precautions .... 21 Restrained ................................ 39 Safety Labels .................................... 62
5
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:24:02 31SZA620_011
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Always Wear Your Seat Belt Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
recommendations throughout this A seat belt is your best protection in While airbags can save lives, they
section, and throughout this manual. all types of collisions. Airbags are can cause serious or fatal injuries to
The recommendations on this page designed to supplement seat belts, occupants who sit too close to them,
are the ones we consider to be the not replace them. So even though or are not properly restrained.
most important. your vehicle is equipped with airbags, Infants, young children, and short
make sure you and your passengers adults are at the greatest risk. Be
always wear your seat belts, and sure to follow all instructions and
wear them properly (see page 17 ). warnings in this manual.
Restrain All Children Don’t Drink and Drive

Children age 12 and under should Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
ride properly restrained in a back one drink can reduce your ability to
seat, not the front seat. Infants and respond to changing conditions, and
small children should be restrained your reaction time gets worse with
in a child seat. Larger children every additional drink. So don’t drink
should use a booster seat and a lap/ and drive, and don’t let your friends
shoulder belt until they can use the drink and drive, either.
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 39 − 60 ).
6
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:24:10 31SZA620_012
Important Safety Precautions
Pay Appropriate Attention to the Control Your Speed Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Task of Driving Safely Excessive speed is a major factor in Condition
Engaging in mobile phone crash injuries and deaths. Generally, Having a tire blowout or a
conversation or other activities that the higher the speed, the greater the mechanical failure can be extremely

keep you from paying close attention risk, but serious injuries can also hazardous. To reduce the possibility
to the road, other vehicles and occur at lower speeds. Never drive of such problems, check your tire
pedestrians could lead to a crash. faster than is safe for current pressures and condition frequently,
Remember, situations can change conditions, regardless of the and perform all regularly scheduled
quickly, and only you can decide maximum speed posted. maintenance (see page 496 ).
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
7
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:24:18 31SZA620_013
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(1) (4) (9) features that work together to
(3) protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(11)
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
(7) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
(5) seat belts in a crash.
(8) (2)
(6) However, you and your passengers
(10) can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage the correct position and always wear
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(2) (4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags The following pages explain how you
(9) Side Curtain Airbags can take an active role in protecting
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners yourself and your passengers.
(11) Door Locks
8
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:24:27 31SZA620_014
Seat Belts Why Wear Seat Belts

Your vehicle is equipped with seat Seat belts are the single most
belts in all seating positions. effective safety device for adults and Not wearing a seat belt properly
larger children. (Infants and smaller increases the chance of serious

Your seat belt system also includes children must be properly restrained injury or death in a crash, even
an indicator on the instrument panel in child seats.) though your vehicle has airbags.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Not wearing a seat belt properly Be sure you and your
increases the chance of serious passengers always wear seat
injury or death in a crash, even belts and wear them properly.
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all

Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
CONTINUED
9
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:24:35 31SZA620_015
When properly worn, seat belts: Help keep you from being thrown Of course, seat belts cannot
against the inside of the vehicle completely protect you in every
Keep you connected to the vehicle and against other occupants. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
so you can take advantage of the can reduce your risk of serious
vehicle’s built-in safety features. Keep you from being thrown out injury.
of the vehicle.
Help protect you in almost every What you should do: Always wear
type of crash, including: Help keep you in a good position your seat belt, and make sure you
− frontal impacts should the airbags ever deploy. A wear it properly.
− side impacts good position reduces the risk of
− rear impacts injury from an inflating airbag and
− rollovers allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
10
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:24:43 31SZA620_016
Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 32 for more seating positions during a moderate
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags to severe side impact or rollover (see
29 for more information on how work). page 34 for more information on how
your front airbags work). your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
11
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:24:51 31SZA620_017
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
collisions, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
12
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:25:05 31SZA620_018
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles with navigation system

The following pages provide Your vehicle also has a Your vehicle also has a tailgate, glass
instructions on how to properly tailgate, glass hatch, and hatch, and door open indicator on
protect the driver, adult door open indicator on the the multi-information display to

passengers, and teenage children information display to indicate when indicate when the tailgate, the glass
who are large enough and mature the tailgate, the glass hatch, or a hatch, or a specific door is open. You
enough to drive or ride in the front. specific door is open. You will see will see the appropriate indicator(s)
the appropriate indicator(s) for each and message(s) for each condition.
See pages 39 − 60 for important condition.
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1. Close and Lock the Doors

After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
Your vehicle has a door-

open indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when When one or more doors are open,
any door is open. the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’ message will
come on.
CONTINUED
13
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:25:16 31SZA620_019
Locking the doors, the glass hatch,

and the tailgate reduces the chance
of someone being thrown out of the
vehicle during a crash, and it helps
prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door, the
glass hatch, or the tailgate and
falling out.
Locking the doors, the glass hatch

and the tailgate also helps prevent an
outsider from unexpectedly opening
a door, the glass hatch, or the
When the glass hatch, the tailgate, When the glass hatch, tailgate, and tailgate when you come to a stop.
or both glass hatch and tailgate are one or more doors are open, the
open, the ‘‘HATCH OPEN,’’ ‘‘DOOR, HATCH & TAILGATE On vehicles without navigation system
‘‘TAILGATE OPEN,’’ or ‘‘HATCH & OPEN’’ message will come on. This vehicle has auto door locking/
TAILGATE OPEN’’ message will unlocking features. See page 139 for
come on. how to set them.
On vehicles with navigation system

This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See pages
116 and 117 for how to set them.
14
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:25:26 31SZA620_020
2.Adjust the Front Seats If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious

wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to On vehicles with manual adjustable
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the seats
steering wheel up and down, and in Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the and out (see page 133 ). rock it back and forth to make sure
rear as possible while allowing you to the seat is locked in position.
maintain full control of the vehicle. If you cannot get far enough away
Have a front passenger adjust their from the steering wheel and still See page 154 for how to adjust a
seat as far to the rear as possible. reach the controls, we recommend front seat (power adjustment) and
that you investigate whether some page 155 for a manual adjustment.
type of adaptive equipment may help.
15
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:25:38 31SZA620_021
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs 4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far

can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
comfortable, upright position, the belt. It also increases the chance the center of the back of your head
leaving ample space between your of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the
chest and the airbag cover in the and being seriously injured. The restraint.
center of the steering wheel. farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury. Have passengers adjust their head
Passengers with adjustable seat- restraints properly as well. Taller
backs should also adjust their seat- See page 155 for how to adjust the persons should adjust their restraint
back to a comfortable, upright manual adjustable seat-back, and as high as possible.
position. page 154 for the power adjustable
seat-back.
16
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:25:49 31SZA620_022
5.Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts
Improperly positioning head Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
restraints reduces their then tug on the belt to make sure the

effectiveness and you can be belt is securely latched. Check that
seriously injured in a crash. the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
Make sure head restraints are injuries in a crash.
in place and positioned properly
before driving. The center seating position in the
second row and all third row seats
have a detachable seat belt that can
Properly adjusted head restraints be unlatched and retracted into the
will help protect occupants from ceiling to allow the seats to be folded Position the lap part of the belt as
whiplash and other crash injuries. down. See page 162 for how to low as possible across your hips,
unlatch and relatch a belt. then pull up on the shoulder part of
See page 157 for how to adjust the the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
head restraints and how the driver’s Detachable seat belts should This lets your strong pelvic bones
and front passenger’s active head normally be latched whenever the take the force of a crash and reduces
restraints work. seat-backs are in an upright position. the chance of internal injuries.
See page 162 for how to unlatch a
belt, and page 163 for how to relatch
a belt.
CONTINUED
17
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:25:56 31SZA620_023
If necessary, pull up on the belt again If the seat belt touches or crosses The front seats and second row seats
to remove any slack, then check that your neck, or if it crosses your arm have adjustable seat belt anchors. To
the belt rests across the center of instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the height of an anchor,
your chest and over your shoulder. adjust the seat belt anchor height. squeeze the two release buttons, and
slide the anchor up or down as
This spreads the forces of a crash RELEASE BUTTON needed (it has four positions).
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Improperly positioning the seat

belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
18
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:26:05 31SZA620_024
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position position in the front seat can be
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured in a crash
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and by striking interior parts of the

put on their seat belts, it is very vehicle or being struck by an
If a seat belt does not seem to work important that they continue to sit inflating front airbag.
properly, it may not protect the upright, well back in their seats, with
occupant in a crash. their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
No one should sit in a seat with an engine is off. Sitting improperly or out of
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat position can result in serious
belt that is not working properly can Sitting improperly can increase the injury or death in a crash.
result in serious injury or death. chance of injury during a crash. For
Have your dealer check the belt as example, if an occupant slouches, Always sit upright, well back in
soon as possible. lies down, turns sideways, sits the seat, with your feet on the
forward, leans forward or sideways, floor.
See page 22 for additional or puts one or both feet up, the
information about your seat belts chance of injury during a crash is
and how to take care of them. greatly increased.
19
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:26:13 31SZA620_025
Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit This will reduce the risk of injuries
upright and adjust the seat as far to both you and your unborn child
back as possible while allowing full that can be caused by a crash or an
control of the vehicle. When riding inflating front airbag.
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible. Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
20
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:26:23 31SZA620_026
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on
Never let passengers ride in the belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
cargo area or on top of a folded- occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
down back seat. If they do, they shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper

could be very seriously injured in a reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
crash. the belt and increase the chance of propelled inside the vehicle and
serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or
moving. A passenger who is not between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
wearing a seat belt during a crash airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
or emergency stop can be thrown objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
against the inside of the vehicle, a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
against other occupants, or out of your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
the vehicle. if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
Two people should never use the Keep your hands and arms away Do not cover or replace front seat-
same seat belt. If they do, they from the airbag covers. If your back covers without consulting
could be very seriously injured in a hands or arms are close to an your dealer. Improperly replacing
crash. airbag cover, they could be injured or covering front seat-back covers
if the airbag inflates. can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
21
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:26:34 31SZA620_027
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components The seat belt system If either the driver or a front
Your seat belt system includes lap/ includes an indicator on the passenger does not fasten their seat
shoulder belts in all seating positions. instrument panel and a beeper to belt while driving, the beeper will
The front seat belts are also remind you and your passengers to sound and the indicator will flash
equipped with automatic seat belt fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals.
tensioners.
This system monitors the front seat On vehicles with navigation system
This system uses the same sensors belts. If you turn the ignition switch You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
as the front airbags to monitor to the ON (II) position before your BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
whether the front seat belts are seat belt is fastened, the beeper will SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
latched or unlatched, and how much sound and the indicator will flash. If information display (see page 95 ).
weight is on the front passenger’s your seat belt is not fastened before
seat (see pages 31 and 32 ). the beeper stops, the indicator will When no one is sitting in the front
stop flashing but remain on. passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
If a front passenger does not fasten should not come on and the beeper
their seat belt, the indicator will should not sound.
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
22
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:26:47 31SZA620_028
If the indicator comes on or the Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat The lap/shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving,
belt is latched and there is no front your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in
seat passenger and no items on the and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some

front seat, something may be tension on the belt. During a collision
interfering with the monitoring To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
system. Look for and remove: plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body.
Any items under the front latched (see page 17 for how to
passenger’s seat. properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
Any object(s) hanging on the seat To unlock the belt, press the red that must be activated to secure a
or in the seat-back pocket. PRESS button on the buckle. Guide child seat (see page 53 ).
the belt across your body so that it
Any object(s) touching the rear of retracts completely. After exiting the If the shoulder part of the belt is
the seat-back. vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the pulled all the way out, the lockable
way and will not get closed in the retractor will activate. The belt will
If no obstructions are found, have door. retract, but it will not allow the
your vehicle checked by a dealer. passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,

unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
CONTINUED
23
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:26:57 31SZA620_029
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to

activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
34 ).
If a side curtain airbag deploys

during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
The tensioners can also be activated
The lap/shoulder belts in the center during a collision in which the front
seat of the second row and both of For added protection, the front seat airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
the third row seats are equipped with belts are equipped with automatic airbags would not be needed, but the
a detachable anchor that has two seat belt tensioners. When activated, extra tension in the seat belt could
parts: a small latch plate and a the tensioners immediately tighten be helpful.
buckle. the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position. When the tensioners are activated,
The detachable seat belt should the seat belts will remain tight until
normally be latched whenever the they are unbuckled.
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 162 .
24
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:27:05 31SZA620_030
Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious

Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the needed.
the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
490 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty

on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
25
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:27:10 31SZA620_031
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(12) (9) (2) (11)
(10)
(1)
(3) (5)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag (4)

(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Side Impact Sensors (First) (7)
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors (6)
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit (8) (4) (5)
(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
26
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:27:18 31SZA620_032
Your Airbag System includes:

(16) Two SRS (supplemental restraint
(13) system) front airbags. The driver’s

airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 29 ).
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
(15) in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 32 ).
(14) Two side curtain airbags, one for

each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
(13) Front Impact Sensors CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(14) Rear Safing Sensor 34 ).
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Side Curtain Airbags
CONTINUED
27
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:27:30 31SZA620_033
Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 24 ). weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you to a possible
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs problem with your airbag system
Sensors that can detect a (29 kg) or less (the weight of an components (see page 35 ).
moderate to severe front impact, infant or small child), the
side impact, or if your vehicle is passenger’s front airbag will be An indicator on the instrument
about to rollover. turned off (see page 31 ). panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
Sensors that can detect whether a A rollover sensor that can detect if turned off (see page 35 ).
child is in the passenger’s side your vehicle is about to roll over
airbag path and signal the control and signal the control unit to An indicator on the dashboard that
unit to turn the airbag off (see deploy both side curtain airbags alerts you that the passenger’s
page 33 ). and front seat belt tensioners (see front airbag has been turned off
page 34 ). (see page 36 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front A sophisticated electronic system Emergency backup power in case
passenger’s seat belt are latched that continually monitors and your vehicle’s electrical system is
or unlatched (see page 22 ). records information about the disconnected in a crash.
sensors, the control unit, the
A driver’s seat position sensor that airbag activators, the seat belt
monitors the distance of the seat tensioners, and driver and front
from the front airbag. If the seat is passenger seat belt use when the
too far forward, the airbag will ignition switch is in the ON (II)
inflate with less force (see page position.
31 ).
28
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:27:41 31SZA620_034
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will inflate there is no passenger in the front
the driver’s and front passenger’s seat, or if the advanced airbag
airbags, at the time and with the system has turned the passenger’s
force needed. airbag off (see page 36 ).
CONTINUED
29
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:27:50 31SZA620_035
The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
After a crash, you may see what wearing a seat belt or not.
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbag’s surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This
so. provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
30
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:28:02 31SZA620_036
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S
SEAT SEAT
Occupants must sit upright and POSITION WEIGHT
wear their seat belts properly. SENSOR SENSOR
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors, The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
or put any objects or metal items system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
under the front seats. sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda
Objects placed or pushed under too far forward, the airbag will does not encourage carrying an
the front passenger’s seat may inflate with less force, regardless of infant or small child in front, if the
cause the sensor to malfunction, the severity of the impact. sensors detect the weight of an
increasing the risk of injury in a infant or small child (up to about 65
crash. If there is a problem with the sensor, lbs or 29 kg), the system will
the SRS indicator will come on, and automatically turn the passenger’s
Failure to follow these instructions the airbag will inflate in the normal front airbag off.
could damage the sensors or prevent manner regardless of the driver’s
them from working properly. seating position.
CONTINUED
31
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:28:14 31SZA620_037
Be aware that objects placed on the Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
passenger’s seat can also cause the back against cargo on the seat or
airbag to be turned off. floor behind it.
When the passenger airbag gets Hanging heavy items on the front
turned off by the weight sensors, a passenger seat, or placing heavy
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in items in the seat-back pocket.
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 36 ). Moving the front passenger’s seat
If the weight sensors detect there is or seat-back forcibly back against
no passenger in the front seat, the the folded right-side second-row
airbag is automatically turned off. seat.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not Second-row passengers should not
come on. wedge objects or intentionally If you ever have a moderate to
To ensure that the passenger’s force their feet under the front severe side impact, sensors will
advanced front airbag system will passenger seat. detect rapid acceleration and signal
work properly, do not do anything the control unit to instantly inflate
that would increase or decrease the Also, make sure the floor mat behind either the driver’s or the passenger’s
weight on the front passenger’s seat. the front passenger’s seat is hooked side airbag.
This includes: to the floor mat anchor (see page
491 ). If it is not, the mat may
A second-row passenger pushing interfere with the proper operation
or pulling on the back of the front of the sensors and operation of the
passenger’s seat. seat.
32
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:28:25 31SZA620_038
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 35 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger’s passenger is out of the airbag’s

is no passenger. seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the
should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbag’s the moment the passenger moves
deployment path, the airbag will shut into or out of the airbag deployment
off. path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a A front seat passenger should not
larger adult slouches and leans use a cushion or another object as a
sideways into the airbag’s backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
deployment path. system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front

passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
33
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:28:35 31SZA620_039
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s In a Rollover
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain If the rollover sensor detects your
airbag will inflate even if there are no vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG occupants on that side of the vehicle. the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side

will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
To get the best protection from the

In a Side Impact side curtain airbags, occupants
In a moderate to severe side impact, should wear their seat belts and sit
sensors will detect rapid acceleration upright and well back in their seats.
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
34
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:28:53 31SZA620_040
How the SRS Indicator Works On vehicles with navigation system How the Side Airbag Off
The SRS indicator alerts You will also see a ‘‘CHECK Indicator Works
you to a potential problem AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the U.S. Canada
with your airbags or seat belt multi-information display (see page This indicator

tensioners. 95 ). alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
When you turn the ignition switch to If you see any of these indications, automatically shut off. It does not
the ON (II) position, this indicator the airbags and seat belt tensioners mean there is a problem with your
comes on briefly then goes off. This may not work properly when you side airbags.
tells you the system is working need them.
properly. When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
If the indicator comes on at any should come on briefly and then go
other time, or does not come on at all, Ignoring the SRS indicator can off (see page 72 ). If it doesn’t come
you should have the system checked result in serious injury or death on, stays on, or comes on while
by your dealer. For example: if the airbag systems or driving without a passenger in the
tensioners do not work properly. front seat, have the system checked.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition Have your vehicle checked by a On vehicles with navigation system
switch to the ON (II) position. dealer as soon as possible if You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
the SRS indicator alerts you to SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
If the indicator stays on after the a possible problem. multi-information display (see page
engine starts. 95 ).
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
35
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:29:09 31SZA620_041
How the Passenger Airbag Off Be aware that objects placed on the If the indicator comes on with no
Indicator Works front seat can cause the indicator to front seat passenger and no objects
come on. on the seat, or with an adult riding
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR there, something may be interfering
If no weight is detected on the front with the weight sensors. Look for
U.S. Canada seat, the airbag will be automatically and remove:
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on. Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if Any object(s) hanging on the seat
the total weight on the seat is near or in the seat-back pocket.
the airbag cutoff threshold.
Any object(s), such as a folded-
If an adult or teenage passenger is down back seat, that are touching
This indicator alerts you that the riding in front, move the seat as far the rear of the seat-back.
passenger’s front airbag has been to the rear as possible, and have the
shut off because weight sensors passenger sit upright and wear the If no obstructions are found, have
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less seat belt properly. your vehicle checked by a dealer as
(the weight of an infant or small soon as possible.
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
36
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:29:20 31SZA620_042
Airbag Service If your vehicle has a moderate to Additional Safety Precautions

Your airbag systems are virtually severe impact. Even if your Do not attempt to deactivate your
maintenance free, and there are no airbags do not inflate, your dealer airbags. Together, airbags and
parts you can safely service. should inspect the driver’s seat seat belts provide the best

However, you must have your position sensor, the front protection.
vehicle serviced if: passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all Do not tamper with airbag
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag seat belts and their anchors worn components or wiring for any
that has deployed must be during a crash to make sure they reason. Tampering could cause
replaced along with the control are operating properly. the airbags to deploy, possibly
unit and other related parts. Any causing very serious injury.
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced. Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
Do not try to remove or replace another liquid soaks into a seat-
any airbag by yourself. This must back, it can prevent the side airbag
be done by an authorized dealer or cutoff system from working
a knowledgeable body shop. properly.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a

problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
CONTINUED
37
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:29:24 31SZA620_043
Do not remove or modify a front

seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
38
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:29:34 31SZA620_044
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be

properly restrained. In fact, traffic seriously injured or killed in a
collisions are the number one cause crash.
of death of children age 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state, larger child should be properly
Canadian province and territory restrained with a seat belt and
requires that infants and children be use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect properly restrained when they ride in
them. However, despite their best a vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 57 − 60 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 44 − 56 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
39
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:29:46 31SZA620_045
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to crash statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that
restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
states have laws restricting where front airbag off under certain Children who have outgrown child
children may ride. circumstances (see page 36 ), please seats are also at risk of being injured
follow these guidelines: or killed by an inflating passenger’s
Children who ride in the back are front airbag. Whenever possible,
less likely to be injured by striking Infants larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an with a passenger’s front airbag. If belt. (See page 57 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride the airbag inflates, it can hit the back information about protecting larger
in the back. of the child seat with enough force children.)
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
40
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:30:02 31SZA620_046
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISORS
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has

warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
41
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:30:13 31SZA620_047
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has two rows of back Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
seats where children can be properly an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in a back
restrained. If you ever have to carry passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a
a group of children, and a child must child, or because the child requires child than the front.
ride in front: attention.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 57 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 15 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 19 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
17 ).
42
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:30:24 31SZA620_048
Additional Safety Precautions Make sure any unused seat belt For example, infants and small
Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, children left in a vehicle on a hot
your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, day can die from heatstroke. A
seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and child left alone with the key in the

thrown forward and crush the locked. If a child wraps a loose ignition switch can accidentally set
child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they the vehicle in motion, possibly
seat-back. If you are wearing a can be seriously or fatally injured. injuring themselves or others.
seat belt, the child can be torn (See pages 53 and 54 for how to
from your arms and be seriously activate and deactivate the Lock all doors, the tailgate and the
hurt or killed. lockable retractor.) glass hatch when your vehicle is
not in use. Children who play in
Never put a seat belt over yourself Never let two children use the vehicles can accidentally get
and a child. During a crash, the same seat belt. If they do, they trapped inside. Teach your
belt could press deep into the child could be very seriously injured in a children not to play in or around
and cause serious or fatal injuries. crash. vehicles.
Use the childproof door locks to Do not leave children alone in a Keep vehicle keys/remote
prevent children from opening the vehicle. Leaving children without transmitters out of the reach of
rear doors. This can prevent adult supervision is illegal in most children. Even very young
children from accidentally falling states, Canadian provinces and children learn how to unlock
out (see page 144 ). territories, and can be very vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
hazardous. switch, and open the tailgate or
the glass hatch, which can lead to
accidental injury or death.
43
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:30:35 31SZA620_049
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the

second row, a rear-facing child seat
Child Seat Type may prevent the driver or a front
An infant must be properly passenger from moving their seat as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining far back as recommended, or from
child seat until the child reaches the locking their seat-back in the desired
seat maker’s weight or height limit position.
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old. It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
Only a rear-facing child seat provides advanced front airbag system.
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
44
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:30:45 31SZA620_050
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children and weight are appropriate for a
strongly recommend that you install rear-facing seat.
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat Of the different seats available, we

as far forward as needed, and leave it recommend those that have a five-
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get point harness system as shown.
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
Placing a rear-facing child seat for the seat.
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
crash.
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child Many states, Canadian provinces and
seat in the back seat, not the territories allow a child one year of
front. age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height CONTINUED
45
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:30:53 31SZA620_051
Child Seat Placement Even with advanced front airbags

We strongly recommend placing a that automatically turn the
forward-facing child seat in a back passenger’s front airbag off (see Placing a forward-facing child
seat, not the front. page 36 ), a back seat is the safest seat in the front seat can result
place for a small child. in serious injury or death if the
Placing a forward-facing child seat in front airbag inflates.
the front seat of a vehicle equipped If it is necessary to put a forward-
with a passenger’s airbag can be facing child seat in the front, move If you must place a forward-
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too the vehicle seat as far to the rear as facing child seat in front, move
far forward, or the child’s head is possible, be sure the child seat is the vehicle seat as far back as
thrown forward during a collision, an firmly secured to the vehicle and the possible, and properly restrain
inflating airbag can strike the child child is properly strapped in the seat. the child.
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
46
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:31:03 31SZA620_052
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need Since LATCH-compatible child seats 2. The child seat should be of the
to choose either a conventional child are easier to install and reduce the proper type and size to fit the child.
seat, or one designed for use with possibility of improper installation, Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for we recommend selecting this style. facing for small children.

CHildren (LATCH) system.
In seating positions and vehicles not 3. The child seat should fit the
Conventional child seats must be equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- vehicle seating position (or
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, compatible child seat can be installed positions) where it will be used.
whereas LATCH-compatible seats using a seat belt.
are secured by attaching the seat to Before purchasing a conventional
hardware built into the rear seating Whatever type of seat you choose, to child seat, or using a previously
positions. provide proper protection, a child purchased one, we recommend that
seat should meet three you test the seat in the specific
requirements: vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
1. The child seat should meet
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS
213 on the box.
47
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:31:11 31SZA620_053
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat A child seat secured with a seat belt The following pages provide
and a good place to install the seat, should be installed as firmly as guidelines on how to properly install
there are three main steps in possible. However, it does not need a child seat. A forward-facing child
installing the seat: to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side seat is used in all examples, but the
movement can be expected and instructions are the same for rear-
1. Properly secure the child seat to should not reduce the child seat’s facing child seats.
the vehicle. All child seats must be effectiveness.
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with If the child seat is not secure, try
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and installing it in a different seating
Tethers for CHildren) system. A position, or use a different style of
child whose seat is not properly child seat that can be firmly secured.
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash. 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly strapped in the child seat
secured. After installing a child according to the child seat maker’s
seat, push and pull the seat instructions. A child who is not
forward and from side-to-side to properly secured in a child seat
verify that it is secure. can be seriously injured in a crash.
48
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:31:24 31SZA620_054
Installing a Child Seat with MARKS Using the Outer LATCH

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) at each of the
second row seats and the passenger’s
side third row seat.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with LOWER ANCHORS
LATCH.
When you install a child seat in the
The location of each lower anchor is second row seating position, use the To install a LATCH-compatible child
indicated by a small button above the lower anchors as shown in the seat in either outer second row seat:
anchor point. illustration. You can install up to
three child seats at a time with 1. Move the seat belt buckle or
You can find lower anchors in the LATCH. tongue away from the lower
slits in the seat-backs. anchors.
Do not attach two child seat
connectors to a single lower anchor 2. Make sure there are no objects
at a time. near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors. CONTINUED
49
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:31:33 31SZA620_055
TETHER STRAP
RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page
seat, then attach the seat to the have a flexible-type connector as 157 ), then route the tether strap
lower anchors according to the shown above. through the legs of the head
child seat maker’s instructions. restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
Some LATCH-compatible seats the child seat maker’s instructions twisted.
have a rigid-type connector as for adjusting or tightening the fit.
shown above.
50
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:31:44 31SZA620_056
Using the Center LATCH 2. Follow step 1 through 4 as

described previously to secure the
child seat.

3. Lower the head restraint first.
Route the tether strap over the
head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
4. Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the To install a LATCH-compatible child
tether anchor, then tighten the seat in the center seating position on
strap as instructed by the child the second row seat, use the center
seat maker. lower anchors as shown above.
7. Push and pull the child seat 1. Unlatch the detachable seat belt
forward and from side-to-side to anchor latch and retract the seat
verify that it is secure. belt all the way into the ceiling.
Place the latch plate and anchor
latch in their holding slots (see
page 162 ).
CONTINUED
51
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:31:53 31SZA620_057
To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Lower the head restraint first.

seat in the passenger’s side seating Route the tether strap over the
position of the third row: head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
1. Unlatch the detachable seat belt anchor, making sure the strap is
anchor latch and retract the seat not twisted.
belt all the way into the passenger’s
side panel. Place the latch plate 4. Push and pull the child seat
and anchor latch in their holding forward and from side-to-side to
slots (see page 163 ). verify that it is secure.
LOWER ANCHORS
The location of each lower anchor is

indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
You can find lower anchors in the

slits in the seat-backs.
2. Follow steps 1 through 4 of the

second row installation on pages
49 and 50 .
52
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:32:04 31SZA620_058
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
the center seating position of the seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
second row or in the third row, make through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
sure the detachable seat belt is to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
securely latched (see page 163 ). then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt. 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
53
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:32:13 31SZA620_059
Installing a Child Seat with a

Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or third row.
Since a tether can provide additional

security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or To deactivate the lockable retractor
push on the back of the seat while and remove a child seat, unlatch the
pulling up on the belt. buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
54
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:32:22 31SZA620_060
Second Row Installation
TETHER STRAP

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT Outer seating position
Each second row seat has a tether 1. After properly securing the child For the center seat, lower the head
anchorage point behind the seat- seat (see page 53 ), lift the head restraint, then route the tether strap
back. restraint, then route the tether over the head restraint and seat-back.
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
CONTINUED
55
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:32:33 31SZA620_061
Third Row Installation
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the Each third row seat has a tether 2. Route the tether strap over the
anchor, making sure the tether anchorage point behind the seat- head restraint, then attach the
strap is not twisted. back. tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the strap is not
3. Tighten the strap according to the 1. After properly securing the child twisted.
seat maker’s instructions. seat (see page 53 ), lower the head
restraint. 3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
56
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:32:42 31SZA620_062
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury

booster seat and wear the lap/ or death if the passenger’s front
shoulder belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
57
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:32:53 31SZA620_063
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states, Canadian provinces and
between the child’s neck and arm? territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
possible, touching the child’s 60 lbs). Be sure to check current
thighs? laws in the states, provinces or
territories where you intend to drive.
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip? Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
If you answer yes to all these make sure the booster seat meets
questions, the child is ready to wear federal safety standards (see page
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If 47 ) and that you follow the booster
you answer no to any question, the seat maker’s instructions.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
58
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:33:04 31SZA620_064
If a child who uses a booster seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
must ride in front, move the vehicle Front while age may be one indicator of
seat as far back as possible and be The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
sure the child is wearing the seat Administration and Transport there are other important factors you

belt properly. Canada recommend that all children should consider.
age 12 and under be properly
A child may continue using a booster restrained in a back seat. Physical Size
seat until the tops of their ears are Physically, a child must be large
even with the top of the vehicle’s or If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
booster’s seat-back. A child of this inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 17 and 57 ). If
height should be tall enough to use frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
the lap/shoulder belt without a serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat. unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front.
of position.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride.
injuries.
CONTINUED
59
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:33:15 31SZA620_065
If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
Carefully read the owner’s manual, in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
and make sure you understand all crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety effective and increase the chance
information. Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could
most position. cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
Have the child sit up straight, back chance that the child will slide
against the seat, and feet on or under the belt in a crash and be
near the floor. injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
Supervise the child. Even mature crash.
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
60
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:33:26 31SZA620_066
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the tailgate/glass hatch open,

carbon monoxide gas. Carbon airflow can pull exhaust gas into your
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. vehicle’s interior and create a
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause hazardous condition. If you must

maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill drive with the tailgate/glass hatch
follow the information on this page. you. open, open all the windows and set
the heating and cooling system/
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or climate control system as shown
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to below.
carbon monoxide.
The vehicle is raised for an oil If you must sit in your parked vehicle
change. with the engine running, even in an
You notice a change in the sound High levels of carbon monoxide can unconfined area, adjust the heating
of the exhaust. collect rapidly in enclosed areas, and cooling system/climate control
The vehicle was in a crash that such as a garage. Do not run the system as follows:
may have damaged the underside. engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the 1. Select the fresh air mode.
engine only long enough to move the 2. Select the mode.
vehicle out of the garage. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
61
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:33:36 31SZA620_067
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
RADIATOR CAP
BATTERY LABEL
62
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:33:57 31SZA620_068
Safety Labels
SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

U.S. models
U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian models
U.S. models
63
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:34:00 31SZA620_069
64
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:34:05 31SZA620_070
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Instrument Panel ............................. 67 Power Windows ............................. 165
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 69 Moonroof ........................................ 168
contribute to the daily operation of Gauges .............................................. 82 Parking Brake ................................ 169
your vehicle. All the essential Multi-Information Display .............. 87 Mirrors ............................................ 170
controls are within easy reach. Controls Near the Steering Driving Position Memory
Wheel .......................................... 123 System......................................... 173

Windshield Wipers and Interior Lights ................................ 176
Washers .................................. 124 Interior Convenience Items .......... 179
Rear Window Wiper and Center Console .......................... 180
Washer .................................... 125 Console Compartments ........ 180
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 126 Beverage Holders ...................... 181
Hazard Warning Button ................ 130 Storage Compartment ............... 182
Rear Window Defogger ................ 130 Glove Box ................................... 183
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 131 Integrated Sunshades ............... 183
Steering Wheel Adjustment ......... 133 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 183
Keys and Locks.............................. 134 Conversation Mirror ................. 184
Immobilizer System....................... 135 Sun Visor .................................... 184
Ignition Switch ............................... 137 Vanity Mirror ............................. 185
Door Locks ..................................... 138 Coat Hooks ................................. 185
Childproof Door Locks ............. 144 Seat Under Tray ........................ 185
Tailgate and Glass Hatch.............. 144 Accessory Power Sockets......... 186
Power Tailgate ........................... 145 AC Power Outlet ........................ 187
Remote Transmitter ...................... 150 Cargo Hooks .............................. 188
Seats ................................................ 154 Cargo Floor Storage
Detachable Anchor.................... 162 Compartment ......................... 188
Control Locations ............................ 66 Seat Heaters ................................... 164 Cargo Net ................................... 189
65
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:34:13 31SZA620_071
Control Locations
DRIVER’S FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL MOONROOF SWITCH＊ HomeLink BUTTONS＊ MIRROR CONTROL
AIRBAG (P.11, 29) INDICATORS (P.67) (P.168) (P.357) AUTO BUTTON＊
GAUGES (P.82) (P.170)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM＊ AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.173) (P.208)
PARKING BRAKE HEATING/COOLING

RELEASE HANDLE CONTROLS (P.192)
(P.169) CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.199)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.138) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
POWER WINDOW (P.413)
SWITCHES
(P.165)
FUEL FILL DOOR REAR HEATING/
RELEASE HANDLE COOLING CONTROLS
(P.395) (P.197)
REAR CLIMATE
GLASS HATCH CONTROL SYSTEM
RELEASE BUTTON/ (P.204)
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH＊
(P.145) HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE ACCESSORY POWER AUXILIARY INPUT HEADPHONE
HANDLE (P.397) PEDAL (P.169) SOCKET (P.186) JACKS＊ (P.347) CONNECTORS＊ (P.348)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
＊: If equipped
66
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:34:24 31SZA620_072
Instrument Panel
On vehicles without navigation system
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION INDICATOR (P.77) TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR (P.75)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.70) FOG LIGHT LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.78)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.70) INDICATOR＊1 (P.78) CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.78)
VTM-4 INDICATOR＊2 (P.77) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
LIGHT CONTROL INDICATOR (P.79) SIDE AIRBAG OFF (P.72)

INDICATOR (P.72) CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR
(P.79) (P.78)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.70) (P.78)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR (P.79)
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR＊2 PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
(P.76) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.71)
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
(P.73)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.69)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)

SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.73) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.72)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR (P.79)
INDICATOR (P.78) LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.80)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.74) WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR＊1 (P.80)
INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.83) SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR＊1 (P.81)
STARTER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.75)
＊1 : If equipped
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
67
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:34:32 31SZA620_073
Instrument Panel
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.70) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

(P.72)
VTM-4 INDICATOR＊(P.77) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.78)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.70) FOG LIGHT CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P.78) (P.78)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.70)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR (P.79) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
＊
INDICATOR (P.72)
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(P.76) CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.78)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.78)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.71)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE/ SEAT BELT REMINDER
TPMS INDICATOR (P.74) INDICATOR (P.69)
SUPPLEMENTAL
VSA ACTIVATION RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.73) INDICATOR (P.72)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.73) LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.80)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR (P.79)
INDICATOR (P.78)
MESSAGE INDICATOR (P.77)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.87) SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.81)
＊ : 4WD models only

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
68
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:34:43 31SZA620_074
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many Seat Belt Reminder If either of you do not fasten your
indicators to give you important Indicator seat belt while driving, the beeper
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you will sound and the indicator will flash
turn the ignition switch to the ON again at regular intervals. For more
(II) position. It reminds you and your information, see page 22 .
passengers to fasten your seat belts.

A beeper also sounds if you have not On vehicles with navigation system
fastened your seat belt. You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
If you turn the ignition switch to the SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
ON (II) position before fastening information display (see page 95 ).
your seat belt, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do For more information, see page 22 .
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not

fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
69
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:34:55 31SZA620_075
Low Oil Pressure Charging System Malfunction Indicator

Indicator Indicator Lamp
The engine can be severely If this indicator comes on when the For more information, see page
damaged if this indicator flashes engine is running, the battery is not 522 .
or stays on when the engine is being charged. For more information,
running. For more information, see page 521 . On vehicles with navigation system
see page 521 . You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
On vehicles with navigation system EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
On vehicles with navigation system You will also see a ‘‘CHECK the multi-information display (see
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on page 95 ). For more information, see
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message the multi-information display (see page 522 .
on the multi-information display page 95 ).
(see page 95 ).
70
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:35:05 31SZA620_076
U.S. Canada Parking Brake 2. If it remains on after you have On vehicles with navigation system
and Brake fully released the parking brake You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
System while the engine is running, or if it FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
Indicator (Red) comes on while driving, there SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
This indicator has two functions: could be a problem with the brake information display (see page 95 ).
system. For more information, see

1. It comes on when you turn the page 523 .
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 95 ).
71
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:35:21 31SZA620_077
Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada Anti-lock Brake System

System Indicator Side Airbag Off (ABS) Indicator
This indicator comes on for several Indicator This indicator normally comes on
seconds when you turn the ignition This indicator comes on for several for a few seconds when you turn
switch to the ON (II) position. If it seconds when you turn the ignition the ignition switch to the ON (II)
comes on at any other time, it switch to the ON (II) position. If it position, and when the ignition
indicates a potential problem with comes on at any other time, it switch is turned to the START
your front airbags. This indicator will indicates that the passenger’s side (III) position. If it comes on at any
also alert you to a potential problem airbag has automatically shut off. other time, there is a problem with
with your side airbags, passenger’s For more information, see page 35 . the ABS. If this happens, have
side airbag automatic cutoff system, your vehicle checked at a dealer.
side curtain airbags, automatic seat On vehicles with navigation system With this indicator on, your
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER vehicle still has normal braking
sensor, or the front passenger’s SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the ability but no anti-lock function.
weight sensors. For more multi-information display (see page For more information, see page
information, see page 35 . 95 ). 429 .
On vehicles with navigation system On vehicles with navigation system

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
multi-information display (see page information display (see page
95 ). 95 ).
72
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:35:38 31SZA620_078
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal and

(VSA) System Indicator Hazard Warning
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for Indicators
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the The left or right turn signal indicator
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) blinks when you signal a lane change
position. position. For more information, see or turn. If an indicator does not blink

page 431 . or blinks rapidly, it usually means
If it comes on and stays on at any This indicator has three functions: one of the turn signal bulbs is
other time, or if it does not come on burned out (see page 484 ). Replace
when you turn the ignition switch to 1. It comes on as a reminder that you the bulb as soon as possible, since
the ON (II) position, there is a have turned off the vehicle other drivers cannot see that you are
problem with the VSA or Hill Start stability assist (VSA) system. signaling.
Assist systems. Take your vehicle to
a dealer to have it checked. Without 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see When you press the hazard warning
VSA, your vehicle still has normal page 431 ). button, both turn signal indicators
driving ability, but will not have VSA and all turn signals on the outside of
traction and stability enhancement. 3. It comes on along with the VSA the vehicle flash.
See page 431 for more information system indicator if there is a
on the VSA system. problem with the VSA or Hill Start
Assist systems.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA On vehicles with navigation system
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
information display (see page SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
95 ). information display (see page 95 ).
73
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:35:51 31SZA620_079
Low Tire Pressure Low Tire Pressure/ If this happens, pull to the side
Indicator TPMS Indicator of the road when it is safe,
On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles with navigation system check which tire has lost
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for pressure on the multi-
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the information display, and
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) determine the cause. If it is
position. If it comes on while driving, position. because of a flat tire, have the
it indicates that one or more of your This indicator has two functions: flat tire repaired as soon as
vehicle’s tires are significantly low possible. If two or more tires are
on pressure. 1. If it comes on while driving, it underinflated, call a professional
indicates that one or more of your towing service. For more
If this happens, pull to the side of the vehicle’s tires are significantly low information, see page 531 .
road when it is safe, check which tire on pressure.
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
replace the flat tire with the compact PRESSURE’’ message on the
spare (see page 508 ), and have the multi-information display (see
flat tire repaired as soon as possible. page 96 ).
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service Check the tire pressure monitor
(see page 531 ). For more on the multi-information display
information, see page 420 . and determine the cause (see page
424 ).
74
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:36:04 31SZA620_080
2. If this indicator begins to flash, U.S. Canada Tire Pressure Monitoring

there is a problem with the tire Starter System System (TPMS) Indicator
pressure monitoring system Indicator On vehicles without navigation system
(TPMS). You will also see a On vehicles without navigation system This indicator normally comes on for
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ This indicator comes on when there a few seconds when you turn the
message on the multi-information is a problem with the starter system. ignition switch to the ON (II)

display. The indicator continues to For more information, see page 411 . position.
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this On vehicles with navigation system If this indicator comes on and stays
happens, have your dealer check If you see a ‘‘CHECK STARTER on at any other time, or if it does not
the system as soon as possible. SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- come on when you turn the ignition
For more information, see page information display, there is a switch to the ON (II) position, there
426 . problem with the starter system (see is a problem with the TPMS. With
page 96 ). this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator and the tire
pressure monitor will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
75
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:36:11 31SZA620_081
A/T Temperature On 4WD models with navigation system

Indicator You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMP
4WD models only HIGH’’ message on the multi- Continuing to drive with the A/T
This indicator monitors the information display (see page 96 ). temperature indicator on may cause
temperature of the automatic serious damage to the transmission.
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
76
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:36:26 31SZA620_082
Maintenance Message Indicator VTM-4 Indicator

Information Indicator
On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles with navigation system 4WD models only
This indicator comes on for a few This indicator comes on when there This indicator normally comes on for
seconds when you turn the ignition is a system message on the multi- a few seconds when you turn the
switch to the ON (II) position. It information display. Press the INFO ignition switch to the ON (II)

reminds you that it is time to take button on the steering wheel (see position. If it comes on at any other
your vehicle in for scheduled page 87 ) to see the message (see time, there is a problem in the 4WD
maintenance. The maintenance main page 94 ). system. Take the vehicle to your
items and sub items will be displayed dealer to have it checked.
in the information display. See page Most of the time, this indicator
455 for more information on the comes on along with other indicators If the indicator blinks while driving,
maintenance information. in the instrument panel such as the the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS high. Pull to the side of the road
This indicator goes off when your indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
dealer resets it after completing the the engine idle until the indicator
required maintenance service. goes out.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4

indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
77
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:36:41 31SZA620_083
Immobilizer System Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator

Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when This indicator reminds you that the This indicator comes on with the
you turn the ignition switch to the exterior lights are on. It comes on high beam headlights. For more
ON (II) position. It will then go off if when the light switch is in either the information, see page 126 .
you have inserted a properly coded or position. This indicator
ignition key. If it is not a properly will also come on when the light Cruise Main Indicator
coded key, the indicator will blink, switch is in AUTO and the lights
and the engine’s fuel system will be turn on automatically. If you turn the This indicator comes on when you
disabled (see page 135 ). ignition switch to the ACCESSORY turn on the cruise control system by
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without pressing the CRUISE button (see
turning off the light switch, this page 350 ).
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open Cruise Control Indicator
the driver’s door.
This indicator comes on when you
Fog Light Indicator set the cruise control. See page
350 for information on operating the
Except LX models cruise control.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 128 .
78
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:36:57 31SZA620_084
Light Control Indicator Daytime Running Lights Fuel Economy Indicator

Indicator
On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles without navigation system While the engine is operating in its
This indicator normally comes on for If this indicator comes on when the most economical range, this
a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch is turned to the ON indicator may come on and stay on.
ignition switch to the ON (II) (II) position and the parking brake is It goes off when your vehicle uses

position. If it comes on at any other released, it means there is a problem extra fuel.
time, there is a problem with the in the high beam headlight’s circuit.
automatic lighting control system. Have your vehicle checked by your Door-open Indicator
Have your vehicle checked by your dealer.
dealer as soon as possible. This indicator comes on if any door
On vehicles with navigation system is not closed tightly.
On vehicles with navigation system If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
If you see a ‘‘CHECK LIGHT SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
CONTROL SYSTEM’’ message on information display, there is a
the multi-information display, there problem with the daytime running
is a problem with the automatic light system. Take your vehicle to a
headlight control system. Take your dealer to have it checked.
vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
79
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:37:09 31SZA620_085
Washer Level Indicator Low Fuel Indicator On vehicles with navigation system
You will also see a ‘‘LOW FUEL’’
If equipped message on the multi-information
This indicator comes on when the display.
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 477 ).
On 4WD models with navigation system

You will see a ‘‘LOW WASHER
FLUID’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page 96 ). LOW FUEL INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
This indicator comes on as a

reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there

are about 2.9 U.S. gal (10.8 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there is

a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
80
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:37:23 31SZA620_086
Security System Indicator Door, Glass Hatch, and Tailgate Tire Pressure Monitor
Except LX models Open Indicator
On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles without navigation system
The appropriate tire indicator will
come on along with the low tire
pressure indicator if a tire is

significantly underinflated or has
suddenly lost pressure. See Low
Your vehicle has a door, glass hatch, Tire Pressure Indicator for what to
and tailgate open indicator on the do if this indicator comes on.
information display. If any door(s),
the glass hatch, or the tailgate is not On vehicles with navigation system
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
closed tightly, the appropriate light/ This indicator is displayed as the
U.S. model is shown. lights will come on to remind you to system message on the multi-
close the tailgate, the glass hatch or information display (see page 424 ).
This indicator comes on when the the door(s).
security system is set. See page
349 for more information on the On vehicles with navigation system
security system. The door, glass hatch, and tailgate
open indicator appears on the multi-
information display (see page 13 ).
81
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:37:35 31SZA620_087
Gauges
On vehicles without navigation system Temperature Gauge

SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
TACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
SELECT/RESET KNOB INFORMATION DISPLAY
system, see page 519 .
SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
TACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
or less than the actual amount.
Avoid driving with an extremely low

f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
SELECT/RESET KNOB MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
U.S. models are shown.
82
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:37:48 31SZA620_088
Gauges
INFORMATION DISPLAY Odometer

SELECT/RESET KNOB
The odometer shows the total
OUTSIDE distance your vehicle has been
ODOMETER TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.

RANGE federal law and Canadian provincial/
TRIP METER B TRIP METER A territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
ENGINE
OIL LIFE
Trip Meter
INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY This meter shows the number of
U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown. miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
Information Display To switch the display, press and There are two trip meters: Trip A
On vehicles without navigation system release the select/reset knob and Trip B. Switch between these
The information display shows the repeatedly. When you turn the displays by pressing the select/reset
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life, ignition switch to the ON (II) knob repeatedly.
outside temperature (if equipped), position, your last selection is Each trip meter works independently,
instant fuel economy, average fuel displayed. so you can keep track of two
economy, range (estimated distance), different distances.
and maintenance item code(s). On vehicles with navigation system To reset a trip meter, display it, and
For information about the multi- then press and hold the select/reset
information display, see page 87 . knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
83
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:37:58 31SZA620_089
Gauges
Instant Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy Range (Estimated Distance)

This display shows the instant fuel When either of the trip meters (trip This display shows the estimated
economy you are getting. A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s distance you can travel on the fuel
average fuel economy since you last remaining in the tank.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.) reset that trip meter can be shown
or l/100 km (Canada). on the information display (mpg on This distance is estimated from the
U.S. models and l/100 km on fuel economy you have achieved
Canadian models). This number is over the last few miles (kilometers),
updated once per 10 seconds. To see so it will vary with changes in speed,
the average fuel economy, press and traffic condition, etc.
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly.
When you reset a trip meter, the

average fuel economy for that trip
meter also resets.
84
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:38:06 31SZA620_090
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator In certain weather conditions, To adjust the outside temperature
Except LX models temperature readings near freezing indicator, press and hold the select/
This indicator displays the outside (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is reset knob for 10 seconds. The
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S. forming on the road surface. following sequence will appear for 1
models) or Celsius (Canadian second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4,
models). If the outside temperature is −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,

incorrectly displayed, you can adjust −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
The temperature sensor is in the it up to ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C
front bumper. The temperature in Canadian models) warmer or When the temperature reaches the
reading can be affected by heat cooler. desired value, release the select/
reflection from the road surface, reset knob. You should see the new
engine heat, and the exhaust from NOTE: The temperature must be outside temperature displayed.
surrounding traffic. This can cause stabilized before doing this
an incorrect temperature reading procedure.
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
85
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:38:14 31SZA620_091
Gauges
Maintenance Information Check Fuel Cap Message If the system still detects a leak in
The information display in the Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
instrument panel shows you the system will detect a loose or missing system, the malfunction indicator
engine oil life and maintenance fuel fill cap as an evaporative system lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
service items when the ignition leak. The first time a leak is detected cap was not already tightened, turn
switch is in the ON (II) position. This a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message the engine off, and check or
information helps to keep you aware appears on the information display. retighten the fuel fill cap until it
of the periodic maintenance your clicks at least once. The MIL should
vehicle needs for continued trouble- Turn the engine off, and confirm the go off after several days of normal
free driving. Refer to page 455 for fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen driving once the cap is tightened or
more information. it, then retighten it until it clicks at replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
least once. The message should go have your vehicle inspected by a
off after several days of normal dealer. For more information, see
driving once you tighten or replace page 522 .
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message

will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
86
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:38:25 31SZA620_092
Multi-Information Display
On vehicles with navigation system INFO (▲/▼) With the ignition switch in the ON
The multi-information display in the BUTTON (II) position, the multi-information
instrument panel displays various display changes as shown on the
information and messages when the next page each time you press the
ignition switch is in the ON (II) INFO (▲/▼) button or the SEL/
position. Some of the messages help RESET button.

you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep When you turn the ignition switch to
you aware of the periodic the ON (II) position, your last
maintenance your vehicle needs for selection is displayed.
continued trouble-free driving. SEL/RESET
BUTTON In the multi-information display, the
When you open the driver’s door, a system message is also displayed
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the To change the display, press the (see page 94 ) and you can
multi-information display. INFO (▲/▼) button on the steering customize your vehicle control
wheel repeatedly until the main settings (see page 97 ).
menu appears (see page 88 ).
You can also change the display by

pressing the select/reset knob in the
instrument panel.
CONTINUED
87
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:38:29 31SZA620_093
Main Menu
INFO button
Go to Customize Menu (See page 97) SEL/RESET button
(See page 89)
Trip Computer
(See page 92)
Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 91)
Go to HandsFreeLink Menu (See page 92)
88
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:38:40 31SZA620_094
Odometer Trip Meter
ODOMETER TRIP METER

When the main menu is blank or
Trip Computer is displayed, pressing The odometer shows the total This meter shows the number of
the SEL/RESET button changes the distance your vehicle has been miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
display to ‘‘odometer/trip meter’’ driven. It measures miles in U.S. driven since you last reset it. There
‘‘outside temperature/trip meter’’ models and kilometers in Canadian are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
and ‘‘engine oil life.’’ models. It is illegal under U.S. B. Each trip meter works
federal law and Canadian provincial/ independently, so you can keep track
territorial regulations to disconnect, of two different distances.
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles To reset a trip meter, display it, and
or kilometers indicated. then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’ CONTINUED
89
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:38:50 31SZA620_095
When you reset Trip A, AVERAGE Compass Outside Temperature

FUEL A, AVERAGE SPEED A, and
ELAPSED TIME A are reset at the OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
same time. When you reset Trip B, U.S.
AVERAGE FUEL B, AVERAGE
SPEED B, and ELAPSED TIME B
are reset.
You can customize the Trip A,

Canada
AVERAGE FUEL A, AVERAGE
SPEED A, and ELAPSED TIME A
reset condition on the multi-
In the left corner of the lower This shows the outside Fahrenheit
segment, a compass indicates which temperature in U.S. models, and
direction your vehicle is pointed. Celsius temperature in Canadian
models.
90
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:39:01 31SZA620_096
The temperature sensor is in the Engine Oil Life Tire Pressure Monitor
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat ENGINE OIL LIFE
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause

an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under U.S.
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take Canada
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
In certain weather conditions, This shows the remaining life of the When the tire pressure monitor is
temperature readings near freezing engine oil. It shows 100% after the shown on the multi-information
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is engine oil is replaced and the display display, press the SEL/RESET
forming on the road surface. is reset. The engine oil life is button. The display changes as
You can adjust the outside calculated based on engine operating shown.
temperature display (see page 105 ). conditions and accumulated engine You can see the pressure of each tire
revolutions. For more information, in this monitor. If one or more tires
see page 455 . are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 424 .
91
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:39:13 31SZA620_097
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To use the system, your cell phone Trip Computer
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
361 for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to HFL and how to
receive or make phone calls, or visit
the handsfreelink.com website. In
Canada, visit www.honda.ca, or call 1-
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
You can receive or make phone calls Along with the trip meter, the trip
from your cell phone through your computer calculates these values:
vehicle’s Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL) system without touching your Instant Fuel Economy
cell phone. Average Fuel Economy
Range
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
92
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:39:23 31SZA620_098
INSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S. RANGE ELAPSED TIME A/B

models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km This shows the estimated distance This shows the accumulated
(Canadian models) you can travel on the fuel remaining traveling time since you last reset it.
This shows your instant fuel in the fuel tank. This distance is When you turn the ignition switch to
economy. estimated from the fuel economy the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
you received over the last several TIME is reset.

AVERAGE FUEL A/B miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
This shows your vehicle’s average so it will vary with changes in speed, You can customize the TRIP A INFO
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) traffic, etc. (Trip A, AVERAGE FUEL A,
or liter/100 km (Canadian models) ELAPSED TIME A, and AVERAGE
since you last reset Trip A or Trip B. AVERAGE SPEED A/B SPEED A) reset condition in the
This shows the average speed you multi-information display (see page
are traveling in miles per hour (mph) 106 ).
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
93
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:39:32 31SZA620_099
System Messages The system message(s) triggers the When there are several messages to
appropriate indicator(s) on the be shown, the system switches the
instrument panel, including the messages every 5 seconds.
system message indicator, to come The message is shown until you
on. The system message indicator push the INFO (▲ or ▼) button.
does not go off until the problem(s) To see the message again, press the
is corrected. INFO (▲ or ▼) button, 5 seconds
after the display disappears.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the Here is a list of messages shown on
first time. the multi-information display:
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
If there is a problem with your

vehicle, for example the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
94
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:39:51 31SZA620_100
U.S.
See page See page
13 521
See page
Canada 169

See page See page
22 522
U.S.
See page See page
22 521
See page
Canada 523
See page See page
35 430
U.S. U.S.
See page
431
See page See page
Canada 35 Canada 523
See page
79
CONTINUED
95
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:40:08 31SZA620_101
U.S.
See page See page
425 387
See page On Touring models
Canada 412
See page
426
See page
128
See page See page
426 413
See page See page See page

76 389 460
On Touring models
U.S.
See page See page
477 396
Canada See page
147
See page See page
80 137
On Touring models
96
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:40:21 31SZA620_102
Customize Settings If you turn the ignition switch to the

ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.

On Touring models
You can customize some vehicle
control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER
1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.
Touring model is shown.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
When the main menu displays make sure your remote transmitter If you want the settings as they were
‘‘Keyless Memory SettingsTM,’’ you is linked to the system (see Keyless when the vehicle left the factory,
can customize some vehicle control Memory SettingsTM on page 153 ). select DEFAULT ALL, as described
settings. on page 100 .
To enter the customizing mode, If you want to change any vehicle
press the SEL/RESET button. control settings, select CHG
To change the settings, the ignition SETTING, then press the SEL/
switch must be in the ON (II) RESET button.
position, and the vehicle must be
stopped with the transmission in Refer to the table on the following
Park. pages about the settings you want to
customize. CONTINUED
97
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:40:27 31SZA620_103
Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page

METER SETUP LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the language used in the display. ENGLISH＊1
(P.103) FRENCH 104
SPANISH
ADJUST OUTSIDE Changes the outside temperature reading above or −5°F ∼ ±0°F＊1 ∼ 5°F
TEMP. DISPLAY below its current reading. (U.S.) 105
−3°C ∼ ±0°C＊1 ∼ 3°C
(Canada)
TRIP A INFO RESET Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, with REFUEL
average fuel A, elapsed time A, and average speed MANUAL ONLY ＊1 106
A. IGN OFF
POSITION SETUP＊2 MEMORY POSITION LINK Changes the driver’s seat and the outside mirror ON＊1 109
(P.108) positions to a stored setting. OFF
＊1 : Default setting
＊2 : On Touring models
98
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:40:35 31SZA620_104
Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page

LIGHTING SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights 60 SEC 15 SEC 111
(P.110) DIMMING TIME stay on after you close the doors and the tailgate. 30 SEC＊
HEADLIGHT Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights 60 SEC
AUTO OFF TIMER stay on after you close the driver’s door. 30 SEC 0 SEC 112
15 SEC＊

AUTO LIGHT Changes the timing of when the headlights come MAX LOW
SENSITIVITY on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO HIGH MIN 113
position. MID＊
DOOR/WINDOW AUTO DOOR LOCK Changes the setting of when to automatically lock SHIFT FROM P
SETUP the doors. WITH VEH SPEED＊ 116
(P.115) OFF
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes the setting of when to automatically SHIFT TO P＊ DRIVER DOOR＊/
unlock the driver’s/all the doors. IGN OFF ALL DOORS 117
OFF
KEY AND REMOTE Changes which doors unlock with the remote DRIVER DOOR ＊ 119
UNLOCK MODE transmitter on a first push. ALL DOORS
KEYLESS LOCK The exterior lights flash each time you press the ON＊
ACKNOWLEDGMENT LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also OFF 120
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
SECURITY RELOCK Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the 90 SEC
TIMER doors to relock and the security system to set after 60 SEC 121
you unlock but do not open the door. 30 SEC＊
DEFAULT ALL Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default. SET 100
(P.100) CANCEL ＊
＊: Default setting
99
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:40:44 31SZA620_105
DEFAULT ALL
If you want to set the default settings, To set the default settings, press the When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET see the above display for several
select DEFAULT ALL, then press then press the SEL/RESET button. seconds, then the screen returns to
the SEL/RESET button. CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the If the setting is not successfully
SEL/RESET button. The screen completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
goes back to the previous display. several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
100
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:40:54 31SZA620_106
Customize Settings Each time you press the INFO (▲/

You can customize some of the ▼) button, the screen changes as
vehicle control settings to your shown on the next page. Press the
preference. Here are the settings INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
you can customize: the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button

METER SETUP to enter your selection.
POSITION SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
When you want to change the

vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
101
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:41:00 31SZA620_107
METER SETUP
(See page 103)
POSITION SETUP＊
(See page 108)
Select ‘‘EXIT’’
LIGHTING SETUP
(See page 110)
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
Select (See page 115)
Select ‘‘CANCEL’’ ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’
INFO button
SEL/RESET button
Touring model is shown. ＊ : On Touring models
102
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:41:09 31SZA620_108
Meter Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the meter setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.

DISPLAY
TRIP A INFO RESET
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,

press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/

▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
to enter your selection.
INFO button
SEL/RESET button
CONTINUED
103
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:41:18 31SZA620_109
Language Selection
There are three language selections Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
you can make: English, French, and the selections. completed, the display changes as
Spanish. To choose the language you shown above, and then goes back to
want, follow these instructions: Select the desired language by the customize item screen.
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
You can choose this item to then enter your selection by pressing If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeatedly. repeat the procedure again.
104
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:41:30 31SZA620_110
Adjust Outside Temp. Display

U.S. U.S.

Canada Canada
If you sometimes find that the Adjust the outside temperature value When your selection is successfully
temperature reading is a few by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button completed, the display changes as
degrees above or below the actual repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET shown above, and then goes back to
temperature, you can adjust it by button to set the desired value. the customize item screen.
following these instructions:
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
You can choose this item to message appears, go back to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
repeatedly. again.
CONTINUED
105
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:41:40 31SZA620_111
Trip A Info Reset

There are three settings you can
choose from:
with REFUEL − Trip A Info is reset

every time you refuel your vehicle.
MANUAL ONLY − You can reset

Trip A Info when you press and hold
the SEL/RESET button until the
number resets.
IGN OFF − Trip A Info is reset

when you turn the ignition switch to You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the LOCK (0) position. customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ the selections.
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
106
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:41:45 31SZA620_112

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.

message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
A INFO RESET’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
107
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:41:51 31SZA620_113
Position Setup
On Touring models
You can customize the MEMORY
POSITION LINK setting in position
setup.
While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,

press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.

INFO button
SEL/RESET button
108
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:42:01 31SZA620_114
Memory Position Link

If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat and outside the selections. completed, the display changes as
mirrors move to the positions stored shown above, and then goes back to
in the memory when you open the Select ON or OFF by pressing the the customize item screen.
driver’s door, using the remote INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
transmitter. your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
RESET button. message appears, go back to
You can choose this item to ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and
customize from ‘‘POSITION repeat the procedure again.
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
109
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:42:09 31SZA620_115
Lighting Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is

shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.

to enter your selection. INFO button
SEL/RESET
button
110
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:42:20 31SZA620_116
Interior Light Dimming Time

The interior lights fade out when you Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
close all doors and tailgate. To the selections. completed, the display changes as
change how long the lights stay on shown above, and then goes back to
before they fade out, follow these Select the desired setting by the customize item screen.
instructions: pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
You can choose this item to the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/ TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
▼) button repeatedly. again.
CONTINUED
111
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:42:27 31SZA620_117
Headlight Auto Off Timer

The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
driver’s door. To change how long
the lights stay on before they go off,
follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to see
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING the selections.
▼) button repeatedly. Select the desired setting by
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
112
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:42:39 31SZA620_118
Auto Light Sensitivity

The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity

from the following five levels:
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
HIGH −
When your selection is successfully somewhat bright. You can choose this item to
completed, the display changes as customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
shown above, and then goes back to MID − SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
the customize item screen. The headlights come on when it is as ▼) button repeatedly.
bright as sunset or sunrise.
message appears, go back to LOW −
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’ The headlights come on when it is
and repeat the procedure again. somewhat dark.
MIN −
dark. CONTINUED
113
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:42:46 31SZA620_119
Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully

the selections. completed, the display changes as
Select the desired setting by the customize item screen.
the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
114
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:42:57 31SZA620_120
Door/Window Setup
Here are the five custom settings for
the door/window setup:
AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’

is shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.

INFO (▲/▼) button until you see INFO button
SEL/RESET
the setting you want to customize, button
CONTINUED
115
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:43:08 31SZA620_121
Auto Door Lock

choose from:
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPEED −

The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (U.S.)
and 15 km/h (Canada).
OFF − You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to see
The auto door lock mode is customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW the selections.
deactivated all the time. SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly. Select the desired setting by
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
116
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:43:19 31SZA620_122
Auto Door Unlock

choose from:
SHIFT TO P − The driver’s door or

all the doors, depending on your

selection in the next step, unlock
when you move the shift lever to
Park.
IGN OFF − The driver’s door or all

the doors, depending on your
selection in the next step, unlock
When your selection is successfully when you turn the ignition switch to You can choose this item to
completed, the display changes as the LOCK (0) position. customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
shown above, and then goes back to SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
the customize item screen. OFF − The auto door unlock mode ▼) button repeatedly.
is deactivated all the time.
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
CONTINUED
117
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:43:29 31SZA620_123
Press the SEL/RESET button to see If you choose ‘‘SHIFT TO P’’ or ‘‘IGN When your selection is successfully
the selections. OFF’’, you will see the above display. completed, the display changes as
Select the desired setting by Press the INFO (▲/▼) button to the customize item screen.
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button, switch the door lock mode setting
then enter your selection by pressing between the driver’s door and all If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
the SEL/RESET button. doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
button to enter your selection. DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
118
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:43:39 31SZA620_124
Key and Remote Unlock Mode

To select whether the driver’s door Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
unlocks or all the doors unlock when the selections. completed, the display changes as
you unlock the doors with the shown above, and then goes back to
remote transmitter, follow these Select the desired setting by the customize item screen.
instructions. pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
You can choose this item to the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/ and repeat the procedure again.
▼) button repeatedly.
CONTINUED
119
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:43:47 31SZA620_125
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 349 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this item to Press the SEL/RESET button to see
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW the selections.
▼) button repeatedly. Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
120
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:43:57 31SZA620_126
Security Relock Timer

If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
the tailgate within 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate automatically

relock and the security system sets.
You can change this relock time

from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When your selection is successfully You can choose this item to

completed, the display changes as customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
shown above, and then goes back to SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
the customize item screen. ▼) button repeatedly.

message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
121
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:44:03 31SZA620_127
Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully

the selections. completed, the display changes as
Select the desired setting by the customize item screen.
the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
122
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:44:12 31SZA620_128
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS＊3 HAZARD WARNING

FRONT FOG LIGHTS＊3 (P.311) BUTTON (P.130) WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
(P.126) BLUETOOTH WASHERS
HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM (P.124)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS＊3
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (P.361)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (P.432) PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF INDICATOR
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM (P.36)
SWITCH＊3 (P.386)
VTM-4 LOCK
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY BUTTON＊4 (P.418)
SYSTEM＊3 (P.173)
REAR WINDOW
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.171) DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTON＊3
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER (P.130, 172)
SWITCH (P.138)
ACCESSORY POWER
POWER WINDOW SOCKET (P.186)
SWITCHES (P.165) SEAT HEATER
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE SWITCHES＊3 (P.164)
HANDLE (P.395)
CRUISE CONTROL
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON/ BUTTONS (P.350)
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH＊3 HORN＊1
(P.145) PARKING BRAKE RELEASE VOICE CONTROL STEERING WHEEL MULTI-INFORMATION
HANDLE (P.169) BUTTONS＊2 ADJUSTMENT BUTTONS＊3
Vehicle with navigation system is shown. (P.133) (P.87)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
＊3 : If equipped
123
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:44:21 31SZA620_129
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to LO − The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
OFF − The wipers are not activated. and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
INT − The length of the wipe wipers run at low speed, then
interval is varied automatically complete one more sweep after
according to vehicle speed. you release the lever.
If you turn it to the shortest delay,

1. MIST the wipers change to low speed
2. OFF operation when the vehicle speed
3. INT − Intermittent exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
124
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:44:31 31SZA620_130
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Rear Window Wiper and Washer 3. When you turn the wiper switch to When you shift the transmission to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will the reverse position with the front
return to its parked position. windshield wipers activated, the rear
window wiper operates automatically.
4. Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to spray the The rear window washer uses the

window washer. same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
The rear wiper will not work if the
glass hatch is not fully closed.
If you attempt to open the glass

hatch while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will return to
1. To turn on the rear window wiper, the parked position, and then the
rotate the switch clockwise to ON. glass hatch can be opened. After the
It operates intermittently. glass hatch is closed, the rear wiper
starts to operate again after a few
2. Hold past ON to turn the rear seconds delay.
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
125
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:44:41 31SZA620_131
Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the When the light switch is in either of
left lever to signal a left turn and up these positions, the lights on
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane indicator comes on as a reminder.
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the This indicator stays on if you leave
center when you release it or the lights on and turn the ignition
complete a turn. switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
Headlights On − Turning the
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns High Beams − To switch from low
on the parking lights, taillights, beams to high beams, push the left
instrument panel lights, side-marker lever forward until you hear a click.
lights, and rear license plate lights. The blue high beam indicator will
1. Turn signal come on (see page 78 ). Pull it back
2. Off Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ to return to low beams. To flash the
3. Parking and indicator lights position turns on the headlights. If high beams, pull the lever back
4. AUTO you leave the lights on with the key lightly, then release it. The high
5. Headlights on removed from the ignition switch, beams stay on as long as you hold
6. High beams you will hear a reminder chime when the lever back.
7. Flash high beams you open the driver’s door.
8. Fog lights off ＊
9. Fog lights on＊
＊: If equipped
126
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:44:50 31SZA620_132
Headlights
AUTO − The automatic lighting Even with the automatic lighting LIGHT SENSOR
feature turns on the headlights and feature turned on, we recommend
all other exterior lights, when it that you turn on the lights manually
senses low ambient light. when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
To turn on automatic lighting, turn such as long tunnels or parking

the light switch to AUTO. The lights facilities.
will come on automatically when the
outside light level becomes low (at On vehicles with navigation system
dusk, for example). The lights on To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
indicator comes on as a reminder. SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page
The lights and indicator will turn off 113 .
automatically when the system
senses high ambient light. Do not leave the light switch in The automatic lighting feature is
AUTO if you will not be driving the controlled by a sensor located on top
The lights will remain on when you vehicle for an extended period (a of the dashboard. Do not cover this
turn off the ignition switch. They will week or more). You should also turn sensor or spill liquids on it.
turn off automatically when you off the lights if you plan to leave the
remove the key and open the driver’s engine idling or off for a long time.
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the position.
127
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:45:00 31SZA620_133
Headlights
Fog Lights Daytime Running Lights On vehicles with navigation system

Except LX models With the headlight switch off, the If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
Turn the fog lights on and off by daytime running lights come on SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
turning the switch next to the when you turn the ignition switch to information display, there is a
headlight switch. the ON (II) position and release the problem with the daytime running
parking brake. They remain on until light system. Take your vehicle to a
You can use the fog lights only when you turn the ignition switch off, even dealer to have it checked.
the headlights are on low beam. if you set the parking brake.
With the light switch in the AUTO When the multi-information display
position, you can also use the fog When the headlights are on, the shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
lights when the headlights turn on daytime running lights are off. daytime running lights are off.
automatically. They will go off when Follow the procedure in the left
the headlights turn off. column to turn them on.
128
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:45:10 31SZA620_134
Headlights
Automatic Lighting Off Feature If you turn the ignition switch to the The lights turn on again when you
This feature turns off the headlights, LOCK (0) position with the unlock or open the driver’s door.
all other exterior lights, and the headlight switch on, but do not open If you unlock the door, but do not
instrument panel lights within 15 the door, the lights turn off after 10 open it within 15 seconds, the lights
seconds after you remove the key minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is go off. With the driver’s door open,
and close the driver’s door. in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position). you will hear a lights-on reminder

chime.
To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 112 .
The automatic lighting off feature

activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position, and you remove the key,
then open and close the driver’s door.
129
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:45:20 31SZA620_135
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of

the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
If equipped
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 172 .
Push the button to turn on the The rear window defogger will clear
hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the
flashers). This causes all four window. Push the defogger button to
outside turn signals and both turn turn it on and off. The indicator in
indicators in the instrument panel to the button lights to show the
flash. Use the hazard warning lights defogger is on. If you do not turn it
if you need to park in a dangerous off, the defogger will shut itself off
area near heavy traffic, or if your after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
vehicle is disabled. off when you turn off the ignition.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
130
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:45:29 31SZA620_136
Instrument Panel Brightness
Separate adjustments can be made

when the headlights are on and off.
You will hear a beep when maximum

or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the

maximum level is canceled by
turning the knob a click to the left.
To reduce glare at night, the

instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to U.S. model is shown.
or . Turning the select/
The select/reset knob on the reset knob to the right until you hear On vehicles without navigation system
instrument panel controls the a beep will cancel the reduced The level of brightness is shown on
brightness of the instrument panel brightness. the information display while you
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the adjust it. It goes out about 5 seconds
brightness. after you finish adjusting.
CONTINUED
131
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:45:35 31SZA620_137
Instrument Panel Brightness

The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display while
you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
When the brightness reaches the

maximum level, ‘‘BRIGHTNESS
MAXIMUM LEVEL’’ appears on the
display.
132
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:45:43 31SZA620_138
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment 3. Push the lever up to lock the
before you start driving. steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely

locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up, down, in,

position while driving may and out.
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or

down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
133
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:45:51 31SZA620_139
Keys and Locks
You should have received a key These keys contain electronic

KEY MASTER KEY VALET KEY
NUMBER WITH REMOTE (Light Gray) number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
TAG TRANSMITTER need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on Keep the keys away from liquids.
your vehicle. The valet key works If they get wet, dry them
only in the ignition and the driver’s immediately with a soft cloth.
door lock. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your The valet key does not contain a
vehicle and the valet key at a parking battery. Do not try to take it apart.
facility.
134
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:45:58 31SZA620_140
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects The system may not recognize your Do not attempt to alter this system
your vehicle from theft. If an key’s coding if another immobilizer or add other devices to it. Electrical
improperly coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key problems could result that may make
device) is used, the engine’s fuel chain) is near the ignition switch your vehicle inoperable.
system is disabled. when you insert the key.
If you have lost your key and you

When you turn the ignition switch to If the system repeatedly does not cannot start the engine, contact your
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer recognize the coding of your key, dealer.
system indicator should come on contact your dealer.
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
CONTINUED
135
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:46:04 31SZA620_141
Immobilizer System
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Industry

This device complies with Part 15 of the Canada Standard RSS-210.
Always take the ignition key with you FCC rules. Operation is subject to the Operation is subject to the following two
whenever you leave the vehicle alone. following two conditions: (1) This device conditions: (1) this device may not cause
may not cause harmful interference, and interference, and (2) this device must
(2) this device must accept any accept any interference that may cause
interference received, including undesired operation of the device.
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
136
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:46:14 31SZA620_142
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the You will hear a reminder beeper if
anti-theft lock may make it difficult you leave the key in the ignition
to turn the key. Firmly turn the switch in the LOCK (0) or the
steering wheel to the left or right as ACCESSORY (I) position and open
you turn the key. the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.

ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the On vehicles with navigation system
accessory power sockets in this You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
position. message on the multi-information
display (see page 96 ).
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the The shift lever must be in Park
The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel before you can remove the key from
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the the ignition switch.
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
LOCK (0) − You can insert or position.
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0) START (III) − Use this position
position, the shift lever must be in only to start the engine. The switch
Park, and you must push the key in returns to the ON (II) position when
slightly. you let go of the key.
137
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:46:25 31SZA620_143
Door Locks
Lock On vehicles with navigation system

Lock To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
Unlock 119 .
When the vehicle speed reaches

about 10 mph (U.S.) and 15 km/h
(Canada) or more, all the doors lock
automatically.
Unlock
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page 116 .
To lock all doors and the tailgate, The lock tab on any passenger’s door When you shift to P after driving, the
push the top of the master door lock locks and unlocks that door. driver’s door unlocks.
switch on either front door, pull the
lock tab rearward on the driver’s All doors and the tailgate can be To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
door, or use the key on the outside locked from the outside by using the UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 117 .
lock on the driver’s door. key in the driver’s door lock. To
unlock only the driver’s door, insert
Pushing the rear of either master the key, turn the key, and release it.
door lock switch will unlock all doors The remaining doors and the tailgate
and the tailgate. Pushing forward the unlock when you turn the key a
lock tab on the driver’s door unlocks second time within a few seconds.
only that door.
138
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:46:42 31SZA620_144
Door Locks
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking To turn off the Auto Door Lock
On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles without navigation system modes:
Your vehicle has customizable The auto door locking feature has
settings for the doors and tailgate to three possible settings:
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these The auto door locking is

features. You can turn off or change deactivated all the time.
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages. The doors and tailgate lock
whenever you move the shift lever
When you customize the setting, out of the Park (P) position.
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and the The doors and tailgate lock when
parking brake is applied. Make all the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph
settings before you start driving. (15 km/h).
This is the default setting. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
On vehicles with navigation system Park (P) position.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page 116 . 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR door.
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 117 .
CONTINUED
139
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:46:52 31SZA620_145
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the front of the To program the Park Lock mode: 3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the Locks all doors and tailgate when the master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click shift lever is moved out of the Park (P) driver’s door. You will hear a click.
(after about 5 seconds). position. Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
4. Release the switch, and within 5 seconds).
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position. 4. Release the switch, and within 5
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the

Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
140
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:47:09 31SZA620_146
Door Locks
To program the Drive Lock mode: 3. Push and hold the brake pedal, Auto Door Unlocking
Locks all doors and tailgate when the and move the shift lever out of the On vehicles without navigation system
vehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph Park (P) position. The auto door unlocking feature has
(15 km/h). five possible settings:
4. Push and hold the front of the The auto door unlocking is
master door lock switch on the deactivated all the time.

driver’s door. You will hear a click. The driver’s door unlocks when
Keep holding the switch until you you move the shift lever to the
hear another click (after about 5 Park (P) position with the brake
seconds). pedal depressed.
This is the default setting.
5. Release the switch and, within 5 All doors and tailgate unlock when
seconds, turn the ignition switch you move the shift lever to the
to the ACCESSORY (I) position. Park (P) position with the brake
Move the shift lever to the Park pedal depressed.
(P) position. The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 6. Turn the ignition switch to the switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
Park (P) position. LOCK (0) position. position.
All doors and tailgate unlock
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON whenever you turn the ignition
(II) position, and make sure to switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
close the driver’s door. position.
CONTINUED
141
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:47:21 31SZA620_147
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock 3. Push and hold the rear of the To program the Park Unlock mode:
modes: master door lock switch on the Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
driver’s door. You will hear a click, and tailgate when the shift lever is
and after about 5 seconds, you will moved into the Park (P) position with
hear another click. the brake pedal depressed.
4. Release the switch, and within 5

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the

Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
(II) position, and open the driver’s Park (P) position.
door.
(II) position, and make sure to
142
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:47:37 31SZA620_148
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the rear of the To program the Ignition Switch 3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
master door lock switch on the Unlock mode: and move the shift lever out of P.
driver’s door. You will hear a click. Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
Continue to hold down the switch: and tailgate when the ignition switch is 4. Push and hold the rear of the
moved out of the ON (II) position. master door lock switch on the
Until you hear another click driver’s door. You will hear a click.

(after about 5 seconds) to Continue to hold the switch:
activate driver’s door unlock
feature. Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
Or, until you hear two more activate the driver’s door unlock
clicks (after about 10 seconds) feature.
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature. Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
4. Release the switch, and within 5 to activate all doors and tailgate
seconds, turn the ignition switch unlock feature.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 5. Release the switch and, within 5
Park (P) position. seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON Move the shift lever to the Park
(II) position, and make sure to (P) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. CONTINUED
143
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:47:46 31SZA620_149
Door Locks, Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks Tailgate

With any door and the tailgate open
and the key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if all
the doors and the tailgate are closed.
If you try to lock an open driver’s
door by pulling the lock tab rearward
the lock tab on the driver’s door pops
out.
Lock
The childproof door locks are Make sure the shift lever is in the
designed to prevent children seated Park (P) position.
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a To open the tailgate, press and hold
lock lever near the edge. With the the switch, then lift up. To close the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is tailgate, use the inner handle to pull
down), the door cannot be opened it down, then press down on the back
from the inside regardless of the edge.
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
144
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:47:55 31SZA620_150
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Keep the tailgate closed at all times Power Tailgate If the glass hatch is opened, remote
while driving to avoid damaging the On Touring models transmitter operation is canceled
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas until it is closed.
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page Press and hold the tailgate button on
61 . the remote transmitter or the switch

for about 1 second to open or close
the tailgate. Each time you press the
button on the remote transmitter or
the switch, you will hear a beep, and
some front and rear lights will flash.
If you push the same button or

POWER TAILGATE SWITCH switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
The tailgate can be opened and three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
closed with the remote transmitter moving, reverse direction, and stop
(see page 151 ) or the switch in the at the fully opened or closed position.
driver’s door pocket when both front
doors are unlocked.
CONTINUED
145
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:48:06 31SZA620_151
Auto-Reverse Also check that passengers,

The power tailgate has an auto- especially children, do not have their
reverse feature. If it meets hands on the edge of the tailgate or
resistance while opening or closing, on the tailgate sill. The auto reverse
it will beep three times and reverse feature stops working when the
direction. However, the tailgate may tailgate is about to latch so the motor
not reverse immediately. Always can pull the tailgate shut.
make sure passengers and objects
are clear of the tailgate before If your vehicle’s battery is
opening or closing it. disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
is removed while the tailgate is fully
open, the power tailgate needs to be
reset. After connecting the battery
TAILGATE SWITCH Closing a power tailgate while or installing the fuse, close the
anyone is in the path of the tailgate fully by hand.
The tailgate can also be closed by tailgate can cause serious
pressing the button on the tailgate. If injury. The power tailgate may not open or
you press the button again while the close under the these conditions:
tailgate is closing, you will hear three Make sure everyone is clear
beeps, and the tailgate will stop before closing the power The vehicle is parked on a steep
moving, reverse direction, and stop tailgate. hill.
at the fully opened position.
When the vehicle is swayed in a
strong wind.
146
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:48:19 31SZA620_152
When the tailgate or the roof is If you try to drive off with the Unlocking the Tailgate
covered with snow or ice. tailgate open, a beeper sounds and a
‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’ message is
Do not install any accessories on the shown on the multi-information
tailgate. It may cause the tailgate to display.
malfunction. If there is snow or ice

on the tailgate, make sure to remove Keep the tailgate closed at all times
it before you operate the tailgate. while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
If you push the tailgate release from getting into the interior. See
button inside the handle while the Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
tailgate is opening or closing, it will 61 .
stop moving. You need to open or
close it the rest of the way manually. If there is a problem in the power
tailgate system, you will see a If the power door lock system cannot
The tailgate has sensors on both ‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’ unlock the tailgate, unlock it
sides. Be careful not to damage them. message on the multi-information manually.
If the sensors are damaged, the display. Have the system checked by
power tailgate does not function your dealer. Place a cloth on the top side of the
properly. cover to prevent scratches, then use
With this message shown on the a small flat-tip screwdriver to remove
multi-information display, you can the cover on the back of the tailgate.
still open or close the tailgate
manually.
CONTINUED
147
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:48:30 31SZA620_153
Glass Hatch
On Touring models Except Touring models
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON
To open the glass hatch, press the

Make sure the shift lever is in the If you cannot open the tailgate, glass hatch release button on the
Park (P) position. remove the cover on the back of the tailgate.
tailgate (see page 147 ). Make sure
Push the release lever to the right as the shift lever is in the Park (P) To close the glass hatch, lower it and
shown. position. Push the release lever to press on the handle until it latches.
the right as shown, then pull the
If you need to unlock the tailgate outer handle to open the tailgate.
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
148
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:48:37 31SZA620_154
The rear wiper will not operate with Keep the tailgate and the glass hatch
the glass hatch open. If you open the Except Touring models closed at all times while driving to
glass hatch while the rear wiper is avoid damaging the tailgate and the
operating, the wiper will return to its glass hatch, and to prevent exhaust
parked position (see page 125 ). The gas from getting into the interior.
wiper will resume operation after the See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on

glass hatch is closed. page 61 .
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON
You can also open the glass hatch by

pressing the glass hatch release
button on the driver’s door or on the
remote transmitter.
149
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:48:47 31SZA620_155
Remote Transmitter
Except Touring models On Touring models UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK LOCK twice to unlock the other doors.
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON Some exterior lights will flash twice
when you push the button. If you do
GLASS not open any door or the tailgate
HATCH TAILGATE within 30 seconds, they will
RELEASE BUTTON automatically relock.
BUTTON
PANIC PANIC
BUTTON BUTTON To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
119 .
LOCK − Press this button once to On vehicles with navigation system
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK To change the ‘‘SECURITY
exterior lights will flash. When you ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting, RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
push LOCK twice within 5 seconds, see page 120 . 121 .
you will hear a beep to verify that the
doors and tailgate are locked and the
security system has set. This button
does not work if any door or tailgate
is not fully closed.
150
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:48:59 31SZA620_156
Remote Transmitter
When you press the UNLOCK On Touring models PANIC − Press and hold this
button, the front and rear individual TAILGATE − Press and hold the button for about 1 second to attract
map lights and the cargo area light, TAILGATE button to open or close attention; the horn will sound, and
depending on their switch positions, the power tailgate. When the tailgate the exterior lights will flash for about
will come on (see page 176 ). If you begins to move, you will hear a beep, 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
do not open any door or the tailgate, and some front and rear lights will press any other button on the remote

the lights stay on for about 30 flash. transmitter, or turn the ignition
seconds, then go out. If you relock switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
the doors and the tailgate with the If you push the same button again mode does not work when the key is
remote transmitter before 30 while the tailgate is opening or in the ignition switch.
seconds have elapsed, the lights will closing, three beeps sound, the
go off immediately. tailgate stops moving, reverses Remote Transmitter Care
direction and stops in the fully Avoid dropping or throwing the
Except Touring models opened or fully closed position. transmitter.
GLASS HATCH RELEASE − Protect the transmitter from
Press this button for about 1 second extreme temperature.
to open the glass hatch. Even if the Do not immerse the transmitter in
glass hatch is open, the tailgate can any liquid.
be locked with the remote If you lose a transmitter, the
transmitter. replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
151
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:49:09 31SZA620_157
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter

Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery BATTERY
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
SCREW
To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate

the inner cover from the keypad
1. Remove the screw at the base of by releasing the two tabs on the
the transmitter with a small cover.
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying

its middle seam with your
fingernail.
152
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:49:19 31SZA620_158
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery, and insert As required by the FCC: Keyless Memory SettingsTM
a new battery into the back of the This device complies with Part 15 of the On Touring models
cover with the ＋ side facing down. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
An improperly disposed of battery may not cause harmful interference, and
can hurt the environment. (2) this device must accept any

Always confirm local regulations interference received, including
for battery disposal. interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
This device complies with Industry When you unlock the door with your
Canada Standard RSS-210. remote, each remote activates the
Operation is subject to the following two keyless memory settings related to
conditions: (1) this device may not cause that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
interference, and (2) this device must 1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back
accept any interference that may cause of each remote.
undesired operation of the device.
CONTINUED
153
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:49:30 31SZA620_159
Remote Transmitter, Seats
Here are the settings activated with When you unlock and open the Front Seat Power Adjustments
the remote: driver’s door with the remote Except LX models
transmitter, the driver’s seat (except See pages 15 − 16 for important safety
Customized settings the power lumbar feature) and information and warnings about how to
(see page 97 ). outside mirrors start to move to the properly position the seats and seat-
positions stored in memory. The backs.
Driving position memory indicator in the related memory
(see page 173 ). button to the remote comes on. The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
On EX-L and Touring models

The passenger seat has the same
adjustments as the driver’s seat but
without any height and lumbar
adjustments.
Except EX-L and Touring models

The front passenger’s seat adjusts
manually.
154
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:49:45 31SZA620_160
Seats
Moves the whole seat up Front Seat Manual Adjustments

and forward, or down Except EX-L and Touring models
and backward. The front See pages 15 − 16 for important safety
of the seat also tilts up or information and warnings about how to
down at the same time. properly position the seats and seat-
backs.

Adjusts the seat-back Make all seat adjustments before
angle forward or you start driving.
backward.
Moves the seat forward Increases or decreases

and backward. the lumbar support.
(Driver’s seat only)
Moves the front of the

seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
CONTINUED
155
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:49:54 31SZA620_161
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height

Adjustment
On LX models
To adjust the seat forward or To change the seat-back angle, pull

backward, pull up on the bar under up on the lever on the outside of the
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move seat bottom.
the seat to the desired position, and The height of your driver’s seat is
release the bar. Try to move the seat Once a seat is adjusted correctly, adjustable. To raise the seat,
to make sure it is locked in position. rock it back and forth to make sure it repeatedly pull up the lever on the
is locked in position. outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
156
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:50:04 31SZA620_162
Seats
Head Restraints Front CUSHION

See page 16 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints. SEAT-
BACK
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
LEGS RELEASE BUTTON
They are most effective when you Adjusting the Head Restraint
adjust them so the center of the back The head restraints adjust for height.
of the occupant’s head rests against You need both hands to adjust the
the center of the restraint. restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
157
2011 Pilot
10/01/27 14:04:19 31SZA620_163
Seats
Second center and third row Active Head Restraints

CUSHION
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head

restraints before driving.
When reinstalling a head restraint,

LEGS RELEASE BUTTON put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
Removing the Head Restraint while pressing the release button.
To remove a head restraint for The driver’s and front passenger’s
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as Make sure the head restraint locks seats have active head restraints. If
it will go. Push the release button, in position when you reinstall it. the vehicle is struck severely from
then pull the restraint out of the seat- the rear, the occupant properly
back. secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
158
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:50:27 31SZA620_164
Seats
This reduces the distance between For a head restraint system to work Adjusting the Second Row Seats
the restraint and the occupant’s head. properly:
It also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash Do not hang any items on the head
and injuries to the neck and upper restraints, or from the restraint
spine. legs.

After a collision, the activated Do not place any object between
restraint should return to its normal an occupant and the seat-back.
position.
Install each restraint in its proper
If the restraints do not return to their location.
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle Only use genuine Honda
inspected by a Honda dealer. replacement head restraints. To adjust the second row seats
forward and backward, pull up on the
bar under the front edge of the seat
cushion. Move the seat to the
desired position and release the bar.
Try to move the seat to make sure it
is locked in position.
CONTINUED
159
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:50:39 31SZA620_165
Seats
Folding the Second Row Seats Reverse this procedure to return the
The left and right halves can be seat to the upright position. Make
folded separately. sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.
1. To unlatch the detachable anchor
before folding the seat-back, insert Make sure that the folded seat-back
the latch plate into the slot on the does not press against the front
side of the anchor buckle (see passenger’s seat, as this could cause
page 162 ) and allow the seat belt the weight sensors to work
to retract. Store the detachable improperly.
anchor and seat belt latch plates in
the retractor housing.
HANDLE
2. Lower the head restraints to their
To change the seat-back angle of the lowest positions.
seats in the second row, pull up on
the handle on the outside of the seat- 3. Pull up the handle on the outside
back, and push the seat-back. of the seat-back.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
160
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:50:51 31SZA620_166
Seats
Third Row Access Folding the Third Row Seat

1. Use the latch plate to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor (see page 162 ). HANDLE
2. Lower the head restraints to their

lowest positions.
NOTE: To fold the third row seat,

the second row seat-back must be
folded down or in the full up right
position. Third seat
RELEASE LEVER
3. Unlock the seat-back by pulling
To get into the third row seats, pull the handle. Push the seat-back
up the lever on the side of the forward.
passenger’s side second row seat-
back. The seat-back will tilt forward, Make sure the outer shoulder belts
and then can be slid forward. are positioned in each holding slot on
the side panel whenever the third
After you return the seat-back to the seat is folded.
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
CONTINUED
161
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:50:59 31SZA620_167
Seats
Reverse this procedure to return the Detachable Anchor When the seats are returned to the
seat to the upright position. Make upright position, these detachable
sure the seat is locked securely anchors should be latched back
before driving. Reconnect the seat properly.
belts to the detachable anchors.
Make sure all items in the cargo area

are secured. Loose items can fly Using the seat belt with the
forward and cause injury if you have detachable anchor unlatched
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo increases the chance of serious
on page 404 ). injury or death in a crash.
LATCH PLATE Before using the seat belt,

make sure the detachable
The seat belts in the second row anchor is correctly latched.
center seat and the third row seats
are equipped with detachable
anchors.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,

insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
162
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:51:07 31SZA620_168
Seats
Second row and third row center seats SMALL LATCH PLATE
LATCH PLATE

TRIANGLE
MARKS
SMALL LATCH PLATE ANCHOR BUCKLE
Pull out the small latch plate and the Pull out the outer shoulder belts Line up the triangle marks on the
latch plate from each holding slot in from the holding slots. Both of the small latch plate and anchor buckle
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt third-row holding slots should only when reattaching the belt and buckle.
to extend it. be used when the seat belt is
detached. Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
163
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:51:16 31SZA620_169
Seat Heaters
Passenger’s
seat
HI
Driver’s
HEATERS seat Front seat LOW Second row seat
If equipped Push the right side of the switch, HI, On Canadian Touring models
Both front seats are equipped with to rapidly heat up the seat. After the The outer second row seat cushions
seat heaters. Because of the sensors seat reaches a comfortable and seat-backs are equipped with
for the side airbag cutoff system, temperature, select LO by pushing seat heaters. Turning the switch on
there is no heater in the passenger’s the left side of the switch. This will the driver side warms the outer seat
seat-back. The ignition switch must keep the seat warm. behind the driver’s seat only. The
be in the ON (II) position to use the passenger side switch warms the
heaters. outer seat behind the front
passenger seat.
164
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:51:28 31SZA620_170
Seat Heaters, Power Windows
In the HI setting, the heater turns off Power Windows The windows will operate for up to
when the seat gets warm, and turns 10 minutes after you turn off the
back on after the seat’s temperature DRIVER’S WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ignition switch. Opening either front
SWITCH door cancels this function.
drops.
In the LO setting, the heater runs

continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes. Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
Follow these precautions when using cause serious injury.
the seat heaters:
Make sure your passengers are
Use the HI setting only to heat the away from the windows before
seats quickly, because it draws closing them.
large amounts of current from the Turn the ignition switch to the ON
battery. (II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the AUTO − To open either front
If the engine is left idling for an switch down and hold it. Release the window fully, push the window
extended period, do not use the switch when you want the window to switch firmly down to the second
seat heaters even on the LO stop. Pull back on the switch and detent, then release it. The window
setting. It can weaken the battery, hold it to close the window. automatically goes down all the way.
causing hard starting. To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
CONTINUED
165
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:51:37 31SZA620_171
Power Windows
To close either front window fully, AUTO REVERSE − If either front If your vehicle’s battery is
pull back the window switch firmly window senses any obstacle while it disconnected or goes dead, or the
to the second detent, then release it. is closing automatically, it will driver’s window fuse is removed, the
The window automatically goes all reverse direction and then stop. To AUTO function may be disabled. If
the way up. To stop the window from close the window, remove the the AUTO function is disabled, the
going all the way up, push down on obstacle, then use the window switch power window system will need to be
the window switch briefly. again. reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
When you push the MAIN switch in, Auto reverse stops sensing when the
the switch is off, and the passengers’ window is almost closed. You should 1. Start the engine. Push down and
windows cannot be raised or lowered. always check that all passengers and hold the driver’s window switch
To cancel this feature, push on the objects are away from the window until the window is fully open.
switch again to get it to pop out. before closing it.
Keep the MAIN switch pushed in 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
when you have children in the switch to close the window
vehicle so they do not injure completely, then hold the switch
themselves by operating the for about 2 seconds.
windows unintentionally.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
166
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:51:55 31SZA620_172
Power Windows
Opening the Windows and Opening/Closing the Windows 3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
Moonroof with the Remote and Moonroof with the Key hold it. All four windows and the
Transmitter moonroof start to open. To stop
You can open all of the windows and the windows and the moonroof,
the moonroof (if equipped) from the release the key.
outside with the remote transmitter.

1. Press the UNLOCK button once 4. To open the windows and the
to unlock the driver’s door. moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
2. Press the UNLOCK button a of step 2).
second time, and hold it. All the
doors unlock, and all four windows To close:
and moonroof start to open. To 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
stop the windows and moonroof, lock.
release the button.
You can open and close the windows 2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
3. To open the windows and and the moonroof (if equipped) with then release it.
moonroof further, press the the key in the driver’s door lock.
button again (within 10 seconds of To open: 3. Turn the key counterclockwise
step 1) and hold it. If the windows 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door again, and hold it. All four
and the moonroof stop before the lock. windows and the moonroof start to
desired position, repeat steps 1 close. To stop the windows and
and 2. 2. Turn the key clockwise, then the moonroof, release the key.
You cannot close the windows or the release it.
moonroof with the remote
transmitter. CONTINUED
167
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:52:06 31SZA620_173
Power Windows, Moonroof
4. To close the windows and the Moonroof To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
moonroof further, turn and hold center of the moonroof switch. To
the key again (within 10 seconds stop the moonroof from tilting up
of step 2). fully, push the switch briefly.
Auto reverse does not work when To close the moonroof fully, firmly
closing the windows and moonroof push the moonroof switch forward,
with the key. then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
NOTE: If the windows and the stop the moonroof from closing,
moonroof stop before the desired push the switch briefly.
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
MOONROOF SWITCH To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull back or push forward
On EX-L and Touring models the moonroof switch lightly and hold
Turn the ignition switch to the ON it. The moonroof will stop when you
(II) position before operating the release the switch.
moonroof switch on the ceiling
console.
To open the moonroof fully, pull

back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, push the switch briefly.
168
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:52:17 31SZA620_174
Moonroof, Parking Brake
AUTO REVERSE − If the You can open and close the Parking Brake
moonroof runs into any obstacle moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
while it is closing automatically, it you turn off the ignition switch. RELEASE HANDLE
will reverse direction and then stop. Opening either front door cancels
To close the moonroof, remove the this function.
obstacle, then use the moonroof

switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the If you try to open the moonroof in
moonroof is almost closed. You below-f reezing temperatures, or when
should always check that all it is covered with snow or ice, you can
passengers and objects are away damage the moonroof panel or its
from the moonroof before closing it. motor. PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Operating the Moonroof with the To apply the parking brake, push the
Remote Transmitter or the Key pedal down with your foot. To
Opening or closing the You can use the remote transmitter release it, pull the release handle
moonroof on someone’s hands or the key to operate the moonroof fully. The parking brake indicator on
or fingers can cause serious from the outside. Refer to page the instrument panel should go out
injury. 167 for details. when the parking brake is fully
released (see page 71 ).
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
CONTINUED
169
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:52:26 31SZA620_175
Parking Brake, Mirrors
Mirrors
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE SENSOR
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page INDICATOR
95 ). AUTO BUTTON
Keep the inside and outside mirrors On EX-L and Touring models
clean and adjusted for best visibility. The inside mirror can automatically
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before darken to reduce glare. To turn on
you start driving. this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
On LX and EX models indicator comes on as a reminder.
The inside mirror has day and night When it is on, the mirror darkens
positions. The night position reduces when it senses the headlights of a
glare from headlights behind you. vehicle behind you, then returns to
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of normal visibility when the lights are
the mirror to select the day or night gone. Press the button again to turn
position. off this feature.
170
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:52:36 31SZA620_176
Mirrors
On EX-L models without navigation Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push the appropriate edge of the
system adjustment switch to move the
When you shift to reverse with the SELECTOR SWITCH mirror right, left, up, or down.
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, the rear view is shown on 4. When you finish, move the
the left side of the inside mirror. For selector switch to the center (off)

more information, see page 391 . position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
There is also a sensor on the back of

the mirror. Items hung on the mirror
may block this sensor and af f ect its ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
perf ormance.
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L

(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
171
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:52:47 31SZA620_177
Mirrors
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror Heated Mirrors

On Touring models
Both outside door mirrors have a HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse,
the selected mirror will tilt down
slightly to improve your view as you
parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
will return the mirror to its original
position.
To tilt the driver’s mirror, place

the selector switch in the left
position.
To tilt the passenger’s mirror, If equipped

place the switch in the right The outside mirrors are heated to
position. remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
To turn the feature off, place the position, turn on the heaters by
switch in the center position. pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Outside mirror positions can be Press the button again to turn the
stored in the driving position heaters off. Pressing this button also
memory system (see page 173 ). turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
172
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:53:00 31SZA620_178
Driving Position Memory System
On Touring models Storing a Driving Position in MEMORY BUTTONS

Your vehicle has a memory feature Memory
for the driver’s seat and outside Store a driving position only when
mirror positions. the vehicle is parked.
Two seat and outside mirror 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

positions can be stored in separate (II) position. You cannot add a
memories. You select a memorized new driving position to the
position by pushing the appropriate memory unless the ignition switch
button or using the appropriate is in the ON (II) position. You can
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or recall a memorized position with
Driver 2). the ignition switch in any position. SET BUTTON
You can change the ‘‘MEMORY 2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 4. Press and release the SET button
POSITION LINK’’ setting on the position (see page 154 ). on the control panel. You will hear
multi-information display (see page a beep. Immediately press and
109 ). 3. Adjust the outside mirrors for best hold one of the memory buttons
visibility (see page 171 ). (1 or 2) until you hear two beeps.
The indicator in the memory
button will come on. The current
positions of the driver’s seat and
outside mirrors are now stored.
CONTINUED
173
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:53:11 31SZA620_179
To cancel the storing procedure Each memory button stores only one Selecting a Memorized Position
after pressing the SET button, do driving position. Storing a new To select a memorized position, do
any of the following: position erases the previous setting this:
stored in that button’s memory. If
Fail to press a memory button you want to add a new position while 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
within 5 seconds. retaining the current one, use the Park (P) position.
other memory button.
Pressing the SET button again 2. Press the desired memory button
within 5 seconds. All stored driving positions will be (1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes release the button.
Readjust the seat position. dead or is disconnected.
The system will move the seat and
Readjusting the outside mirror outside mirrors to the memorized
position. positions. The indicator in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps, and the indicator will
remain on.
174
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:53:18 31SZA620_180
To stop the system’s automatic If desired, you can use the

adjustment, do any of these actions: adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
Press any button on the control mirrors after they are in their
panel: SET, 1, or 2. memorized positions. If you change
Push any of the adjustment the memorized position, the

switches for the seat. indicator in the memory button will
Shift out of Park. go out. To keep this driving position
Adjust the outside mirrors. for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.
175
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:53:29 31SZA620_181
Interior Lights
Light Control Switch When the switch is in the OFF position: When the switch is in the door activated
The individual door lights will position:
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION operate when a door is opened.
ON The individual map lights come on
The individual map lights in the when any door or the tailgate is
front can be turned on and off by opened, or when the remote
pressing the lenses. transmitter is used to unlock the
OFF doors. When the doors and the
The individual map lights in the tailgate are closed, each light can
second and third rows cannot be be turned on and off by pushing
turned on. the lens.
The cargo area light comes on

when the tailgate is opened if the
The light control switch has three light control switch is in the door
positions: OFF, Door Activated, and activated (center) position. When
ON. the tailgate is closed, the cargo
area light can be turned on with
the switch in the light.
176
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:53:41 31SZA620_182
Interior Lights
After all doors are closed tightly, the When the light control switch is in the Individual Map Lights
lights dim slightly, then fade out in ON position:
about 30 seconds. Front
All the individual map lights come on
On vehicles with navigation system and stay on as long as the switch
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT remains in the ON position.

DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
111 .
With any door or the tailgate left

open, the lights stay on about 15
minutes, then go out.
The lights also come on when the

key is removed from the ignition Turn on the front row individual map
switch. lights by pushing the lens. Push the
lens again to turn it off. With the
light control switch in the door
activated position, the second row
and third row map lights can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Push
the lens again to turn it off.
CONTINUED
177
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:53:51 31SZA620_183
Interior Lights
Cargo Area Light Individual Interior Lights

The courtesy lights in all four doors
come on when you open any door.
ON The light around the ignition switch
only comes on when you open the
driver’s door. After you close the
door, the ignition switch light stays
OFF on for several seconds.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
COURTESY LIGHT 111 .
The courtesy light between the front The cargo area light has a three-
map lights comes on when you turn position switch. In the OFF position,
the parking lights on. To adjust its the light does not come on. In the
brightness, turn the instrument center position, the light comes on
panel brightness control dial on the when you open the tailgate or the
dashboard (see page 131 ). glass hatch. In the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
178
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:53:56 31SZA620_184
Interior Convenience Items
SUNGLASSES HOLDER INTEGRATED SUNSHADE＊ ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

CONVERSATION MIRROR＊
VANITY MIRROR COAT HOOK
SUN VISOR

GROCERY HOOK
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDER STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
＊ : If equipped
179
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:54:06 31SZA620_185
Center Console Console Compartments
LEVER
CONSOLE FRONT COMPARTMENT CONSOLE REAR COMPARTMENT
Your vehicle has a multi-function To open the front of the console To open the rear of the console
center console. It includes beverage compartment, squeeze the knob, and compartment, pull up on the lever
holders, storage compartments, an push it forward. To close, squeeze and lift the armrest.
armrest, and a storage tray. the knob and slide the cover
backward. To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
180
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:54:14 31SZA620_186
There is a removable partition in the Beverage Holders Spilled liquids can damage the
main compartment area. The Be careful when you are using the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
partition can be used to divide the beverage holders. A spilled liquid components in the interior.
forward compartment from the that is very hot can scald you or your
beverage holder area, or can be passengers. Liquid can also spill
stored to the rear of the beverage from the door pocket beverage

area to create a deeper storage tray. holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
CONTINUED
181
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:54:22 31SZA620_187
Storage Compartment
BEVERAGE HOLDER
To open the beverage holder, The center seat-back in the second

squeeze the knob, and slide the row is equipped with an armrest that To open the compartment, pull the
cover forward. provides the beverage holder. Pivot lever and lift the lid. To close, lower
down the seat-back to use them. the lid and push it down until it
latches.
182
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:54:34 31SZA620_188
Glove Box Integrated Sunshades Sunglasses Holder

Open the glove box by pulling up on On Touring models
the handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with HOOK
the master key.

The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Push
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger SUNGLASSES HOLDER
in a crash, even if the TAB
passenger is wearing the seat To open the sunglasses holder, push
belt. Each rear door has an integrated on the front edge. Make sure the
sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold holder is closed while you are driving.
Always keep the glove box the tab on the top, and pull the
closed while driving. sunshade all the way up. Insert the Some larger styles of sunglasses
holes on the sunshade into the hooks may not fit in the holder.
on the window frame.
CONTINUED
183
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:54:45 31SZA620_189
Conversation Mirror Sun Visor
Slide
SUN VISOR
You may also store small items in On EX-L and Touring models To use the sun visor, pull it down.
this holder. Make sure they are The sunglasses holder uses a convex When using the sun visor for the
small enough to let the holder close mirror for its bottom panel. You can side window, remove the support rod
and latch, and that they are not see all the vehicle passengers in this from the clip, and swing it out.
heavy enough to cause the holder to mirror. To use the mirror, open the
pop open while driving. sunglasses holder fully, push it to the In this position, the sun visor can be
first detent, and release it. adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
184
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:54:54 31SZA620_190
Vanity Mirror Coat Hooks Seat Under Tray

To use the vanity mirror on the back These hooks are not designed for On Touring models
of the sun visor, pull up the cover. large or heavy items. Your vehicle has a seat under tray
located under the front passenger
seat. Use the tray by pulling on the
front center edge of the tray.
185
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:55:01 31SZA620_191
Accessory Power Sockets Each socket is intended to supply

power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Your vehicle has four accessory To use an accessory power socket,

power sockets. These are located on the ignition switch must be in the
the instrument panel, in the console ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
compartment, back of the center
console box, or behind the third row
seat on the passenger’s side.
186
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:55:10 31SZA620_192
AC Power Outlet Always run the engine when you use

the AC power outlet.
Rear
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
watts or less. If you use an appliance

which requires more than 100 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
None of the sockets will power an On vehicles with rear entertainment

automotive type cigarette lighter system
element. There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
inside the front console
Make sure to put the socket cover compartment. To use the AC power
back in place to prevent any small outlet, open the lids and open the
foreign objects from getting into the outlet cover. Insert the plug into the
socket. receptacle slightly, turn it 90°
clockwise, then push in the plug all
the way.
CONTINUED
187
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:55:18 31SZA620_193
NOTE: The AC power outlet is not Cargo Hooks Cargo Floor Storage
designed for electric appliances Compartment
which require high initial peak Additional storage space for large
wattage such as cathode-ray tube items can be accessed by strapping
type televisions, refrigerators, the cargo floor to the seat back.
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc., HOOK
should not be connected to this
outlet. The hooks on the floor of the cargo
area enable you to tie down items
stored in the back. Make sure all
stored items are secured before
driving.
188
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:55:28 31SZA620_194
Cargo Net The maximum load on the cargo net

On Touring models is 22 lbs on U.S. models, and 10 kg
Do not use this cargo net if the on Canadian models. This is shown
third row seats are folded down. on a label back of the cargo area
floor (see page 190 ). To prevent
Objects placed on the cargo net damage to the cargo net, do not

could be thrown forward during exceed the maximum load.
a crash or sudden stop and hurt
someone. Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
When any of the third row seats are to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
folded down, do not place any on page 404 ).
objects on the cargo net. Make sure
to store the cargo net under the
The cargo net will separate the cargo area floor. It could be
storage area into two storage areas. unlatched during a crash.
On the upper area, you can store
small and light items. You should
place heavy items in the lower
storage area. You can store the
cargo net under the cargo floor to
make a larger cargo area.
Make sure to use the cargo net

securely hooked. CONTINUED
189
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:55:33 31SZA620_195
To prevent damage, do not place

more than 22 lbs (10 kg) on this
cargo net.
190
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:55:40 31SZA620_196
Features
The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating and A/C ............... 192 Playing a USB Flash Memory
system in your vehicle provides a Using the Rear A/C Unit .......... 197 Device ......................................... 298
comfortable driving environment in Climate Control System ................ 199 USB Flash Memory Device Error
all weather conditions. Rear Climate Controls............... 204 Messages .................................... 307
Audio System ................................. 208 FM/AM Radio Reception ............. 308
The standard audio system has LX models Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 310
many features. This section Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 210 Remote Audio Controls................. 311
describes those features and how to Playing a Disc ................................. 218 Radio Theft Protection.................. 313
Features
use them. Disc Player Error Messages ........ 225 Setting the Clock ........................... 314
EX and EX-L models without Rear Entertainment System ......... 317
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio navigation system Security System ............................. 349
system that requires a code number Audio System ................................. 226 Cruise Control ................................ 350
to enable it. Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 227 Compass.......................................... 353
Playing the XM Radio ................. 236 HomeLink Universal
Except LX models Playing Discs .................................. 242 Transceiver................................. 357
The security system helps to dis- Disc Changer Error Messages .... 251 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 361
courage vandalism and theft of your Models with navigation system Parking Sensor System ................. 386
vehicle. Audio System ................................. 252 Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 390
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 253
On vehicles with navigation system Playing the XM Radio ................. 266
The climate control system and the Playing Discs .................................. 274
audio system have a voice control Disc Changer Error Messages .... 284
feature. Refer to the navigation Protecting Your Discs ................... 285
system manual for more information. Playing an iPod ............................. 288
iPod Error Messages .................. 297
191
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:55:47 31SZA620_197
Vents, Heating, and A/C
LX models
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTON FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
AIR CONDITIONING RECIRCULATION

(A/C) BUTTON BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS ON/OFF BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT FAN CONTROL
TEMPERATURE BUTTON
CONTROL BUTTONS
OFF BUTTON
U.S. model is shown. MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
192
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:55:59 31SZA620_198
Fan Control Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button

Press the ▲ button to increase This button turns the air When the indicator in the button is
the fan speed and airflow. Press the conditioning on and off. You will see on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
▼ button to decrease it. A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
Temperature Control brought in from the outside of the
Turning this dial clockwise increases vehicle (fresh air mode).
the temperature of the airflow.
Features
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh

air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when

driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
193
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:56:20 31SZA620_199
Rear Window Defogger Air flows from the floor The system automatically
Button / vents. When you select , the turns on the A/C and switches to
This button turns the rear window system automatically switches to Recirculation mode. Air flows from
defogger on and off (see page 130 ). fresh air mode. the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
If equipped Airflow is divided between
Pushing this button also turns the the floor vents and defroster vents at When you switch to from
power mirror heaters on and off. the base of the windshield. , the A/C stays on, and you
can turn it on and off manually.
Mode Control Air flows from the defroster
Use the mode control buttons to vents at the base of the windshield.
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard When you select , the system
corner vents in all modes. automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between

the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
194
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:56:36 31SZA620_200
Ventilation Using the Heater Using the A/C

The ventilation system draws in The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load
outside air, circulates it through the warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine
interior, then exhausts it through will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page
vents near the rear side panels. feel warm air coming from the 82 ). If it moves near the red mark,
system. turn off the A/C until the gauge
1. Set the temperature to the lower reads normally.
limit. 1. Select and fresh air mode.
Features
2. Make sure the A/C is off. 2. Set the fan to the desired speed. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
3. Select and fresh air mode. 3. Adjust the warmth of the air with button. You will see A/C ON in
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. the temperature control dial. the display.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to the lower limit.
3. Select .
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
CONTINUED
195
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:56:52 31SZA620_201
If the interior is very warm, you can To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
cool it down more rapidly by partially To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows
opening the windows, turning on the windows: 1. Select . The system
air conditioning, and setting the fan automatically switches to fresh air
to maximum speed in fresh air mode. 1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or mode and turns on the A/C.
high for faster defrosting. The A/C indicator does not come
Dehumidify the Interior 2. Select . The system on if it was off to start with.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes automatically switches to fresh air 2. Select .
moisture from the air. When used in mode and turns on the A/C. The 3. Set the fan and temperature
combination with the heater, it A/C indicator will not come on if it controls to maximum level.
makes the interior warm and dry. was off to start with.
3. Adjust the temperature so the To clear the windows faster, you can
1. Switch the fan on. airflow feels warm. close the dashboard corner vents by
2. Turn on the air conditioning. 4. Select / to help rotating the wheel next to each vent.
3. Select and fresh air mode. clear the rear window. This sends more warm air to the
4. Adjust the temperature to your 5. To increase airflow to the windshield defroster vents. Once the
preference. windshield, close the corner vents. windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
This setting is suitable for all driving When you switch to another mode
conditions whenever the outside from , the A/C turns off. But For your safety, make sure you have
temperature is above 32°F (0°C). if it was on to start with, it stays on. a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
196
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:57:03 31SZA620_202
To Turn Everything Off Rear Control Panel

To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off

for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness REAR PASSENGER FAN CONTROL BUTTON
Features
from collecting, you should have COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
the fan running at all times. BUTTONS OFF BUTTON
Using the Rear A/C Unit
The rear passengers can adjust the MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
fan speed, temperature, and airflow
of the rear A/C unit with the rear Temperature Control
control panel. Press the ▲ temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow, and the ▼ button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
CONTINUED
197
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:57:14 31SZA620_203
Fan Control Mode Control To shut off the rear A/C unit, press
Press the ▲ fan control button When is selected, air flows the OFF button until the system
to increase the fan speed and airflow. from the upper vents on the back of shuts off.
Press the ▼ button to the center console.
decrease it. The level of the fan To turn on the rear A/C unit,
speed is shown in the display. When is selected, air flows increase the fan speed and airflow.
from the lower vents.
198
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:57:21 31SZA620_204
Climate Control System

Except LX models
FRONT CONTROL PANEL DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON

CONTROL BUTTONS
ON/OFF BUTTON FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
AUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
Features
AIR CONDITIONING RR (REAR) LOCK BUTTON
(A/C) BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
RECIRCULATION MODE FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
BUTTON BUTTON TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR CONTROL PANEL

REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
AUTO BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER FAN CONTROL BUTTON
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
MODE BUTTON
199
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:57:33 31SZA620_205
Voice Control System Using Automatic Climate Control The system automatically selects
On vehicles with navigation system The automatic climate control the proper mix of conditioned
The climate control system for your system in your vehicle maintains the and/or heated air that will, as
vehicle can also be operated using interior temperature you select. The quickly as possible, raise or lower
the voice control system. See the system also adjusts the fan speed the interior temperature to your
navigation system manual for and airflow levels. preference.
complete details.
1. Press the Auto button on the front Temperature Control
control panel. The driver’s side temperature, the
passenger’s side temperature and
2. Set the desired temperature with the rear passenger compartment
the temperature control buttons. temperature can be set separately.
You will see AUTO in the system’s Press the ▲ button of the
display. appropriate temperature control to
increase the temperature of airflow.
3. You can set the driver’s side Press the ▼ button to decrease it.
temperature, the passenger’s side Each set temperature is shown in the
temperature, and the temperature display. The rear temperature is
of the rear passenger shown in the display on the back of
compartment separately. the center console.
200
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:57:42 31SZA620_206
When you set the temperature to its On vehicles with navigation system RR (Rear) Lock Button
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit In the Auto mode, the vehicle’s When you turn the ignition switch to
( ), the system runs at full interior temperature is the ON (II) position, the temperature
cooling or heating only. It does not independently regulated for the of the rear passenger compartment
regulate the interior temperature. driver, front passenger, and rear is synchronized to the driver’s side
passengers according to each set temperature. You will see SYNC
When you press a fan control button, adjusted temperature. The system on the system display of the rear
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode. also regulates each temperature control panel. Changing the
Features
based on the information of the temperature of the rear passenger
sunlight sensor and the sun’s compartment takes the system out
position which is updated of synchronized mode. This causes
automatically by the navigation’s the word SYNC in the display to go
global positioning system (GPS). For out and displays the rear
example, if the driver’s side of the temperature in the front display.
vehicle is getting too much sun, the When you turn the ignition switch to
system will adjust to a lower the ON (II) position and see LOCK
temperature. on the system display of the front
and rear control panels, the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment is not synchronized to
the driver’s side set temperature.
201
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:57:57 31SZA620_207
To Turn Everything Off Semi-automatic Operation Recirculation Button

To turn the system completely off, You can manually select various When the indicator in the button is
press the ON/OFF button. functions of the climate control on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
system when it is in fully automatic sent through the system again.
Keep the system completely off mode. All other features remain When the indicator is off, air is
for short periods only. automatically controlled. Making any brought in from the outside of the
manual selection causes the word vehicle (fresh air mode).
To keep stale air and mustiness AUTO in the display to go out.
from collecting, you should have The outside air intakes for the
the fan running at all times. Fan Control climate control system are at the
Press the ▲ button to increase base of the windshield. Keep this
the fan speed and airflow. Press the area clear of leaves and other debris.
▼ button to decrease it.
The system should be left in fresh
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button air mode under almost all conditions.
This button turns the air Keeping the system in recirculation
conditioning on and off. You will see mode, particularly with the A/C off,
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. can cause the windows to fog up.
When you turn the A/C off, the Switch to recirculation mode when
system cannot regulate the inside driving through dusty or smoky
temperature if you set the conditions, then return to fresh air
temperature control below the mode.
outside temperature.
202
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:58:15 31SZA620_208
Rear Window Defogger Button Airflow is divided between For your safety, make sure you have
This button turns the rear window the floor and corner vents and the a clear view through all the windows
defogger off and on (see page 130 ). defroster vents at the base of the before driving.
windshield.
Pushing this button also turns the When the indicator in the button is
power mirror heaters on and off. Windshield Defroster Button on, the front passenger’s
This button directs the main airflow temperature cannot be set separately
Mode Control to the windshield for faster from the driver’s.
Features
Use the mode control button to defrosting. It also overrides any
select the vents the air flows from. mode selection you may have made.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes. When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
Air flows from the center mode and turns on the A/C. For
and corner vents in the dashboard. faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
Airflow is divided between increase airflow to the windshield by
the vents in the dashboard and the closing the corner vents on the
floor vents. dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
203
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:58:25 31SZA620_209
Rear Climate Controls

REAR CONTROL PANEL
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
AUTO BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER FAN CONTROL
COMPARTMENT BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS OFF BUTTON
RR LOCK BUTTON MODE BUTTON
RR (Rear) Lock Button Temperature Control

When this button is on, you will see Press the ▲ temperature control
LOCK on the system display. The button to increase the temperature
rear climate controls can only be of airflow, and the ▼ button to
controlled by the front control panel. decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
204
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:58:42 31SZA620_210
Fan Control Automatic Operation Triple Zone Temperature Control

Press the ▲ fan control button Pressing the AUTO button puts the The temperatures of the driver’s side
to increase the fan speed and airflow. system in automatic operation mode. and the front passenger’s side are
Press the ▼ button to The rear system automatically controlled independently.
decrease it. The level of the fan adjusts the fan speed and airflow
speed is shown in the display. levels to maintain the selected When the RR (REAR) LOCK button
temperature of the rear passenger is off, the temperature of the rear
Mode Control compartment. You will see AUTO in passenger compartment can be
Features
Each time you press the mode the display. controlled independently.
button, the mode display changes
from to . To shut off the rear climate control To adjust each temperature, press
system, press the OFF button until either of the temperature control
When is selected, air flows the system shuts off. buttons (▲or▼) on the climate
from the upper vents on the back of control panel.
the center console.
When is selected, air flows

from the lower vents.
CONTINUED
205
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:58:49 31SZA620_211
When you set each temperature to

its lower limit or its upper limit, it will Driver’s side Passenger’s side
be displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.
Rear passenger compartment
206
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:58:55 31SZA620_212
Sunlight and Temperature

Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
Features
The climate control system has two
sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of
the dashboard, and a temperature
and humidity sensor next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
207
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:59:06 31SZA620_213
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all

models. Read the appropriate pages LX models EX and EX-L models without rear
(as shown below) to use your entertainment system
vehicle’s audio system.
For LX models, see pages

210 through 225 .
For vehicles without navigation

system, see pages 226 through 251 .
For vehicles with navigation system,

see pages 252 through 307 .
For vehicles with rear entertainment

system, see pages 317 through 348 .
208
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:59:14 31SZA620_214
Audio System
EX-L models with rear entertainment system Touring models
Features
209
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:59:18 31SZA620_215
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
AM BUTTON TITLE BUTTON
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB
FOLDER BAR TUNE/SOUND KNOB
SKIP BUTTONS
210
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:59:30 31SZA620_216
To Play the FM/AM Radio To Select a Station SCAN − The scan function samples
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to all stations with strong signals on the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected selected band. To activate it, press
Turn the system on by pushing the band: tune, skip, scan, the preset the SCAN button, then release it.
power/volume knob or the AM or buttons, and auto select. You will see SCAN in the display.
FM button. Adjust the volume by When the system finds a strong
turning the power/volume knob. On the FM band, you can also use signal, it will stop and play that
the features provided by the radio station for about 10 seconds.
Features
The band and frequency that the data system (RDS). For more
radio was last tuned to is displayed. information on the RDS, see page If you do nothing, the system will
To change bands, press the AM or 213 . then scan for the next strong station
FM button. On the FM band, ST will and play it for 10 seconds. When it
be displayed if the station is broad- TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to plays a station you want to listen to,
casting in stereo. Stereo tune the radio to a desired frequency. press the SCAN button again.
reproduction on AM is not available. Turn the knob to the right to tune to
a higher frequency, and turn it to the
On the AM band, AM noise left to tune to a lower frequency.
reduction turns on automatically.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
either of the SKIP buttons ( or
), then release it.
CONTINUED
211
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:59:42 31SZA620_217
Preset − Each preset button can AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations auto
store one frequency on AM and two traveling and can no longer receive select has stored, you can store
frequencies on FM. your preset stations, you can use the other frequencies on the preset
auto select feature to find stations in buttons as previously described.
1. Select the desired band, AM or the local area.
FM. You can store one frequency To turn off auto select, press the
on FM1, and one frequency on Press the A. SEL button. You will see A. SEL (auto select) button. This
FM2 with each preset button. A. SEL flashing in the display, and restores the presets you originally
the system goes into scan mode for set.
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS several seconds. It stores the
function to tune the radio to a frequencies of six AM, and twelve For information on FM/AM radio
desired station. FM stations in the preset buttons. frequencies and reception, see page
308 .
3. Pick a preset button (1−6), and You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
hold it until you hear a beep. pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a every preset button.
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
212
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:59:51 31SZA620_218
Radio Data System (RDS) To switch the function between on If the station you are listening to is
On the FM band, you can select a and off, press and release the TITLE not an RDS station, the display
favorite station and display the button. With the system on, you will continues to show the frequency
program service name provided by see the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message on with the PS name display function on.
the radio data system (RDS). the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the When you turn off this function by
Program Service (PS) Name Display displayed frequency switches to the pressing the TITLE button, the
The program service name display station name. display shows ‘‘PS NAME OFF.’’
Features
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. You can
turn this function on or off.
CONTINUED
213
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:00:07 31SZA620_219
Radio Data System (RDS) Category SOFT: Adult hits and soft music RDS Program Search
With the FM band selected, you can TOP 40: Top 40 hits This function searches up and down
select the program category OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies a frequency for the strongest signal
provided by the RDS. Press either R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft from the frequencies that carry the
side of the FOLDER bar (− or ＋) rhythm and blues selected RDS category information.
to display and select an RDS RELIGION: Programs concerned This can help you to find a station in
category. The principal RDS with religion your favorite category. To activate it,
categories are shown as follows; CLASSIC: Classical music press and release either of the SKIP
JAZZ: Jazz buttons ( or ). You will see
ALL: All RDS category stations INFO: News, information, sports, the selected RDS category name
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft talk shows, foreign language, blinking while searching it. When
rock music personality, public, college, and the system finds a station, the
COUNTRY: Country music weather selected RDS category name will be
TRAFFIC: Traffic information displayed again for about 10 seconds.
Press either side of the FOLDER bar If the system does not find a station,
to select an RDS category. The ‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
display shows the selected RDS about 5 seconds, then the system
category name for about 10 seconds. goes back to the last selected station.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.
214
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:00:13 31SZA620_220
RDS Program SCAN You can use the RDS program

The scan function samples all search or scan function even if the
stations with strong signals on the RDS information display function is
selected RDS category. To activate it, off. In this case, the display shows a
press and release the SCAN button. frequency in place of a RDS station
You will see SCAN in the display. name.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
Features
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds a strong signal, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will

scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,

‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
215
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:00:26 31SZA620_221
Adjusting the Sound SVC − Adjusts the volume level Speed-sensitive Volume
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob based on the vehicle speed. Compensation (SVC)
repeatedly to display the BASS, The SVC mode controls the volume
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, Each mode is shown in the display as based on vehicle speed. The faster
SUBWOOFER, and SVC (speed- it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to you go, the louder the audio volume
sensitive volume compensation) adjust the setting to your liking. becomes. As you slow down, the
settings. audio volume decreases.
Except SVC adjustment
BASS − Adjusts the bass. When the level reaches the center, The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
The system will return to the audio adjust the setting to your liking. If
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back display about 10 seconds after you you feel the sound is too loud,
strength of the sound. stop adjusting a mode. choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the

strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
216
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:00:30 31SZA620_222
This function is set to MID as the Audio System Lighting

default setting when the vehicle You can use the instrument panel
leaves the factory. brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 131). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Features
217
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:00:36 31SZA620_223
Playing a Disc (LX model)
EJECT BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
CD BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
RPT/RDM (REPEAT/RANDOM)
FOLDER BAR BAR
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
SKIP BUTTONS
218
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:00:49 31SZA620_224
To Play a Disc This audio system can also play The specifications for compatible
To load or play a disc, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 files are:
switch must be in the ACCESSORY MP3 or WMA formats. When −Sampling frequency:
(I) or ON (II) position. playing a disc in MP3, you will see 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
You operate the disc player with the format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the −Bitrate:
same controls used for the radio. To display. You can select up to 99 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
select the disc player, press the CD folders, or up to 255 tracks/files. 160/192/224/256/320 kbps
Features
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the (MPEG1)
display. If you have a disc that is a 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
combination of CD-DA tracks and 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the −Compatible with variable bitrate
format to listen by pressing and and multi-session
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. holding CD button until you hear a −Maximum layers
The label can curl up and cause the beep. (including ROOT): 8 layers
disc to jam in the unit.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in

this unit.
CONTINUED
219
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:01:00 31SZA620_225
The specifications for compatible To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function
WMA files are: Insert a disc about halfway into the Each time you press the TITLE
−Sampling frequency: disc slot. The drive will pull the disc button, the display shows you the
32/44.1/48 kHz in the rest of the way to play it. You text, if the disc was recorded with
−Bitrate: operate the disc player with the text data.
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps same controls used for the radio.
−Compatible with variable bitrate The number of the current track is You can see the album, artist, and
and multi-session. shown in the display. When playing a track name in the display. If a disc is
−Maximum layers disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
(including ROOT): 8 layers of the current folder and file are see the folder and file name, and the
shown. The system will continuously artist, album, and track tag.
play a disc until you change modes.
When you press and release the
You cannot load and play 3-inch TITLE button while a disc without
(8-cm) discs in this system. text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
285 .
220
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:01:12 31SZA620_226
The display shows up to about 14 You will also see some text data To Change or Select Tracks/Files
characters of selected text data (the under these conditions: You can use the SKIP buttons while
folder name, file name, etc.). If the a disc is playing to select passages
text data has more than 14 When a new folder, file, or track is and change tracks (files in MP3/
characters, you will see the first 14 selected. WMA mode).
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the When you change the audio mode SKIP − Each time you press and
TITLE button until the next 14 to play a disc with text data or in release the SKIP button, the
Features
characters are shown. MP3 or WMA. player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
If any letter is not available, it is When you insert a disc, and the MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display. system begins to play. release the to skip backward to
When the disc has no text data, you the beginning of the current track.
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display. When playing a CD-DA with text Press it again to skip to the
data, the album and track name are beginning of the previous track.
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the To move rapidly within a track, press
folder and file name. and hold the or SKIP
button.
CONTINUED
221
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:01:20 31SZA620_227
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode RANDOM (Random within a

FOLDER SELECTION − To FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature, disc) − This feature plays the
select a different folder, press either when activated, replays all files in tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
side of the FOLDER bar. Press the the selected folder in the order they or WMA mode) in random order. To
＋ side of the bar to skip to the next are compressed. To activate folder activate random play, press and
folder, and the − side of the bar to repeat, press the RPT side of the release the RDM side of the RPT/
skip to the beginning of the previous RPT/RDM bar twice. You will see RDM bar. In MP3 or WMA mode,
folder. F-RPT in the display. The system press the RDM side of the bar
continuously replays the current repeatedly to select RDM (within a
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE folder. Press the RPT side of the bar disc random play). You will see RDM
REPEAT) − To continuously replay again to turn it off. Pressing the in the display. Press the RDM side of
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode), RDM side of the bar, or selecting a the bar for 2 seconds to return to
press and release the RPT side of different folder with the FOLDER normal play.
the RPT/RDM bar. You will see RPT bar also turns off the repeat feature.
in the display. Press and hold the
RPT side for 2 seconds to turn it off. Each time you press and release the
RPT side of the bar, the mode
changes from file repeat to folder
repeat, then to normal play.
222
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:01:31 31SZA620_228
In MP3 or WMA mode SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER-RANDOM − This The scan function samples all tracks F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, plays all (files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in feature, when activated, samples the
files in the selected folder in random the order they are recorded on the first file in each folder on the disc.
order. To activate folder random, disc. To activate scan, press and To activate folder scan, press the
press the RDM side of the RPT/ release the SCAN button. You will SCAN button twice. You will see
RDM bar. You will see F-RDM in the see SCAN in the display. You will get F-SCAN in the display.
display. The system will then select a 10 second sampling of each track/
Features
and play files randomly. This file on the disc. Press and hold the The system plays the first file in the
continues until you deactivate folder SCAN button until you hear a beep first folder for about 10 seconds. If
random by pressing and holding the to get out of scan mode and play the you do nothing, the system will then
RDM side of the bar again, or by last track/file sampled. play the first files in the next folders
selecting a different folder with the for 10 seconds. After playing the first
FOLDER bar. Pressing either of the SKIP buttons file in the last folder, the system
also turns off the scan feature. plays normally.
Each time you press and release the
RDM side of the bar, the mode Pressing either of the SKIP buttons,
changes from folder random play to selecting a different folder with the
random play (within a disc random FOLDER bar, or pressing the SCAN
play), then to normal play. button, also turns off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the

SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
223
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:01:39 31SZA620_229
To Stop Playing a Disc If you turn the system off while a

Press the eject button ( ) to disc is playing, either with the
remove the disc. If you eject the disc, power/volume knob or by turning
but do not remove it from the slot, off the ignition switch, the disc will
the system will automatically reload stay in the drive. When you turn the
the disc after 10 seconds and begin system back on, the disc will begin
playing. playing where it left off.
You can also eject the disc when the Protecting Discs
ignition switch is off. For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
To play the radio when a disc is 285 .
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the disc player.
224
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:01:50 31SZA620_230
Disc Player Error Messages (LX model)
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Message Cause Solution
display while playing a disc.
UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
If you see an error message in the supported supported track or file plays automatically.
display while playing a disc, press BAD DISC Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
the eject button. After ejecting the PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
disc, check it for damage or OWNER’S Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
Features
deformation. If there is no damage, MANUAL PUSH (see page 286). Insert the disc again. If the code
insert the disc again. EJECT does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
For additional information on BAD DISC removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
damaged discs, see page 286 . PLEASE CHECK Servo Error force the disc out of the player.
OWNER’S
The audio system will try to play the MANUAL
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
225
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:02:00 31SZA620_231
Audio System (EX and EX-L models)
Selector Knob The knob turns left and right. Use it Menu Display
to scroll through lists, or to make To select any setting such as the
selections or adjustments to a list or clock, sound adjusting, or the
menu item on the display. When you compass, press the MENU button.
make a selection, push the center of To use any audio system function,
the selector (ENTER) to go to that the ignition switch must be in the
selection. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
You can select the item by turning
When the audio system is in XM the selector knob. To go back to the
Radio mode or playing discs, pushing previous display, press the RETURN
RETURN SELECTOR MENU the selector (ENTER) knob switches button.
BUTTON KNOB BUTTON the display between the normal
Without rear entertainment system display and the extended display. Pressing the MENU button again
The extended display has three will also cancel the menu display
Most audio system functions can be segments to display the detailed mode.
controlled by standard buttons, bars, information.
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.
226
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:02:09 31SZA620_232
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
EX models EX-L models with rear entertainment system
PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS
Features
FM BUTTON SCAN BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME AM/FM
AM BUTTON KNOB BUTTON POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) SELECTOR KNOB

BUTTON
227
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:02:19 31SZA620_233
To Play the Radio To Select a Station SKIP − The skip function searches
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to up and down from the current
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected frequency to find a station with a
Turn the system on by pushing the band: tune, seek, scan, the preset strong signal. To activate it, press
PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume buttons, and auto select. and hold the or side of the
by turning the same knob. SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
On the FM band, you can also use release it.
The band and frequency that the the features provided by the radio
radio was last tuned to are displayed. data system (RDS). For more
To change bands, press the AM or information on the RDS, see page
FM button, or AM/FM button. On 230 .
the FM band, ST will be displayed if
the station is broadcasting in stereo. TUNE − Use the selector knob to
Stereo reproduction in AM is not tune the radio to a desired frequency.
available. Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
On the AM band, AM noise lower frequency.
reduction turns on automatically.
228
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:02:32 31SZA620_234
SCAN − The scan function samples Preset − Each preset button can On vehicles without rear entertainment
all stations with strong signals on the store one frequency on AM and two system
selected band. To activate it, press frequencies on FM. AUTO SELECT − If you are
the SCAN button, then release it. traveling and can no longer receive
You will see SCAN in the display. 1. Select the desired band, AM or your preset stations, you can use the
When the system finds a strong FM. You can store one frequency auto select feature to find stations in
signal, it will stop and play that on FM1, and one frequency on the local area.
station for about 10 seconds. FM2 with each preset button.
Features
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
If you do nothing, the system will 2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS flashes in the display, and the system
scan for the next strong station and function to tune the radio to a goes into scan mode for several
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays desired station. seconds. It stores the frequencies of
a station that you want to listen to, six AM and twelve FM stations in
press the SCAN button again. 3. Pick a preset button, and hold it the preset buttons.
until you hear a beep.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a pressing a preset button if auto
total of six stations on AM and select cannot find a strong station for
twelve stations on FM. that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto

select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
CONTINUED
229
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:02:41 31SZA620_235
To turn off auto select, press the Radio Data System (RDS) To switch the function between on
A. SEL (auto select) button. This On the FM band, you can select a and off, press and release the TITLE
restores the presets you originally favorite station and display the button. With the system on, you will
set. program service name provided by see the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message on
the radio data system (RDS). the display. If the station you are
For information on FM/AM radio listening to is an RDS station, the
frequencies and reception, see page Program Service (PS) Name Display displayed frequency switches to the
308 . The program service name display station name.
230
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:02:56 31SZA620_236
If the station you are listening to is Radio Data System (RDS) Category CLASSIC: Classical music
not an RDS station, the display On the FM band selected, you can JAZZ: Jazz
continues to show the frequency select the program category INFO: News, information, sports,
with the PS name display function on. provided by the RDS. Press either talk shows, foreign language,
side (− or ＋) of the CATEGORY personality, public, college, and
When you turn off this function by bar to display and select an RDS weather
pressing the TITLE button, the category. The principal RDS TRAFFIC: Traffic information
display shows ‘‘PS NAME OFF.’’ categories are shown as follows:
Features
Press either side of the CATEGORY
ALL: All RDS category stations bar to select an RDS category. The
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft display shows the selected RDS
rock music category name for about 10 seconds.
COUNTRY: Country music You can use the search or scan
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music function to find radio stations on the
TOP 40: Top 40 hits selected RDS category. If you do
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies nothing while the RDS category
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft name is displayed, the selected
rhythm and blues category is canceled.
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CONTINUED
231
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:03:05 31SZA620_237
RDS Program Search RDS Program SCAN You can use the RDS program
This function searches up and down The scan function samples all search or scan function even if the
a frequency for the strongest signal stations with strong signals on the RDS information display function is
from the frequencies that carry the selected RDS category. To activate it, off. In this case, the display shows a
selected RDS category information. press and release the SCAN button. frequency in place of a RDS station
This can help you to find a station in You will see SCAN in the display. name.
your favorite category. To activate it, The system will scan for a station
press and release either side with a strong signal in the selected
( or ) of the SKIP bar. You RDS category. You will also see the
will see the selected RDS category selected RDS category name
name blinking while searching it. blinking while searching it. When it
When the system finds a station, the finds a strong signal, it will stop and
selected RDS category name will be play that station for about 10 seconds.
displayed again for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
If the system does not find a station, scan for the next strong station and
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
about 5 seconds, then the system a station that you want to listen to,
goes back to the last selected station. press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,

‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
goes back to the last selected station.
232
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:03:18 31SZA620_238
Adjusting the Sound SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the Each mode is shown in the display as
Press the MENU button to display strength of sound from the it changes. Turn the selector knob to
the sound settings. Turn the selector subwoofer speaker. adjust the setting to your liking.
knob to select an appropriate setting:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, If equipped Except SVC adjustment
BALANCE, SUBW (subwoofer), CENTER − Adjusts the strength of When the level reaches the center,
CENTER ＊, Dolby PL (Prologic) II＊, sound from the center speaker. you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
and SVC (speed-sensitive volume
Features
compensation). Press the selector SVC − Adjusts the volume level To return to the normal play, push
(ENTER) knob to enter the setting, based on the vehicle speed. the RETURN or MENU button after
then turn the selector knob to adjust you stop adjusting a mode.
the setting.
＊: If equipped
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back

strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to-

side strength of the sound.
CONTINUED
233
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:03:25 31SZA620_239
If equipped Manufactured under license from Speed-sensitive Volume

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Compensation (SVC)
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing Logic, MLP Lossless and the double- The SVC mode controls the volume
creates multi-channel surround D symbol are trademarks of Dolby based on vehicle speed. The faster
sound from 2 channel stereo audio Laboratories. you go, the louder the audio volume
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only becomes. As you slow down, the
be activated when listening to DISC audio volume decreases.
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,
and AUX. When ProLogic II is active, The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
This function is set to MID as the

default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
234
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:03:30 31SZA620_240
Audio System Lighting

You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 131). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Features
235
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:03:39 31SZA620_241
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)
EX and EX-L models without rear entertainment system EX-L models with rear entertainment system
PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS
XM BUTTON XM SCAN
POWER/ BUTTON BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB POWER/
VOLUME
SCAN BUTTON KNOB
CATEGORY BAR
CATEGORY
BAR
SELECTOR KNOB A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) SELECTOR KNOB

BUTTON
236
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:03:49 31SZA620_242
Your vehicle is capable of receiving Operating the XM Radio Each time you press and release the
XM Radio anywhere in the United To listen to XM Radio, turn the TITLE button, the display changes in
States, and Canada, except Hawaii ignition switch to the ACCESSORY the following sequence: name, title,
and Alaska. XM is a registered (I) or ON (II) position, and press the and category.
trademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc. button. The last channel you
and, XM CANADA is a registered listened to will show in the display. You may experience periods when
business name of Canadian Satellite Adjust the volume by turning the XM Radio does not transmit the
Radio Inc. power/volume knob. artist’s name and song title
Features
information. If this happens, there is
XM Radio receives signals from two MODE − To switch between nothing wrong with your system.
satellites to produce clear, high- channel mode and category mode,
quality digital reception. It offers either press and hold the TITLE
many channels in several categories. button until the mode changes, or
Along with a large selection of press and release the selector knob.
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and In the channel mode, you can select
category selections in the display. all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
CONTINUED
237
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:03:55 31SZA620_243
TUNE − Turn the selector knob to CATEGORY (− or ＋) − Press SCAN − The SCAN function gives
change channel selections. Turn the either side of the CATEGORY bar to you a sampling of all channels while
knob right for higher numbered select another category. in the channel mode. In the category
channels and left for lower mode, only the stations within that
numbered channels. In the category category are scanned. To activate
mode, you can only select channels scan, press the SCAN button. The
within that category. system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
You can also select a channel or then selects the next channel. When
category from the list by using the you hear a channel you want to
selector knob. Push the selector continue listening to, press the
knob (ENTER) to switch the display button again.
to the list displayed with three
segments, then turn the knob to
select a channel or category. Press
the selector knob (ENTER) to set
your selection.
238
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:04:11 31SZA620_244
Preset − You can store up to 12 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the XM Radio Display Messages
preset channels using the six preset first six channels.
buttons. Each button stores one ‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
channel from the XM1 band and one 5. Press the XM button again. The audio or program information.
channel from the XM2 band. other XM band will show. Store
the next six channels using steps 2 ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
To store a channel: and 3. currently selected is no longer
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 broadcasting.
Features
or XM2 will show in the display. Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset ‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
2. Use the selector knob, button to tune to it. code is being updated. Wait until the
CATEGORY bar, or SCAN button encryption code is fully updated.
to tune to a desired channel. The presets may be lost if your Channels 0 and 1 should still work
vehicle’s battery goes dead, is normally.
In category mode, only channels disconnected, or the radio fuse is
within that category can be removed.
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want

for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
CONTINUED
239
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:04:20 31SZA620_245
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is

currently too weak. Move the vehicle Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
to an area away from tall buildings, mountains or large obstacles to these areas.
the south.
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel

number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
SATELLITE
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
The XM satellites are in orbit over

the equator; therefore, objects south GROUND REPEATER
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help Satellite signals are more likely to be Depending on where you drive, you
compensate for this, ground-based blocked by tall buildings and may experience reception problems.
repeaters are placed in major mountains the farther north you Interference can be caused by any of
metropolitan areas. travel from the equator. Carrying these conditions:
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
240
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:04:35 31SZA620_246
Driving on the north side of an Receiving XM Radio Service After you’ve registered with XM
east/west mountain road. If your XM Radio service has expired Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of a or you purchased your vehicle from XM Radio mode while you wait for
large commercial truck on an a previous owner, you can listen to a activation. This should take about 30
east/west road. sampling of the broadcasts available minutes.
Driving in tunnels. on XM Radio. With the ignition
Driving on a road beside a vertical switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the While waiting for activation, make
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south ON (II) position, push the power/ sure your vehicle remains in an open
Features
of you. volume knob to turn on the audio area with good reception. Once your
Driving on the lower level of a system, and press the button. audio system is activated,
multi-tiered road. A variety of music types and styles ‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in
Driving on a single lane road will play. the display, and you’ll be able to
alongside dense trees taller than listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. If you decide to purchase XM radio Radio will continue to send an
Large items carried on a roof rack. service, contact XM Radio at activation signal to your vehicle for
www.xmradio.com, or at at least 12 hours from the activation
There may be other geographic 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact request. If the service has not been
situations that could affect XM Radio XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or activated after 36 hours, contact XM
reception. at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to Radio. In Canada, contact XM
give them your radio I.D. number CANADA .
As required by the FCC: and your credit card number. To get
Changes or modifications not expressly your radio I.D. number, press the
approved by the party responsible for button, then turn the
compliance could void the user’s selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
authority to operate the equipment. in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.
241
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:04:44 31SZA620_247
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
EX and EX-L models without rear entertainment system EX-L models with rear entertainment system
MP3/WMA INDICATOR MP3/WMA INDICATOR
DISC SLOT DISC SLOT SCAN BUTTON

EJECT
DISC LOAD BUTTON DISC LOAD EJECT BUTTON
BUTTON BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME POWER/
SCAN BUTTON KNOB VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY SKIP BAR
BAR CATEGORY SKIP BAR
BAR
SELECTOR KNOB SELECTOR KNOB

242
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:04:56 31SZA620_248
To Play a Disc This audio system can also play The specifications for
To load or play discs, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in compatible MP3 files are:
switch must be in the ACCESSORY MP3 or WMA format. When playing −Sampling frequency:
(I) or ON (II) position. a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ in 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 16/
the display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ 22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
You operate the disc changer with will appear in the display. The disc, −Bitrate:
the same controls used for the radio. folder and track numbers are 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
To select the disc changer, press the displayed. You can select up to 255 160/192/224/256/320 kbps
Features
CD/AUX or CD button. You will see folders or tracks. (MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/
‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc and 64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps
track numbers, and the elapsed time If you have a disc that is a (MPEG2)
are shown in the display. You can combination of CD-DA tracks and −Compatible with variable bitrate
also select the displayed information MP3/WMA files, you can choose the and multi-session.
with the TITLE button (see page format to listen by pressing and −Maximum layers
245 ). The system will continuously holding CD/AUX or CD button until (including ROOT): 8 layers
play a disc until you change modes. you hear a beep.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in

this unit.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
CONTINUED
243
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:05:12 31SZA620_249
The specifications for compatible Loading Discs You cannot load and play 3-inch
WMA files are: Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer (8-cm) discs in this unit.
−Sampling frequency: holds up to six discs.
22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz 4. When the disc load indicator turns
−Bitrate: 1. To load more than one disc, press green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps the LOAD button until you hear a display again, insert the next disc
−Compatible with variable bitrate beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the in the slot. Do not try to insert a
and multi-session display. To load only one disc, disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
−Maximum layers press and release the LOAD could damage the audio unit.
(including ROOT): 8 layers button.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
NOTE: 2. The disc number for an empty are loaded. If you are not loading
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is position begins blinking. all six positions, the system begins
protected by digital rights playing the last disc loaded.
management (DRM), the audio unit 3. Insert the disc into the disc slot
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then when the green disc load indicator You can also load a disc into an
skips to the next file. comes on. Insert it only about empty position while a disc is playing
halfway; the drive will pull it in the by pressing the appropriate preset
rest of the way. You will see button. The system stops playing the
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the current disc and starts the loading
disc load indicator turns red and sequence. It then plays the disc just
blinks as the disc is loaded. loaded.
244
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:05:26 31SZA620_250
Text Data Display Function If the text data has more than 16 When you change the audio mode
Each time you press the TITLE characters, you will see the first 16 to play a disc with text data or in
button, the display shows you the characters and the indicator in MP3 or WMA.
text, if the disc was recorded with the display. Press and hold the
text data. TITLE button until the next 16 When you insert a disc, and the
characters are shown. You can see system begins to play.
You can see the album, artist, and up to 32 characters of the text data.
track name in the display. If a disc is When playing a CD-DA with text
Features
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can If you press and hold the TITLE data, the album and track name are
see the folder and file name, and the button again, the display shows the shown in the display. With a disc in
album, artist, and track tag. first 16 characters again. MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
With the folder name, you will see If any letter is not available, it is
the FOLDER indicator in the display. replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display. When you turn on the audio system
The TRACK indicator is shown with When the disc has no text data, you next time, the system keeps your
the file or track name. will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display. selection with the TITLE button.
When you press and release the You will also see some text data
TITLE button while a disc without under these conditions:
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display. When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
CONTINUED
245
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:05:33 31SZA620_251
To Change or Select Tracks/Files In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also SKIP − Each time you press and
Use the SKIP bar while a disc is select a folder or track/file from the release the side of the SKIP bar,
playing to select passages and list by using the selector knob. Push the player skips forward to the
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA the selector knob (ENTER) to beginning of the next track (file in
mode). switch the display to the list MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
displayed with three segments, then release the side of the bar to
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the turn the knob to select a folder. skip backward to the beginning of
CATEGORY bar to select folders on Press the selector knob (ENTER) to the current track. Press it again to
the disc and use either side of the change the display to the track/file skip to the beginning of the previous
SKIP bar to change files. list, then turn the same knob to track.
select a track/file. Press the selector
To select a different disc, use the knob (ENTER) to set your selection. To move rapidly within a track or file,
appropriate preset buttons (1 press and hold either side ( or
through 6). If you select an empty ) of the SKIP bar.
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page 244 ).
246
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:05:42 31SZA620_252
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode RANDOM (Random within a

FOLDER SELECTION − To FOLDER REPEAT − This feature, disc) − This feature plays the
select a different folder, press either when activated, replays all the files tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
side (− or ＋) of the CATEGORY in the selected folder in the order or WMA mode) in random order. To
bar. Press the ＋ side to skip to the they are compressed in MP3 or activate random play, select the disc
next folder, and press the − side to WMA. To activate folder repeat random play from the menu items.
skip to the beginning of the previous mode, select the folder repeat mode You will see RANDOM in the display.
folder. from the menu items. You will see Select the normal play mode to
Features
F-REPEAT in the display. The return to normal play.
REPEAT (Track Repeat) − To system continuously replays the
continuously replay a track (file in current folder. Select the normal
MP3 or WMA mode), select the play mode to turn it off. Selecting a
track repeat mode from the menu different folder with the
items. You will see REPEAT in the CATEGORY bar also turns off the
display. Select the normal play mode repeat feature.
to turn it off.
DISC REPEAT − This feature
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar continuously replays the current disc.
also turns off the repeat feature. To activate disc repeat, select the
disc repeat mode from the menu
items. You will see D-REPEAT in the
display. Select normal play to turn it
off.
CONTINUED
247
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:05:47 31SZA620_253
In MP3 or WMA mode SCAN − The SCAN function In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER RANDOM − This samples all the tracks on the disc in F-SCAN − This feature, when
feature, when activated, plays the the order they are recorded on the activated, samples the first file in
files within the current folder in disc (all files in the selected folder in each folder on the disc in the order
random order, rather than in the MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the they are recorded. To activate the
order they are compressed in MP3 scan feature, press and release the folder scan feature, press and
or WMA. To activate folder random SCAN button. You will see SCAN in release the SCAN button repeatedly.
play, select the folder random mode the display. You will get a 10 second You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.
from the menu items. You will see sampling of each track/file in the The system will then play the first
F-RANDOM in the display. The disc/folder. Press and hold the file in the main folders for about 10
system will then select and play files SCAN button until you hear a beep seconds. If you do nothing, the
randomly. This continues until you to get out of scan mode and play the system will then play the first file in
deactivate folder random play by last track sampled. each folder for 10 seconds. When it
selecting the normal play mode, or plays a file that you want to continue
you select a different folder with the listening to, press and hold the
CATEGORY bar. SCAN button.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar,

or selecting a different disc (using
the preset buttons) or folder (using
the CATEGORY bar) turns off the
SCAN or F-SCAN feature.
248
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:05:57 31SZA620_254
D-SCAN − This feature, when When the first track on the last disc, To Stop Playing a Disc
activated, samples the first track on or the first file in the last main folder Press the eject button ( ) to
each disc in order (the first file in on the last disc begins to play, the remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
the main folder on each disc in MP3 disc scan mode will be canceled. but do not remove it from the slot,
or WMA mode). To activate the disc Pressing either side of the SKIP bar the system will automatically reload
scan feature, press and release the or selecting a different folder with the disc after 10 seconds and begin
SCAN button repeatedly until the CATEGORY bar also turns off playing.
D-SCAN shows in the display. The the scan feature.
Features
system will then play the first track/ You can also eject the disc when the
file in the first main folder on the Each time you press and release the ignition switch is off.
first disc for about 10 seconds. If you SCAN button, the mode changes
do nothing, the system will then play from scan, disc scan, then to normal To play the radio when a disc is
the following first track/file for 10 play. playing, press the AM, FM, AM/FM,
seconds each. When it plays a track/ or XM (if equipped) button. Press
file that you want to continue In MP3 or WMA mode the CD (CD/AUX on models with
listening to, press and hold the Each time you press and release the XM Radio) button again to switch
SCAN button again. SCAN button, the mode changes back to the disc changer.
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal play.
CONTINUED
249
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:06:05 31SZA620_255
If you turn the system off while a To remove a different disc from the
disc is playing, either with the changer, first select it with the
power/volume knob or by turning appropriate preset button. When that
off the ignition switch, the disc will disc begins playing, press the eject
stay in the drive. When you turn the button. Continue pressing the eject
system back on, the disc will begin button to remove all the discs from
playing where it left off. the changer.
Removing Discs from the In-dash You can also eject discs when the
Disc Changer ignition switch is off. The disc that
To remove the disc currently in play, was last selected is ejected first.
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system Protecting Discs
automatically begins the load For information on how to handle
sequence so you can load another and protect compact discs, see page
disc in that position. If you do not 285 .
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM Radio).
250
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:06:14 31SZA620_256
Disc Changer Error Messages (EX and EX-L models)

HEAT ERROR High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
If you see an error message in the normal.
display while playing a disc, press UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
the eject button. After ejecting the supported supported track or file plays automatically.
disc, check it for damage or BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Features
deformation. If there is no damage, PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
insert the disc again. OWNER’S Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
MANUAL PUSH (see page 286). Insert the disc again. If the code
For additional information on EJECT does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
damaged discs, see page 286 . BAD DISC removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
PLEASE CHECK Servo Error force the disc out of the player.
The audio system will try to play the OWNER’S
disc. If there is still a problem, the MANUAL
error message will reappear. Press
251
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:06:23 31SZA620_257
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial The knob turns left and right. Use it Voice Control System
On models with navigation system to make selections or adjustments to The audio system can also be
Most audio system functions can still a list or menu on the screen. operated by voice control. See the
be controlled by standard buttons, navigation system manual for
dials, and knobs, but some functions The selector can be pushed left, complete details.
can only be accessed using the right, up, down, and in. Use the
interface dial. The interface dial has selector to scroll through lists, to
two parts, a knob and a selector. select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
ENTER push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.
KNOB
SELECTOR
252
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:06:33 31SZA620_258
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Without rear entertainment system With rear entertainment system
AUDIO DISPLAY PRESET BUTTONS AUDIO DISPLAY PRESET BUTTONS
Features
FM FM
BUTTON BUTTON SCAN
BUTTON
AM AM
BUTTON POWER/ POWER/
VOLUME KNOB BUTTON
VOLUME KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
A.SEL (AUTO
SELECT) BUTTON
TUNE KNOB TUNE KNOB
AUDIO AUDIO
BUTTON BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL
253
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:06:44 31SZA620_259
To Play the FM/AM Radio The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
STEREO ICON BAND
the AM or FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
audio display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo TUNE ICON
reproduction on AM is not available.
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
The ignition switch must be in the On the AM band, AM noise tune the radio to a desired frequency.
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) reduction turns on automatically. Turn the knob right to tune to a
position. Press the AUDIO button to higher frequency, or left to tune to a
view the audio control display. Turn To Select a Station lower frequency. To tune with the
the system on by pressing the You can use any of five methods to interface dial, push the selector
power/volume knob, the AM, or FM find radio stations on the selected down, and turn the knob to TUNE.
button. Adjust the volume by turning band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the Then press ENTER on the selector,
the power/volume knob. preset buttons, and auto select. and turn the knob to the desired
frequency. To exit the TUNE mode,
press ENTER on the selector.
254
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:06:52 31SZA620_260
SKIP (SEEK) − The SKIP (SEEK) To scan with the interface dial, push
function searches up and down from SCAN ICON the selector down, and then push it
the current frequency to find a to the right. You will see SCAN
station with a strong signal. To flashing on the screen.
activate it, press either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar or button, The system will scan for a station
then release it. You can also activate with a strong signal. When it finds a
the SKIP function (SEEK is strong signal, it will stop and play
Features
displayed on the screen) by pushing that station for about 10 seconds. If
the interface selector to the right or you do nothing, the system will then
left. scan for the next strong station and
a station that you want to listen to,
SCAN − The SCAN function press the scan button again, or push
samples all stations with strong the interface selector to the right
signals on the selected band. To again.
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it.
CONTINUED
255
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:07:05 31SZA620_261
Preset − Each preset button or On vehicles without rear entertainment

preset icon can store one frequency A.SEL ICON system
on AM and two frequencies on FM. You can also press the A.SEL button.
You will see A.SEL on the screen,
To store a preset memory location: and the system goes into scan mode
1. Select the desired band, AM or for several seconds. The system
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store stores the frequencies of six AM and
two sets of FM frequencies with twelve FM stations in the preset
the preset buttons (on-screen buttons.
icons).
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
function to tune the radio to a select cannot find a strong station for
desired station. every preset button.
3. Press the preset button, and hold AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations auto
it until you hear a beep. You can traveling and can no longer receive select has stored, you can store
also store frequencies with the your preset stations, you can use the other frequencies on the preset
interface dial. Select the preset auto select feature to find stations in buttons (icons) as previously
icon you want to store the the local area. described.
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold Push the interface selector down to To turn off auto select, press
it for more than 2 seconds. scroll down the screen, highlight ENTER on the interface selector or
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a A.SEL, then press ENTER on the press the A.SEL button again. This
total of six stations on AM and interface selector. You will see restores the presets you originally
twelve stations on FM. A.SEL on the screen, and the system set.
goes into scan mode for several
seconds.
256
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:07:13 31SZA620_262
For information on FM/AM radio Radio Data System (RDS) To switch the function between on
frequencies and reception, see page On the FM band, you can select a and off, press and release the TITLE
308 . favorite station and display the button. With the system on, you will
program service name provided by see the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message on
the radio data system (RDS). the center display. If the station you
are listening to is an RDS station, the
Program Service (PS) Name Display displayed frequency switches to the
The program service name display station name.
Features
CONTINUED
257
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:07:29 31SZA620_263
If the station you are listening to is Radio Data System (RDS) Category ALL: All RDS category stations
not an RDS station, the audio screen ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
and the center display continue to rock music
show the frequency. COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
When you turn off this function by TOP 40: Top 40 hits
pressing the TITLE button, the OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
center display shows ‘‘PS NAME R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
OFF.’’ rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
RDS SEARCH ICON JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
With the FM band selected, you can talk shows, foreign language,
select the program type provided by personality, public, college, and
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to weather
display the radio information on the TRAFFIC: Traffic information
screen. Push down the selector on
the interface dial, then turn the knob
to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER to set your selection. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows:
258
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:07:38 31SZA620_264
You can also select an RDS category RDS Program Search

with the CATEGORY bar. Press This function searches up and down
either side (− or ＋) of the a frequency for the strongest signal
CATEGORY bar to display an RDS from the frequencies that carry the
category in the center display. Select selected RDS category information.
a category by pressing either side of This can help you to find a station in
the bar. your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
Features
( or ) of the SKIP bar or
button. You will also see the selected
RDS CATEGORY RDS category name blinking in the
center display while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
Turn the selector to select an RDS selected RDS category name will be
category. You can use the search or displayed again for about 10 seconds
scan function to find radio stations in the center display.
on the selected RDS category by
pressing the selector to the right If the system does not find a station,
repeatedly. Press ENTER to set your ‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
selection. If you do nothing while the about 5 seconds, then the system
RDS category is selected, the goes back to the last selected station.
selected category is canceled.
CONTINUED
259
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:07:45 31SZA620_265
SEEK ICON
Turn the knob to the desired RDS RDS Program SCAN
category. The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
While the RDS category is selected, selected RDS category. To activate it,
move the selector knob to the right press and release the SCAN button.
to select SEEK in the upper right You will see SCAN in the display.
corner of the screen. Then press The system will scan for a station
ENTER to activate the seek function. with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
RDS CATEGORY LIST blinking while searching it. When it
SEEK is selected. finds a strong signal, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
To activate RDS program search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the selector down, and turn the
knob to select the RDS SEARCH
icon. Press ENTER on the selector.
The screen shows you the RDS
program category list.
260
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:07:55 31SZA620_266
If you do nothing, the system will Turn the knob to the desired RDS
scan for the next strong station and SEEK ICON category.
a station that you want to listen to, While the RDS category is selected,
press the SCAN button again. move the selector knob to the right
to select SCAN in the upper right
If the system does not find a station, corner of the screen. Then press
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for ENTER to activate the scan function.
Features
goes back to the last selected station. You can use the RDS program
RDS CATEGORY LIST search or scan function even if the
SCAN is selected. RDS information display function is
off. In this case, the display shows a
To activate RDS program scan with frequency in place of a RDS station
the interface dial, push the AUDIO name.
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
selector down, and turn the knob to
select the RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER on the selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.
CONTINUED
261
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:08:04 31SZA620_267
Radio Text Display

This function displays the radio text TEXT INDICATOR
information of the selected RDS
station.
If the selected RDS station has the

radio text information, you will see The text is displayed
the text indicator on the screen. according to the
information from RDS.
RADIO TEXT ICON
To activate radio text display, use The display shows up to 64

the interface dial. Push the selector characters on the selected RDS
down, and turn the knob to select the station.
RADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER on
the selector to enter the setting.
262
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:08:14 31SZA620_268
Adjusting the Sound

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
Features
compensation (SVC).
These adjustments can be made by

the SOUND button or the interface SOUND ICON
dial.
To adjust them, press the AUDIO Select the mode you want to adjust
button, push the interface selector by turning the interface dial.
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the You can also adjust the sound by
selector. pushing the SOUND button
repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
the audio display as it changes. Turn
the TUNE knob to adjust the setting
to your liking.
CONTINUED
263
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:08:20 31SZA620_269
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass FADER/BALANCE − These CENTER/SUBWOOFER − To

and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, modes adjust the strength of the adjust the strength of the sound
and press ENTER on the interface sound coming from each speaker. from the center or subwoofer
selector. The current setting is Fader adjusts the front-to-back speaker, select it and press ENTER
shown on the display. Turn the strength, while balance adjusts the on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level, side-to-side strength. To adjust fader interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing and balance, select FADER or and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector. BALANCE, then press ENTER on ENTER on the interface selector.
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
264
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:08:27 31SZA620_270
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby To set this feature on or off, select Speed-sensitive Volume
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on Compensation (SVC)
creates multi-channel surround the interface selector. Rotate the The SVC mode controls the volume
sound from 2 channel stereo audio interface dial to ON or OFF, and based on vehicle speed. The faster
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only press ENTER. you go, the louder the audio volume
be activated when listening to DISC becomes. As you slow down, the
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio, Manufactured under license from audio volume decreases.
and AUX. When ProLogic II is active, Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Features
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display. Logic, MLP Lossless and the double- The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
Laboratories. HIGH. The default setting is MID.
To change the SVC mode, select
SVC, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. If you feel the sound is too
loud, choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.
265
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:08:37 31SZA620_271
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
XM XM TITLE
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON POWER/ SCAN
VOLUME KNOB BUTTON
SCAN POWER/
BUTTON VOLUME KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR CATEGORY
BAR
TUNE KNOB TUNE KNOB
AUDIO AUDIO
BUTTON BUTTON
266
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:08:46 31SZA620_272
Your vehicle is capable of receiving Operating the XM Radio Push the AUDIO button to display
XM Radio anywhere in the United XM information on the screen. You
States, and Canada, except Hawaii can operate the XM Radio system
and Alaska. XM is a registered with the interface dial.
trademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc.
and, XM CANADA is a registered
business name of Canadian Satellite
Radio Inc.
Features
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio To listen to XM Radio, turn the
also allows you to view channel and ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
category selections in the audio (I) or ON (II) position. Push the
display. power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
CONTINUED
267
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:08:53 31SZA620_273
MODE − To switch between the In the category mode, such as Jazz, TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
category mode and channel mode, Rock, Classical, etc., you can change channel selections. Turn the
press and hold the TITLE button navigate through all of the channels knob right for higher numbered
until the mode changes. The within that category. In the channel channels and left for lower
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is mode, you can select all of the numbered channels. You can also
displayed on the screen. To switch available channels. change channels with the interface
the mode with the interface dial, selector, push down the interface
push down the interface selector to Each time you press and release the selector to choose TUNE and press
select AUDIO MENU, then turn the TITLE button, the center display ENTER on the selector. Turn the
knob to select MODE, and press changes in the following sequence: interface knob to the same directions.
ENTER on the selector repeatedly. NAME (artist name), TITLE (music In the category mode, you can only
title), and CHANNEL NAME select channels within that category.
(channel name).
On the screen, you will see the

selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
268
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:08:58 31SZA620_274
CATEGORY − Press either side of SCAN − The scan function gives The system plays each channel in
the bar (− or ＋) to select another you a sampling of all channels while numerical order for a few seconds,
category. in the channel mode. In the category then selects the next channel. When
mode, only the channels within that you hear a channel you want to
category are scanned. To activate continue listening to, push the
SCAN, press the SCAN button. To interface selector to the right again
scan with the interface dial, scroll or press the SCAN button to cancel.
down, and push the interface
Features
selector to the right. You will see
SCAN on the screen and audio
display.
CONTINUED
269
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:09:10 31SZA620_275
2. Use the tune or scan function to 5. Press the button or scroll

tune to a desired channel. up again. The other XM band will
XM BAND be shown. Store the next six
In category mode, only channels channels using steps 2 and 3.
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all Once a channel is stored, press
channels can be selected. and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
Preset − You can store up to 12 press and hold ENTER on the
preset channels using the six preset interface selector.
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
channel from the XM2 band. first six channels.
To store a channel:
1. Press the button or scroll
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.
270
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:09:19 31SZA620_276
XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is

currently too weak. Move the vehicle
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the to an area away from tall buildings,
audio or program information. and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
broadcasting. number does not exist, or is not part
Features
of your subscription, or this channel
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption has no artist or title information at
code is being updated. Wait until the this time.
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
normally. with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
CONTINUED
271
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:09:24 31SZA620_277
The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
272
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:09:38 31SZA620_278
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: your credit card number. To get your
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Driving on the north side of an After you’ve registered with XM
east/west mountain road. Receiving XM Radio Service Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Radio service has expired XM Radio mode while you wait for
Features
large commercial truck on an or you purchased your vehicle from activation. This should take about 30
east/west road. a previous owner, you can listen to a minutes.
Driving in tunnels. sampling of the broadcasts available
Driving on a road beside a vertical on XM Radio. With the ignition While waiting for activation, make
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the sure your vehicle remains in an open
of you. ON (II) position, push the power/ area with good reception. Once your
Driving on the lower level of a volume knob to turn on the audio audio system is activated,
multi-tiered road. system, and press the button. ‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in
Driving on a single lane road A variety of music types and styles the display, and you’ll be able to
alongside dense trees taller than will play. listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. Radio will continue to send an
If you decide to purchase XM Radio activation signal to your vehicle for
There may be other geographic service, contact XM Radio at at least 12 hours from the activation
situations that could affect XM Radio www.xmradio.com, or at request. If the service has not been
reception. 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact activated after 36 hours, contact XM
XM Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or at Radio. In Canada, contact XM
1-877-209-0079. You will need to give CANADA .
them your radio I.D. number and
273
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:09:49 31SZA620_279
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
LOAD
BUTTON CD/AUX
LOAD
BUTTON BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON POWER/
TITLE BUTTON VOLUME KNOB SCAN BUTTON
SCAN POWER/ TITLE BUTTON
BUTTON VOLUME KNOB
CATEGORY TUNE KNOB
BAR CATEGORY SKIP BAR
BAR
SKIP BUTTONS TUNE KNOB
AUDIO AUDIO
BUTTON BUTTON
274
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:10:06 31SZA620_280
Your vehicle’s audio system has an NOTE:

in-dash disc changer with the same If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
controls used for the radio. To protected by digital rights
operate the disc changer, the ignition management (DRM), the audio
switch must be in the ACCESSORY system displays UNSUPPORTED in
(I) or the ON (II) position. the center display, and then skips to
the next file.
The disc changer can play these disc
Features
formats: Video CDs and DVD discs will not
CD (CD-DA) work in this unit.
CD-R/RW
MP3/WMA Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and You cannot load and play 3-inch
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the (8-cm) discs in this system.
format to listen to by pressing and
holding the CD/AUX button until
you hear a beep. The changer can also play MP3 or
WMA format (see page 280 ). Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The disc packages or jackets should The label can curl up and cause the
have one of these marks. When playing a disc in MP3, you will disc to jam in the unit.
see ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display.
275
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:10:20 31SZA620_281
Loading Discs in the Changer 4. Repeat this until all six positions Do not try to insert a disc until
To load multiple discs in one are loaded. If you are not loading ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damage
operation: all six positions, the system will the audio unit.
then begin playing the last disc
1. With the ignition in the loaded. You can select the position to load a
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) disc. Turn the interface knob or
position, press and hold the LOAD If you stop loading discs before all press a preset button to select the
button until you hear a beep and six positions are filled, the system position, then press ENTER on the
see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display, will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load selector. This starts the loading
then release the button. operation, and begin playing the last sequence. If you do not select the
disc loaded. position, the system loads the disc to
2. Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it the first empty position in numerical
only about halfway; the drive will To load a single disc: order.
pull it in the rest of the way. You 1. Press and release the LOAD
will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the audio button. If you press the LOAD button while
display. a disc is playing, the system will stop
2. ‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen playing that disc and start the
3. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the for an empty position in the loading sequence. It will then play
audio display again, insert the next changer. When the green load the disc just loaded.
disc into the slot. indicator comes on and you see
Do not try to insert a disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ in the audio display,
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could insert the disc into the slot. Insert
damage the audio unit. it only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way.
276
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:10:31 31SZA620_282
To Play a Disc The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3, If the disc does not carry album,
and WMA formats. track, or artist name, pressing the
TITLE button shows ‘‘NO INFO.’’
When you play CD-TEXT, you will
see the track name, artist name, and To Change Tracks
album name on the screen. When Each time you press and release the
you play MP3/WMA discs, you will side of the SKIP bar, button, or
see the track name and folder name push the interface selector to the
Features
on the screen. If the disc was not right, the player skips forward to the
recorded with this information, it will beginning of the next track. Press
not be displayed. and release the side of the
SKIP bar, button, or push the
CURRENT DISC Each time you press the TITLE interface selector to the left to skip
button, the center display changes backward to the beginning of the
Select the changer by pressing the from album name, to track name, to current track. Press the side or
CD or CD/AUX button. The system artist name, and then to normal push the interface selector to the left
will begin playing the last selected display that shows the track number again to skip to the previous track.
disc in the disc changer. You will see and the elapsed time. When playing To move rapidly within a track, press
the current disc position highlighted. a disc in MP3/WMA, the display and hold either side of the SKIP bar
mode changes from folder name, to or button.
To select a different disc, press the file name, to artist tag, to album tag,
corresponding number on the preset to track tag, and then to normal
buttons, or turn the interface knob to display.
highlight the desired disc, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
277
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:10:42 31SZA620_283
To Choose a Track To exit the track list display, press Disc Scan
the AUDIO button, or push the When you press the SCAN button
interface selector to the left. repeatedly until you see D-SCAN in
the audio display, or push down the
Track Scan interface selector to the right, the
When you press the SCAN button or first track of the current disc plays
scroll down and push the interface for about 10 seconds. You will see
selector to the left, the next track of SCAN next to DISC on the screen
the current track plays for about 10 and D-SCAN in the audio display. To
seconds. You will see SCAN next to listen to the rest of the disc, press
TRACK on the screen and audio and hold the SCAN button until you
display. To listen to the rest of the hear a beep, or push down the
CURRENT TRACK track, press and hold the SCAN interface selector to the right again
button until you hear a beep or push within 10 seconds.
You can also choose a track directly the interface selector to the left
from a track list. Press ENTER on again within 10 seconds. If you don’t, the system advances to
the interface selector, and the track the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
list screen will be shown. If there are If you don’t, the system advances to of its first track, and continues
no track names, track numbers are the next track, plays about 10 through the rest of the discs the
displayed. You will see the current seconds of it, and continues through same way. When the system reaches
track is highlighted. Turn the the rest of the tracks the same way. the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,
interface knob to select the desired and that disc continues to play.
track, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
278
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:10:49 31SZA620_284
Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play

To replay the current track To replay the current disc To play the tracks of the current disc
continuously, press and release the continuously, press the RPT button in random order, press and release
RPT button, or use the interface repeatedly until you see D-RPT in the RDM button, or use the interface
selector to scroll down, select the audio display, or use the selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER interface selector to scroll down, TRACK RANDOM, and press
on the interface selector. As a select DISC REPEAT, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As
reminder, you will see REPEAT next ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see RANDOM
Features
to TRACK on the screen and RPT in a reminder, you will see REPEAT next to TRACK on the screen and
the audio display. To turn this next to DISC on the screen and RDM in the audio display. To turn
feature off, press and hold the RPT D-RPT in the audio display. To turn this feature off, press and hold the
button until you hear a beep, or this feature off, press and hold the RDM button until you hear a beep,
highlight TRACK REPEAT (if not RPT button until you hear a beep, or or highlight TRACK RANDOM (if
already highlighted), and press highlight DISC REPEAT (if not not already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector
again. ENTER on the interface selector again.
again.
279
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:11:04 31SZA620_285
To Stop Playing a Disc Playing an MP3/WMA Disc and multi-session.

To take the system out of disc mode, The CD changer can play CD-Rs and −Maximum layers
press the AM or FM button, the CD-RWs compressed in MP3 and (including ROOT): 8 layers
button, AUX button, or CD/ WMA format. When playing a disc in
AUX button. To return to disc mode, MP3 or WMA, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or The specifications for compatible
press the CD button or CD/AUX ‘‘WMA’’ on the center display. A disc WMA files are:
button. can support more than 99 folders, −Sampling frequency:
and each folder can hold up to 255 22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz
If you turn the system off while a playable files. −Bitrate:
disc is playing, either with the 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
power/volume knob or the ignition When there are more than 99 folders −Compatible with variable bitrate
switch, play will continue at the same on a disc, the center display only and multi-session
point when you turn it back on. shows two digits. −Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are: To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
−Sampling frequency: disc controls previously described,
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 16/ along with the following information.
22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps
(MPEG2)
−Compatible with variable bitrate
280
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:11:15 31SZA620_286
Changing the Folders Changing and Selecting the Folders/

While playing an MP3/WMA disc, Files
you can select a folder within the
disc by pressing either side of the
category bar. Each time you press
either side of the bar, the folder title
and its first file’s information appear
in the center display in recorded
Features
order.
MP3/WMA INDICATOR CURRENT FOLDER
Using the interface selector, you can Push the selector to show the folder
see the list of all the files and folders list. Turn the selector knob,
within a disc. While playing a MP3/ highlight the folder you want to see
WMA disc, press the AUDIO button. the information within, and press
The currently playing folder and file ENTER.
information comes on the screen.
CONTINUED
281
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:11:24 31SZA620_287
Folder Scan Folder Repeat

This feature, when activated, This feature, when activated, replays
samples the first file of each folder all files in the selected folder. To
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder, activate folder repeat mode, press
press the SCAN button repeatedly the RPT button repeatedly until you
until you see F-SCAN in the audio see F-RPT in the audio display, or
display. You will see SCAN next to use the interface selector to scroll
FOLDER and F-SCAN in the audio down, select FOLDER REPEAT by
display. turning the interface knob, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
To listen to the rest of the folder, You will see REPEAT next to
press and hold the SCAN button FOLDER on the screen and F-RPT
until you hear a beep. If you do not, in the audio display. To turn this
CURRENT TRACK the system advances to the next feature off, press and hold the RPT
folder, plays 10 seconds of it, and button until you hear a beep, or
You can see the list of all the files in continues throughout the rest of the highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not
the selected folder. Turn the selector folder the same way. When the already highlighted), and press
knob, then press ENTER to set your system samples the first file of all ENTER on the interface selector
selection. folders, folder scan is canceled, and again.
the last file played comes back.
If the root folder has some additional
folders in the lower layer, they will
be listed on the screen.
282
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:11:35 31SZA620_288
Folder Random Removing Discs from the To remove a different disc from the
This feature, when activated, plays Changer changer, first select it by pressing
tracks in the current folder in To remove the disc that is currently the corresponding number on the
random order. To activate folder playing, press the eject button. You preset button or turning the
random play, press the RDM button; will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the audio display. interface knob, and pressing ENTER
or use the interface selector to scroll When you remove the disc from the on the interface selector. When that
down, select FOLDER RANDOM by slot, the system begins the load disc begins playing, press the eject
interface knob, and press ENTER on sequence so you can load another button.
Features
the interface selector. You will see disc. If you do not load another disc,
RANDOM next to FOLDER on the the load sequence is canceled, and When you press the eject button
screen and F-RDM in the audio the system continues playing in the while listening to the radio, or with
display. To turn this feature off, previous mode. the audio system turned off, the disc
press and hold the RDM button until that was last selected is ejected.
you hear a beep, or highlight If you do not remove the disc from After that disc is ejected, pressing
FOLDER RANDOM (if not already the slot, the system will reload the the eject button again will eject the
highlighted), and press ENTER on disc after 10 seconds. next disc in numerical order. By
the interface selector again. doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
You can also eject discs when the

ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.
283
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:11:44 31SZA620_289
Disc Changer Error Messages

HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
If you see an error message in the normal.
display while playing a disc, press UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
the eject button. After ejecting the supported supported track or file plays automatically.
disc, check it for damage or BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
deformation. If there is no damage, PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
insert the disc again. OWNER’S Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
MANUAL PUSH (see page 286). Insert the disc again. If the code
For additional information on EJECT does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
damaged discs, see page 286 . BAD DISC removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
PLEASE CHECK Servo Error force the disc out of the player.
The audio system will try to play the OWNER’S
disc. If there is still a problem, the MANUAL
error message will reappear. Press
284
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:11:57 31SZA620_290
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labeled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
changer. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- A new disc may be rough on the
shaped discs may jam in the drive inner and outer edges. The small
or cause other problems. plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
Handle your discs properly to recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
prevent damage and skipping. causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
inner and outer edges with the side tip pens, can cause the disc to not
of a pencil or pen. play properly, or possibly jam in the
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. drive.
The label can curl up and cause the Never try to insert foreign objects in
disc to jam in the unit. the disc changer.
285
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:12:11 31SZA620_291
Additional Information on 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
to the right:
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
286
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:12:26 31SZA620_292
4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo. For the
rear entertainment system, see
page 344 .
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc. Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the

discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dual-

Can Shape Arrow Shape disc .
287
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:12:32 31SZA620_293
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
With rear entertainment system USB ICON
iPod ICON
CENTER DISPLAY
CD/AUX BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR
MAP/GUIDE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO BUTTON
288
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:12:42 31SZA620_294
To Play an iPod The system will only play songs iPods compatible with your audio
This audio system can operate the stored on the iPod with iTunes. system using the USB adapter cable
audio files on the iPod with the are:
same controls used for the in-dash iPod and iTunes are registered
disc changer. To play an iPod, trademarks owned by Apple Inc. Model Software
connect it to the USB adapter cable iPod Classic
in the console compartment by using Voice Control System 5th Gen. Ver. 1.2 or more
your dock connector, then press the You can select the AUX mode by (2005 or later)
Features
AUX button. The ignition switch using the navigation system voice iPod Classic Ver. 1.0 or more
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or control buttons, but cannot operate (2007 or later)
ON (II) position. The iPod will also the play mode functions. iPod nano Ver. 1.2 or more
be recharged with the ignition switch iPod nano 2nd Ver. 1.1.2 or more
in these positions. generation
iPod nano 3rd Ver. 1.0 or more
generation
iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or more
iPhone Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Use only compatible iPods with the

latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
CONTINUED
289
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:12:52 31SZA620_295
NOTE: In AAC format, DRM (digital rights Connecting an iPod

Do not connect your iPod using a management) files cannot be played.
hub. If the system finds a DRM file, the USB ADAPTER CABLE
audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,
Do not keep the iPod in the and then skips to the next file.
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable

between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
USB CONNECTOR
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it. 1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
290
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:13:01 31SZA620_296
If the iPod indicator does not appear The current file number and total of
in the audio display, check the the selected playable files are
connections, and try to reconnect the displayed in the center display.
iPod a few times. Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the artist, album and track (file)
USB ADAPTER If the audio system still does not names on the navigation screen.
CABLE recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
Features
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
itunes/
DOCK CONNECTOR
2. Connect your dock connector to

the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the

USB adapter cable securely.
CONTINUED
291
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:13:11 31SZA620_297
To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu

Use the SKIP bar or button while an
iPod is playing to select passages and
change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and

release the side of the SKIP bar
or button, the system skips forward
to the beginning of the next file.
Press and release the side of
the bar or button, to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file. You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO You can also select a file from any of
To move rapidly within a file, press button to show the audio control the iPod menus: playlists, artists,
and hold either side ( or ) display on the navigation screen. albums and songs, by using the
of the SKIP bar or button. Push the selector to the right side to interface dial. Press the AUDIO
skip forward and to the left side to button to display the audio control
skip backward. display on the navigation screen.
Push up the interface selector to
display the iPod menu. Turn the
knob on the interface dial to select a
desired list.
292
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:13:20 31SZA620_298
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either the To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

artists or albums list, all available
files on the selected list are played.
Press the AUDIO button to go back

to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
Features
pressing the MAP/GUIDE button
cancels the audio control display on
the screen.
Push down the selector.
Push ENTER on the selector to You can select any type of repeat and
display the items on that list, then random mode on the audio menu.
turn the knob on the interface dial to Press the AUDIO button to display
select a desired list. Pushing the the audio control screen, then push
selector up or down moves a down the selector to display the
selection to the top or bottom of the audio menu. Turn the knob on the
screen items. Press ENTER to set interface dial to select an audio
your selection. mode: repeat, album random, and
track random. Press ENTER to set
your selection.
CONTINUED
293
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:13:28 31SZA620_299
To cancel the selected mode, press TRACK RANDOM − This feature

ENTER again while the highlighted plays all available files from the
mode is selected on the audio control selected items in the iPod menu list
display. (playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. You will see
TRACK RANDOM on the screen.
To turn it off, have this mode

highlighted and press ENTER
again.
REPEAT − This feature

continuously plays a file.
To turn it off, press ENTER again.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar

or button changes the file while
keeping the repeat feature.
294
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:13:39 31SZA620_300
To turn it off, have this mode To Stop Playing Your iPod

highlighted and press ENTER again. To play the radio, press the AM, FM,
or XM button. Press the CD or CD/
You can also select another list from AUX button to switch to the disc
the iPod menu while keeping the mode (if a disc is loaded).
random function.
NOTE:
Features
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
ALBUM RANDOM − This feature

plays all available albums from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. The files in each
album are played in the recorded
order. You will see ALBUM
RANDOM on the screen.
CONTINUED
295
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:13:46 31SZA620_301
Disconnecting an iPod If you reconnect the same iPod, the iPod Error Messages
You can disconnect the iPod at any system may begin playing where it If you see an error message in the
time when you see ‘‘OK to left off, depending on what mode the center display, see page 297 .
disconnect’’ message＊ in the iPod iPod is in when it is reconnected.
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
＊ : The displayed message may

vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
When you disconnect the iPod while

it is playing, the center display and
the audio screen (if selected) show
NO DATA.
296
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:13:51 31SZA620_302
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the

center display while playing an iPod, Error Message Solution
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error FILE ERROR The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There
message, take your vehicle to your is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
dealer. MEDIA ERROR Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected.
Features
297
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:13:57 31SZA620_303
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
With rear entertainment system
AUDIO CONTROL DISPLAY
CENTER DISPLAY
USB INDICATOR
CD/AUX BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR
MAP/GUIDE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO BUTTON
298
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:14:14 31SZA620_304
To Play a USB Flash Memory The recommended USB flash Do not keep a USB flash memory
Device memory devices are 256 MB or device in the vehicle. Direct
This audio system can operate the higher, and formatted with the FAT sunlight and high heat will damage
audio files on a USB flash memory file system. Some digital audio it.
device with the same controls used players may be compatible as well.
for the in-dash disc changer. To play Some USB flash memory devices We recommend backing up your
a USB flash memory device, connect (such as devices with security lock- data before playing a USB flash
it to the USB adapter cable in the out features, etc.) will not work in memory device.
Features
console compartment, then press the this audio unit.
AUX button. The ignition switch Depending on the type and
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or NOTE: number of files, it may take some
ON (II) position. Do not use a device such as a card time before they begin to play.
reader or hard drive as the device
The audio system reads and plays or your files may be damaged. Depending on the software the
the audio files on the USB flash files were made with, it may not be
memory device in MP3, WMA or Do not connect your USB flash possible to play some files, or
AAC＊ formats. Depending on the memory device using a hub. display some text data.
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash Do not use an extension cable to Voice Control System
memory device is playing. The USB the USB adapter cable equipped You can select the AUX mode by
flash memory device limit is up to with your vehicle. using the navigation system voice
700 folders or up to 65535 files. control buttons, but cannot operate
the play mode functions.
＊ : Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit. CONTINUED
299
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:14:32 31SZA620_305
The specifications for compatible −Partition: In WMA or AAC format, DRM

MP3 files are: Top partition only (digital rights management) files
−Sampling frequency: −Maximum layers: 8 cannot be played. If the system finds
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) a DRM file, the audio unit displays
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2) The specifications for compatible UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
−Bitrate: AAC files are: to the next file.
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ −Sampling frequency:
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
(MPEG1) 44.1/48 kHz
−Supported standards: −Bitrate:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3 48−320 kbps
MPEG2 Audio Layer3 −Supported standards:
−Partition: MPEG4/AAC LC
Top partition only MPEG2/AAC LC
−Maximum layers: 8 −Partition:
Top partition only
The specifications for compatible −Maximum layers: 8
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency: Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
32/44.1/48 kHz AAC format may not be supported. If
−Bitrate: an unsupported file is found, the
48−320/VBR kbps (Max 384) audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
−Supported standards: then skips to the next file.
WMA version 7/8/9
300
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:14:40 31SZA620_306
Connecting a USB Flash Memory When the USB device is connected

Device and the USB mode is selected on the
audio system, the USB indicator is
USB ADAPTER CABLE shown in the center display. It also
shows the folder and file numbers.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the folder and file names, and the
elapsed time in the navigation screen.
Features
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
1. Unclip the USB connector by 2. Connect the USB flash memory

pivoting it, and pull out the USB device to the USB adapter cable
adapter cable in the console correctly and securely.
compartment.
CONTINUED
301
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:14:49 31SZA620_307
To Change or Select Files Folder Selection − To select a

Use the SKIP bar or button while a different folder, press and release
USB flash memory device is playing either side of the CATEGORY bar.
to select passages and change files. Press the ＋ side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side to skip
SKIP − Each time you press and to the beginning of the previous
release the side of the SKIP bar folder.
or button, the system skips forward
to the beginning of the next file.
Press and release the side of
the bar or button, to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file. SKIP DIRECTION SKIP DIRECTION
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file. You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
To move rapidly within a file, press button to show the audio control
and hold either side ( or ) display on the navigation screen.
of the SKIP bar or button. Push the selector knob to the right
side to skip to the beginning of the
next file, and to the left side to skip
to the beginning of the current file.
Pushing it to the left again skips to
the beginning of the previous file.
302
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:15:00 31SZA620_308
To Select a File from Folder and File

Lists
Features
You can also select a folder or file Push up the selector on the interface Press ENTER to change the display
from the list by using the interface dial to switch the display to the to the file list, then turn the knob on
dial. Press the AUDIO button to folder list, then turn the knob on the the interface dial to select a file.
show the audio control display on the interface dial to select a folder. Press ENTER to set your selection.
navigation screen. To go back to the normal play
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP/GUIDE button
cancels the audio mode display.
CONTINUED
303
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:15:12 31SZA620_309
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan highlighted play mode, then press

Mode: ENTER to turn off that selected
mode.
FOLDER REPEAT − This feature

replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
Pressing either side of the
CATEGORY bar also turns off this
feature.
TRACK REPEAT − This feature

continuously plays a file. Pressing
either side of the SKIP bar or button
also turns off this feature.
You can select any type of repeat, Turn the knob on the interface dial
random and scan modes on the audio to select a play mode: folder random, FOLDER RANDOM − This
menu screen. Press the AUDIO track random, folder repeat, track feature plays the files in the selected
button to show the audio control repeat. Press ENTER to set your folder in random order.
display on the navigation screen. selection.
Push down the selector on the TRACK RANDOM − This feature
interface dial to display the audio To cancel the selected mode, push plays all the files in random order.
menu items. down the selector to display the
audio menu on the audio control
display. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select the
304
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:15:19 31SZA620_310
TRACK SCAN − This function FOLDER SCAN − This function Pressing either side of the
samples all files in the selected samples the first file in each folder in CATEGORY or SKIP bar or button
folder in the order they are stored. the order they are stored. To also turns off the feature.
To activate the scan feature, push activate the folder scan feature, push
the selector to the right. You will see the selector to the right repeatedly.
TRACK SCAN on the screen. You You will see FOLDER SCAN on the
will also see SCAN on the center screen. You will also see SCAN on
display and the file number blinking. the center display and the folder
Features
You will get a 10 second sampling of number blinking. You will get a 10
each file in the folder. Push the second sampling of the first file in
selector to the right repeatedly to get each folder. Push the selector to the
out of the scan mode. The system right to get out of the scan mode.
plays the last file sampled. The system plays the last file
sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN button on the control You can also select the folder scan
panel. feature with the SCAN button on the
Press and release the SCAN button. control panel. Press and release the
Press and hold the SCAN button to SCAN button repeatedly.
get out of the scan mode and play Press and hold the SCAN button to
the last file sampled. get out of the folder scan mode and
play the last file sampled.
305
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:15:27 31SZA620_311
To Stop Playing a USB Flash Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory USB Flash Memory Device Error
Memory Device Device Messages
To play the radio, press the AM, FM, You can disconnect the USB flash If you see an error message in the
or XM button. Press the CD or CD/ memory device at any time even if center display, see page 307 .
AUX button to switch to the disc the USB mode is selected on the
mode (if a disc is loaded). audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory device’s
If you reconnect the same USB flash instructions when you remove it.
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off. When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the center display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.
306
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:15:32 31SZA620_312
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the

center display while playing a USB Error Message Solution
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash
you cannot clear the error message, FILE ERROR memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been
take your vehicle to your dealer. damaged.
MEDIA ERROR Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is connected.
Features
307
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:15:43 31SZA620_313
FM/AM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
their advertising, so your radio could completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify are close to.
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
308
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:15:51 31SZA620_314
FM/AM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:

Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
309
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:15:58 31SZA620_315
Auxiliary Input Jack
On vehicles with rear entertainment

system
The auxiliary input jack is inside the

front console compartment. The
system will accept auxiliary input Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
from standard audio accessories. connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
When a compatible audio unit is back of the center console
connected to the jack, press the AUX compartment.
or CD/AUX button to select it.
For more information, see page 347 .
310
2011 Pilot
10/01/27 17:26:10 31SZA620_316
Remote Audio Controls
Except LX models The MODE button changes the To search up and down from the
mode. current frequency and find a station
MODE BUTTON with a strong signal, press the top
On vehicles with navigation system (＋) or bottom (−) of the button for
Pressing the MODE button 1 second.
repeatedly cycles through all
possible media sources whether they If you are playing a disc, the system
are present or not. skips to the beginning of the next
Features
track each time you press the top
On vehicles without navigation system (＋) of the CH button. Press the
Pressing the MODE button bottom (−) to return to the
repeatedly cycles through all present, beginning of the current track. Press
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON connected media sources. Media it again to return to the previous
sources that are not present or track. You will see the disc and track
Three controls for the audio system connected will not appear when numbers in the upper display.
are mounted in the steering wheel cycling with the MODE button.
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your If you are listening to the radio, use
hand from the wheel. the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (＋) of
The VOL button adjusts the volume the button, the system goes to the
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top next preset station on the band you
or bottom of the button, hold it until are listening to. Press the bottom
the desired volume is reached, then (−) to go back to the previous
release it. station.
CONTINUED
311
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:16:15 31SZA620_317
Remote Audio Controls
To go to the next disc, press the top On vehicles with rear entertainment On vehicles with navigation system
(＋) of the button for 1 second. system If you are playing a USB flash
Press the bottom (−) for 1 second If you are playing a DVD video, use memory device or iPod with the USB
to go back to the previous disc. the channel button to change adapter cable, press and release the
When you play an MP3/WMA disc, chapters. Each time you press the top (＋) of the CH button to skip
press the top (＋) of the button for 1 top (＋) of the button, the system forward to the beginning of the next
second to go to the next folder. Press goes to the next chapter. Press the file. Press the bottom (−) to skip
the bottom (−) for 1 second to go bottom (−) to return to the backward to the beginning to the
back to the previous folder. beginning of the current chapter. current file. Press it twice to return
Press it again to return to the to the previous file.
If you are listening to XM Radio, use previous chapter.
the CH button to change channels.
Each time you press the top (＋) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset channel. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the
previous preset channel.
To go to the next channel of the
category you are listening to, press
the top (＋) of the button for 1
second. Press the bottom (−) for 1
second to go back to the previous
channel.
312
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:16:24 31SZA620_318
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system may If your vehicle’s battery is discon- The system will retain your AM and
disable itself if it is disconnected nected or goes dead, or the radio FM presets even if power is
from electrical power for any reason. fuse is removed, the audio system disconnected.
To make it work again, you must will disable itself. If this happens,
enter a specific five-digit code with you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the audio
the preset buttons. Because there display the next time you turn on the
are hundreds of number system. Use the preset buttons to
combinations possible from the five enter the five-digit code. The code is
Features
digits, making the system work located on the radio code card
without knowing the exact code is included in your owner’s manual kit.
nearly impossible. When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system code number If you make a mistake entering the
and serial number. It is best to store code, do not start over; complete the
this card in a safe place at home. In five-digit sequence, then enter the
addition, you should write the audio correct code. You have ten tries to
system’s serial number in this owner’s enter the correct code. If you are
manual. unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
If you lose the card, you must obtain hour before trying again.
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
313
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:16:39 31SZA620_319
Setting the Clock
LX models EX and EX-L models

You can quickly set the time to the
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6) nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
(reset) button to set the time back to
the previous hour. If the displayed
RESET time is after the half hour, the same
BUTTON procedure sets the time forward to
(PRESET 6) MINUTE
BUTTON the beginning of the next hour.
HOUR (PRESET 5)
BUTTON For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
(PRESET 4)
1:52 will reset to 2:00
CLOCK CLOCK BUTTON
BUTTON SELECTOR KNOB
MENU BUTTON On vehicles with navigation system
HOUR BUTTON MINUTE BUTTON EX-L model with rear The navigation system receives
(PRESET 4) (PRESET 5) entertainment system is shown. signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
On vehicles without navigation system Change the hours by pressing the H time is updated automatically by the
If your vehicle’s battery is (hour) button until the numbers GPS. Refer to the navigation system
disconnected or goes dead, you may advance to the desired time. Change manual for how to adjust the time.
need to set the clock. the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
To set the time, press the CLOCK advance to the desired time.
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink. Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
314
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:16:50 31SZA620_320
Setting the Clock
On EX and EX-L models

Adjusting the Clock with MENU
Button
You can also adjust the clock and
switch the clock display between
24-hours and 12-hours in the menu
mode.
Features
To adjust the clock setting:
1. Press and release the MENU

button. The display shows you the
menu items.
2. Turn the selector knob to select 4. Turn the selector knob to select
You can adjust the clock setting ‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’ the item which you want to adjust.
with the ignition switch in the Turning the selector knob will
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) 3. Press the selector knob (ENTER) change the selected item between
position. to enter your selection. The the clock display setting, hours,
display changes to the clock minutes, and SET. The selected
adjusting display. item is indicated with △ in the
display.
CONTINUED
315
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:17:03 31SZA620_321
Setting the Clock
While setting the clock, pressing

the RETURN button will go back
to the previous display.
Pressing the MENU button again
will cancel this setting mode.
MINUTE SETTING
5. Turn the selector knob to change 7. To set the time, turn the selector
the setting between 12H and 24H. knob and select the hours or the
minutes, then press the knob to
6. Press the selector knob (ENTER) enter your selection. The display
to enter your selection. The changes to the setting display.
display will return to the clock 10. To enter the clock setting, turn
adjusting display. 8. Turn the selector knob to count the selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’
the numbers up or down. then press the knob. The display
will return to the menu item
9. Press the selector knob (ENTER) display.
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock 11. Press either the RETURN or
adjusting display. MENU button to go back to the
normal display.
316
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:17:15 31SZA620_322
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles with rear entertainment To Turn On the System you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in the
system Press the REAR PWR button. The display. You should select another
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear indicator on the REAR PWR button source or insert a DVD.
entertainment system that includes a will come on. The rear seat
DVD player for the enjoyment of the passengers can then operate the rear Rear Speakers
rear passengers. system from the control panel in the When you turn on the system, the
ceiling. The rear control panel can rear speakers are automatically
With this system, the rear also be detached and used as a turned off if the rear system selects
Features
passengers can enjoy a different remote control, by pushing the a different entertainment source
entertainment source (radio, disc RELEASE button, and pulling the than the front system. You will see
changer, DVD player, XM Radio, or remote toward you. the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
optional CD changer/tape player) audio display. The sound for the rear
than the front seat occupants. The Pressing the REAR CTRL OFF system is sent to the wireless
audio is broadcast through the button disables rear control. The headphones.
supplied wireless headphones. indicator in the button comes on and
your passengers can no longer If you want to turn the rear speakers
The ignition switch must be in the operate the system with the rear on again, press and hold the REAR
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) control panel. When the button is PWR button until the Rear Speakers
position to operate the rear pressed, the ‘‘CTRL OFF’’ message Off icon goes off.
entertainment system. appears in the overhead screen to let
your passengers know that the NOTE: The rear speakers are
control panel is disabled. connected to the front system, so
The rear system selects the source it they will always play the source that
was last set to. If that source has the front system is set to.
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example), CONTINUED
317
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:17:21 31SZA620_323
Overhead Screen Unit
REAR PWR
BUTTON
REAR CTRL OFF
BUTTON
FRONT SOURCE
BUTTON REAR SOURCE
BUTTON
318
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:17:33 31SZA620_324
To Select Rear Entertainment To play the radio, the buttons for the REAR CONTROL PANEL
from the Front Control Panel front entertainment system have the
To operate the rear entertainment same functions.
system from the front panel, press
the REAR SOURCE button. You will If an audio CD is loaded into the
hear two beeps and the indicator in upper slot, select the CD/AUX
the button comes on to show that the button. If a DVD or CD is loaded into
control panel is enabled. the lower slot, select the DVD button.
Features
When REAR SOURCE is selected, Operating the DVD Player from OPEN BUTTON
the front entertainment system the Front Control Panel
audio controls can also be used to The DVD player in your rear OVERHEAD SCREEN
operate the rear entertainment entertainment system can play DVD
system in all modes. video discs, audio CDs, video CDs, Open the overhead screen by
MP3/WMA discs and DTS CDs. pushing the OPEN button. The
The media that the rear passengers screen will swing down part-way.
are listening to will then be heard Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
from the front speakers. If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
If you do not operate the rear display will turn off. Pivot the screen
entertainment system from the front back to the second or first detent to
panel within 10 seconds, the turn the display back on. To close
indicator goes off and the FRONT the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
SOURCE indicator comes on
automatically.
CONTINUED
319
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:17:45 31SZA620_325
On vehicles with navigation system Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/
CD slot in the audio unit.
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive

will pull it in the rest of the way.
PLAY − Press the button if

the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
PLAY/PAUSE EJECT BUTTON PAUSE − Press the button to
BUTTON
pause the DVD. Press the button
SKIP BAR again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.
When the DVD menu is displayed,

‘‘DVD MENU’’ and ‘‘Push to
start’’ appears. Press button to
play the DVD.
320
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:17:53 31SZA620_326
SEEK/SKIP − Press and hold the EJECT − Press the eject button to Using the Rear Control Panel
side of the SKIP bar to move remove the DVD from the drive. To turn on the rear entertainment
forward; you will see the time system from the rear control panel,
elapsed shown in the overhead To Return to Front Audio press the PWR button. Use the AM/
screen advances rapidly. Press and Controls FM button, XM button, CD button,
hold the side of the SKIP bar to To return front panel control to the or DVD/AUX button to select the
move backward; you will see the front audio system, press the entertainment source. The selected
time elapsed shown in the overhead FRONT SOURCE button. You will source will be shown in the display.
Features
screen decreases. Release the bar hear a beep and the indicator in the Make sure the rear control operation
when the system reaches the point button comes on. The indicator also has not been disabled with the REAR
you want. comes on automatically when you do CTRL button on the front panel.
not operate the rear entertainment When the audio system is off or the
Each time you press the side of system for 10 seconds. front side rear power is off, the rear
the SKIP bar and release it, the control panel cannot be turned on.
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
side of the SKIP bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press and release it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous track or chapter.
321
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:18:05 31SZA620_327
To Play the Radio from the Rear

Control Panel
Use the ▲ , ▼ , , or
button to highlight SEEK,
TUNE, AUTO SELECT, SCAN, or REAR CONTROL PANEL
one of the preset radio stations on
the overhead screen. You can enter
the highlighted function by pressing
the ENT button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system. You can also
use the or buttons to seek
up/down and or to tune
up/down. To Play the XM Radio from the change category or channel mode),
Rear Control Panel SCAN, or one of the preset channels
You can also use the or on the overhead screen. You can
buttons to change categories enter the highlighted function by
up/down and or to change pressing the ENT button. These
channels up/down within a category functions have the same features as
(in CATEGORY mode) or up/down those of the front audio system.
for all channels (in CH mode).
Use the ▲ , ▼ , , or
button to highlight CATE (to
change categories), CHAN (to
change channels), MODE (to
322
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:18:16 31SZA620_328
While the overhead screen is closed, To Play a Disc in the 6-Disc To Play an iPod or USB Flash
you can see the XM Radio Changer from the Rear Control Memory Device from the Rear
information in the subsidiary display Panel Control Panel
in the ceiling. Pressing the DISP If discs are loaded in the disc If an iPod or USB flash memory
MODE button repeatedly changes changer, select them by pressing the device is connected to the USB
the subsidiary display from the CD button. adapter cable in the console
channel number, to the category compartment, you can select files to
name, to the music title, to the artist Use the ▲ , ▼ , , or play.
Features
name, and to the channel name, and button to highlight REPEAT,
then back to the channel number. RANDOM, SCAN, , (skip), For an iPod , use the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or (cue) on the overhead , or button to highlight
To change mode, press and hold the screen. You can enter the REPEAT, RANDOM, ,
DISP MODE button for 5 seconds. highlighted function by pressing the (skip), , or (cue) on
ENT button. These functions have the overhead screen.
the same features as those of the
front audio system. For a USB flash memory device, use
the ▲ , ▼ , , or
To change the disc currently playing, button to highlight REPEAT,
use the ▲ , ▼ , , or RANDOM, SCAN, , (skip),
button to highlight your , or (cue) on the overhead
selected disc icon, and press ENT. screen.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer

and the overhead screen is not open,
pressing the ▲ or ▼ button changes
the discs.
323
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:18:29 31SZA620_329
To Play a DVD from the Rear REAR CONTROL PANEL

Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by

pushing the OPEN button. The OPEN
screen will swing down part-way. BUTTON
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far OVERHEAD SCREEN
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen Press the button again quickly To select the menu on the DVD,
back to the second or first detent to to go to the previous chapter. press the MENU/SCROLL button.
turn the display back on. To close Use the , , , and
the screen, pivot it up until it latches. To move rapidly within a chapter, buttons to move to the desired
press and hold the or menu selection, then press the ENT
Press the button when you button. The system will button to enter your selection.
want to pause the DVD. Press this continue to move through the
button again to go back to PLAY. chapter. Press the button to
move forward, or the button to
Press the button to skip to the move backward. Release the button
beginning of the next chapter. Press when the system reaches the point
the button to return to the you want.
beginning of the current chapter.
324
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:18:40 31SZA620_330
DISP MODE Button MENU SCROLL Button Top Menu
Features
When you press the DISP MODE When you press the MENU When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’, the
button while a DVD is playing, the SCROLL button while a DVD is screen changes to the DVD’s title
current status of title, chapter, playing, the DVD Menu appears. menu. This menu also appears when
elapsed time, angle, subtitle, audio, The menu options are TOP MENU, you press the MENU SCROLL
and sound characteristics, with the MENU, PLAY MODE, SEARCH, button while a DVD is not playing.
personal surround logo are displayed. and NumInput. To go back to play, press the
To return to the DVD video screen, RETURN button.
press the DISP MODE button again. To go to your selected menu, use the
or button to highlight the
icon and press the ENT button. To
return to the DVD video screen,
select EXIT. CONTINUED
325
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:18:52 31SZA620_331
Menu Play Mode ‘‘Audio’’
When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with the When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’ To change the Audio setting,
or button, the screen with the or button, you highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the play
changes to the DVD’s title menu. can change the DVD’s Audio, mode menu with the ▼ or
Subtitle or Angle setting. ▲ button. A submenu of dubbed
languages appears. You can select
another language by pressing the
or button. The sound
characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language is also
displayed next to the language.
326
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:19:00 31SZA620_332
The selectable languages vary from ‘‘Subtitle’’ After selecting your desired subtitle,
DVD to DVD, and this feature may press the RETURN button or cursor
not be available on some DVDs. back with the ▼ or ▲ button to
go back to the top of the Play Mode
Press the RETURN button or cursor menu. Press the RETURN button
back with the ▼ or ▲ button to again to exit completely.
menu. Press the RETURN button
Features
again to exit completely.
To change the DVD’s subtitle,

highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or
▲ button. You can see the
available subtitles with the or
button.
CONTINUED
327
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:19:11 31SZA620_333
‘‘Angle’’ If there are no multiple angles Search

available on the DVD, you cannot
change from ‘‘Angle 1’’.
Press the RETURN button or cursor

back with the ▼ or ▲ button to
menu.
Press the RETURN button again to

exit completely.
To change the view angle, highlight When you highlight ‘‘Search’’ with
‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menu the or button, the ‘‘Jump
with the ▼ or ▲ button. You to chapter and title number input’’
can see the available angle options message appears. To select
with the or button. ‘‘Chapter’’ or ‘‘Title’’ search, press
the ENT button.
328
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:19:22 31SZA620_334
‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’ Num Input
Features
With ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, use the A numerical command can be issued Select the first digit number using
or button to jump to your to a DVD by inputting a two digit the ▼ , ▲ , , or
desired title and press the ENT number, and a button number can be button, and enter it by pressing
button. When ‘‘Chapter’’ is selected on the screen. the ENT button. If you want to
highlighted, follow the same change the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’
procedure for the chapter search. When you highlight, ‘‘NumInput’’ and press the ENT button, then
with the or button, the select and enter the new number.
‘‘Jump to keypad’’ message appears.
Press the ENT button to go to the
NumInput selection screen.
CONTINUED
329
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:19:31 31SZA620_335
Select and enter the second digit SETUP Button Disp Adjust
number the same way. The cursor To adjust the display, highlight ‘‘Disp
will automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’ Adjust’’ from the setup menu with
icon when you press the ENT button. the ▼ or ▲ button and press
Press the ENT button to enter the the ENT button. You can adjust
number command. To go back to the these display settings:
DVD screen, press the RETURN Brightness
button or select EXIT and press the Contrast
ENT button. Black Level
Tint
Color
When you press the SETUP button

while a DVD is playing, the setup
menu appears. The menu options are
DISP ADJUSTMENT, ASPECT
RATIO, and PERSONAL
SURROUND.
To change a setup, use the or

button to highlight your
selection and press the ENT button.
To return to the DVD video screen,
select EXIT.
330
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:19:42 31SZA620_336
Features
Select the quality you want to adjust If you want to set the display to the The display changes as shown above.
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
Adjust the setting by pressing the pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, then Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
or button. When you are press the ENT button. button. You will see the message
finished with your adjustment, ‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
cursor back to the top of the setup the display for 5 seconds.
menu, or press the RETURN button
to exit.
CONTINUED
331
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:19:50 31SZA620_337
Aspect Ratio Select the desired setting by

You can set the screen mode to pressing the or button,
these settings: then press the ENT button.
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing

the or button, then press
the ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is

displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
332
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:19:57 31SZA620_338
Personal Surround Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’ If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo
by pressing the or button, disappears, and there will be no
and enter your selection by pressing special sound effect.
the ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.
Features
To change the Personal Surround
setting, highlight ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ from the setup menu
with the ▼ or ▲ button and
press the ENT button. The effect
selection appears.
CONTINUED
333
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:20:08 31SZA620_339
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language) Menu Language
When you press the SETUP button When you select ‘‘Language’’ with To select the language used in the
on the rear control panel when a the or button, the menu DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL shown above appears. Language’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed. button.
To return to the stop or prestop
There are two selectable menus: screen, select ‘‘Exit’’ using the
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’ or button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.
334
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:20:17 31SZA620_340
Features
Select the desired language by If you want another language than If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
pressing the or button. those listed, you need to enter the ENT button, the display returns to
code number of the desired language. the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
The selectable languages are, Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENT menu.
English, French, Spanish, German, button. The display changes as
Italian, Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai, shown in the next column.
Japanese or others.
CONTINUED
335
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:20:30 31SZA620_341
Audio Language
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display If you made a mistake entering a You can select the dubbed language
changes to the language code input number digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the before playing DVDs.
mode. Select the first number digit display with the , , , Select ‘‘Audio Language’’ by pressing
using the , , , or or button, and press the ENT the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
button, and press the ENT button on the control panel. Then submenu next to ‘‘Audio Language.’’
button to enter it. Repeat this until all select and enter the correct number
four digits are filled. When the digit as described. The display Follow the same instructions you
fourth digit is entered, the cursor returns to the initial ‘‘Language’’ used to set the menu language.
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the menu screen.
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
336
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:20:40 31SZA620_342
Subtitle Language INITIAL SETTINGS (Others) Dynamic Range

‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Features
You can select the subtitle language When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the top
before playing DVDs. of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’ screen,
Select ‘‘Subtitle Language’’ by the above menu appears on the
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. You will screen.
see the submenu next to the
‘‘Subtitle Language.’’
Follow the same instructions you

used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
337
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:20:49 31SZA620_343
Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK
When you select the ‘‘Dynamic When you switch to another angle Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
Range’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲ while playing a DVD, the angle mark ▼ or ▲ button. The above submenu
button, you will see the submenu is displayed in the upper right corner appears. If you want the angle mark
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as of the screen. to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
shown above. or button.
You can set the system to display or
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off, not display this angle mark.
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the or button.
338
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:20:57 31SZA620_344
Parental Level
You can place an auditory restriction
by changing the parental control
level. The higher the level number,
the lower the restriction.
Features
When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’
Highlight ‘‘Parental Level’’ and press the display changes as shown above.
ENT button. You will see the To change the level, you need to
submenu. If you select ‘‘No’’ and enter your four digit password.
press the ENT button, the screen Select the number for the first digit
goes back to the ‘‘Others’’ menu. by pressing the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel. CONTINUED
339
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:21:06 31SZA620_345
Changing the Password
If the system does not recognize the If you enter the password correctly, The password was set to ‘‘1111’’
password you entered, you will see you can then change the parental when the vehicle left the factory.
the above display. Repeat the control level.
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password.
340
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:21:16 31SZA620_346
Features
To change the password, select Select the first digit by pressing the If the system does not recognize the
‘‘Password.’’ You will see the above , , , or button, password you entered, you will see
menu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ by and enter it by pressing the ENT the above display. Repeat the
pressing the or button, button. Repeat this until all four password setting steps until you
then press the ENT button. digits are entered. When you enter enter the correct password.
the fourth number, the cursor
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
ENT button, the display returns to display. Press the ENT button on the
the ‘‘Others’’ menu. control panel.
CONTINUED
341
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:21:25 31SZA620_347
Remote Control
RELEASE BUTTON
If you forget the password, select The display changes as shown above. The rear control panel can be
‘‘Password,’’ and press the ▲ button If you want to use the default detached from the ceiling unit and
10 times. password (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ and used as a remote control. To remove
press the ENT button. it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
The message ‘‘Default password swing down partway. Pivot it down
setting applied’’ is displayed for further past the detent until it
5 seconds. detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
342
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:21:33 31SZA620_348
Replacing the Remote Control An improperly disposed of battery As required by the FCC:
Batteries can hurt the environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the
Always confirm local regulations for FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
COVER battery disposal. following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
Features
operation.

If it takes several pushes on the This device complies with Industry

button to operate the rear Canada Standard RSS-210.
entertainment system, have your Operation is subject to the following two
dealer replace the batteries as soon conditions: (1) this device may not cause
as possible. interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
Battery type: BR3032 undesired operation of the device.
343
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:21:45 31SZA620_349
Playable DVDs The DVD player can also play discs Manufactured under license under
recorded in MP3/WMA formats and U.S. Patent ＃’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
DTS CDs. 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents
Those packages or jackets should issued & pending. DTS and DTS
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or Digital Surround are registered
‘‘ALL’’ region. DVD-ROMs cannot be trademarks and the DTS logos and
played in this system. Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights
This product incorporates copyright Reserved.
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other Reverse engineering or disassembly
intellectual property rights. is prohibited.
There are various types of DVDs Use of this copyright protection Protecting DVDs
available. Some of them are not technology must be authorized by The tips on how to handle and
compatible with your system. Macrovision, and is intended for protect DVDs are basically the same
home and other limited viewing uses as those for compact discs. Refer to
The DVD player in your rear only unless otherwise authorized by ‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page 285 .
entertainment system can play Macrovision.
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.
344
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:21:54 31SZA620_350
DVD Player Error Messages

The chart on the right explains the Error Message Cause Solution
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc. Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
CHECK DISC FOCUS Error Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
If you see an error message in the again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
display while playing a disc, press cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
the eject button. After ejecting the Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Features
disc, check it for damage or MECH ERROR Mechanical Error Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
deformation. If there is no damage, again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
insert the disc again. cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
The audio system will try to play the normal.
disc. If there is still a problem, the The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the
error message will reappear. Press REGION ERR Invalid region code disc, and insert a disc compatible with this
the eject button, and pull out the disc. system.
PARENTAL CHECK Invalid parental Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental
Insert a different disc. If the new control level control level (see page 339).
345
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:22:01 31SZA620_351
Wireless Headphones To use the headphones, pivot the

earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat, or the
rear door lining pockets.
VOLUME DIAL
Some state and local government The audio for the rear entertainment
agencies prohibit the use of system is sent to the wireless
headphones by the driver of a motor headphones that come with the
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws system. When using the headphones,
and regulations. make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. Wearing the
headphones backwards may affect
audio reception, limiting the sound
quality and range.
346
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:22:12 31SZA620_352
Replacing Batteries Auxiliary Input Jacks

COVER
Features
TAB BATTERY
Each headphone uses one AAA Remove the battery. Install the new Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
battery. The battery is under the battery in the earpiece as shown in connectors for the rear
cover on the left earpiece. To the diagram next to the battery slot. entertainment system are on the
remove the cover, insert a coin in the Slide the cover back into place on the back of the center console
slot and twist it slightly to pry the earpiece, then press down on the compartment.
cover away from the earpiece. Pull back edge to lock it in place.
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way. An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
CONTINUED
347
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:22:20 31SZA620_353
VOLUME DIALS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
The system will accept auxiliary There are three headphone

inputs from standard video games connectors for the third seat
and video equipment. passengers. Each connector has its
Some video game power supplies own volume control.
may cause poor picture quality.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
348
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:22:28 31SZA620_354
Security System
Except LX models The security system will not set if

The security system helps to protect the hood, the tailgate, the glass
your vehicle and valuables from theft. hatch, or any door is not fully closed.
The horn sounds and a combination If the system will not set, check that
of headlights, parking lights, side the doors, the tailgate and the hood
marker lights and taillights flashes if are fully closed.
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit. Do not attempt to alter this system
Features
This alarm continues for two or add other devices to it.
minutes, then the system resets. To
reset an activated system before the
two minutes have elapsed, unlock SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
the driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter. Once the security system is set,
The security system automatically opening any door, the tailgate, the
sets 15 seconds after you lock the glass hatch, or the hood without
doors, the hood, the tailgate, and the using the key or the remote
glass hatch. For the system to transmitter will cause the alarm to
activate, you must lock the doors, activate. It will also activate if the
the tailgate and the glass hatch from radio is removed from the dashboard
the outside with the key, driver’s or the wiring is cut.
lock tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
349
2011 Pilot
10/01/27 14:04:29 31SZA620_355
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) DECEL button on the steering
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTON
accelerator pedal. It should be used indicator on the instrument panel
for cruising on straight, open comes on to show the system is
highways. It is not recommended for now activated.
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise

CANCEL BUTTON SET/DECEL
control can lead to a crash. BUTTON
Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
when traveling on open steering wheel. The CRUISE
highways in good weather. MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
The cruise control system can be

left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
350
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:22:51 31SZA620_356
Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising
speed when you are going up and You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
down hills. If your vehicle speed speed in any of these ways:
increases going down a hill, use the NOTE: If you need to decrease your
brakes to slow down. This will cancel Press and hold the RES/ACCEL speed quickly, use the brakes as you
the cruise control. To resume the set button. When you reach the normally would.
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. desired cruising speed, release the
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator button. Press and hold the SET/DECEL
Features
on the instrument panel will come button. Release the button when
back on. Push on the accelerator pedal. you reach the desired speed.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/ To slow down in very small
DECEL button. amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
To increase the speed in very your vehicle will slow down about
small amounts, tap the RES/ 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up Tap the brake pedal lightly with
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
CONTINUED
351
2011 Pilot
10/01/27 14:04:40 31SZA620_357
Cruise Control
Even with cruise control turned on, Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
you can still use the accelerator When you push the CANCEL button
pedal to speed up for passing. After CRUISE BUTTON or tap the brake pedal, the system
completing the pass, take your foot remembers the previously set speed.
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle To return to that speed, accelerate to
will return to the set cruising speed. above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
causes cruise control to cancel. comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
the same speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns

CANCEL BUTTON the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel.
352
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:23:16 31SZA620_358
Compass
On vehicles without navigation system Compass Calibration

Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
Features
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets. COMPASS COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS
If the compass display is blinking

and the CAL indicator is shown, the The compass may need to be 2. On EX and EX-L models
compass is self-calibrating. manually calibrated after exposure to Press and hold the MENU button
a strong magnetic field. If the for about 5 seconds until you hear
compass seems to be continually a beep. The display shows you the
showing the wrong direction and is compass setting menu items.
not self-calibrating, or the compass On LX models
display is blinking with the CAL Press and hold the RPT button
indicator on, do the following. and TUNE/SOUND knob for
about 2 seconds until you hear a
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON beep. The display shows you the
(II) position. compass setting menu items.
CONTINUED
353
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:23:26 31SZA620_359
Compass
5. Press the selector or TUNE/

SOUND knob. The compass
display is blinking and the CAL
indicator is shown.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in two

complete circles.
When the calibration is successfully

completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
The audio system is not related to

3. Turn the selector or TUNE/ 4. Press the selector or TUNE/ the compass system. Even if the
SOUND knob to select SOUND knob to enter your compass system is calibrating, the
‘‘CALIBRATION.’’ selection. The display shows you display returns to the normal display
‘‘PUSH CAL START.’’ which you last selected.
While setting the compass, NOTE: Do this procedure in an open

pressing the RETURN button (on area, away from buildings, power
EX and EX-L models) will go back lines, and other vehicles.
to the previous display. Pressing
the MENU button will cancel the
compass setting mode.
354
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:23:40 31SZA620_360
Compass
Compass Zone Selection

In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
Features
(II) position.
ZONE NUMBER
2. On EX and EX-L models
Press and hold the MENU button
for about 5 seconds until you hear 3. Turn the selector or TUNE/ If necessary, press the RETURN
a beep. The display shows you the SOUND knob to select ‘‘ZONE.’’ button (on EX and EX-L models)
compass setting menu items. Press the selector knob to enter to return to the previous display.
your selection. The display shows Pressing the MENU button will
On LX models you the currently selected zone cancel the compass setting mode.
Press and hold the RPT button number.
and TUNE/SOUND knob for 5. Once the correct zone is displayed,
about 2 seconds until you hear a 4. Find the zone for your area on the press the selector or TUNE/
beep. The display shows you the map (see page 356 ). If the correct SOUND knob. The display then
compass setting menu items. zone is not shown, turn the returns to normal.
selector or TUNE/SOUND knob
to cycle the zone lists up or down.
CONTINUED
355
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:23:44 31SZA620_361
Compass
The audio system is not related to Zone Map

the compass system. Even if the
compass system is in the zone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.
356
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:23:50 31SZA620_362
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Except LX models General Safety Information Do not use HomeLink with any
The HomeLink Universal Before programming your garage door opener that lacks safety
Transceiver built into your vehicle HomeLink to operate a garage door stop and reverse features.
can be programmed to operate up to opener, confirm that the opener has
three remote controlled devices an external entrapment protection
around your home, such as garage system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
doors, lighting, or home security or other safety and reverse stop
systems. features.
Features
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
CONTINUED
357
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:24:01 31SZA620_363
Units manufactured between April 1, Important Safety Precautions Training HomeLink

1982 and January 1, 1993 may be Refer to the safety information that Before you begin − If you just
equipped with safety stop and came with your garage door opener received your vehicle and have not
reverse features. If your unit does to test that the safety features are trained any of the buttons in
not have an external entrapment functioning properly. If you do not HomeLink before, you should erase
protection system, an easy test to have this information, contact the any previously learned codes before
confirm the function and manufacturer of the equipment. training the first button.
performance of the safety stop and Before programming HomeLink to a To do this, press and hold the two
reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4 garage door or gate opener, make outside buttons on the HomeLink
under the closing door. The door sure that people and objects are out transceiver for about 20 seconds,
should stop and reverse upon of the way of the device to prevent until the red indicator flashes.
contacting the piece of wood. potential injury or damage. Release the buttons, then proceed to
As an additional safety feature, When programming a garage door step 1.
garage door openers manufactured opener, park just outside the garage.
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
358
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:24:19 31SZA620_364
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Features
CONTINUED
359
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:24:25 31SZA620_365
HomeLink is a registered As required by the FCC:

trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
operation.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
360
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:24:36 31SZA620_366
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
On models with navigation system To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth- Using HFL
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) compatible cell phone. For a list of HFL Buttons
allows you to place and receive compatible phones, pairing
phone calls using voice commands, procedures, and special feature HFL TALK BUTTON
without handling your cell phone. capabilities:
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.

com or call (888) 528-7876.
Features
In Canada, visit www.honda.ca, or call
(888) 9-HONDA-9. NAVI VOICE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
HFL BACK BUTTON
HFL Talk button − Press and

release to give a command or answer
a call.
HFL Back button − Press and

release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.
CONTINUED
361
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:24:45 31SZA620_367
Voice Control Tips Press and release the HFL Talk Many commands can be spoken
button each time you want to together. For example, you can
make a command. After the beep, say ‘‘Call 123-456-＃＃＃＃’’ or
speak in a clear, natural tone. ‘‘Dial Peter.’’
Try to reduce all background When HFL is in use, navigation

noise. If the microphone picks up voice commands cannot be
voices other than yours, recognized.
commands may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
MICROPHONE controls.
Air or wind noise from the

dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
362
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:24:56 31SZA620_368
Help Features Information Display Some phones may send battery,

To hear general HFL information, As an incoming call notification, you signal strength, and roaming status
including help on pairing a phone will see the following display: information to HFL.
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’ ROAM STATUS BATTERY LEVEL
STATUS
For help at any time, including a HFL MODE
list of available commands, say
Features
‘‘Hands free help.’’
SIGNAL STRENGTH PHONE DIALING
The Bluetooth icon will also

appear on the center display when a
phone is linked.
CONTINUED
363
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:25:01 31SZA620_369
When there is an incoming call, or

HFL is in use, ‘‘HANDS FREE
LINK’’ will appear on the center
display.
A notification that there is an

incoming call, or HFL is in use, will
appear on the navigation screen
when the audio system is on.
364
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:25:07 31SZA620_370
How to Use HFL

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
‘‘Pair’’ Pair a phone to the system (See page 368)
‘‘Edit’’ Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 369)
Features
‘‘Phone Setup’’ ‘‘Delete’’ Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 369)
‘‘List’’ Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 369)
Press HFL Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
‘‘Status’’ (See page 370)
Talk button
‘‘Next Phone’’ Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 370)
‘‘Set Pairing Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number

Code’’ (See page 370)
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’ ‘‘123-456-＃＃＃＃’’ Enter desired phone number (See page 371)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
‘‘Jim Smith’’ (See page 371)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
CONTINUED
365
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:25:15 31SZA620_371
‘‘Redial’’ Redial the last number called (See page 372)
‘‘Transfer’’ Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 374)
‘‘Mute’’ Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 374)
‘‘Send’’ Send numbers or names during a call (See page 374)
Press HFL
Talk button ‘‘Store’’ Store a phonebook entry (See page 375)
‘‘Edit’’ Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 375)
‘‘Phonebook’’ ‘‘Delete’’ Delete a phonebook entry (See page 376)
‘‘Receive If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
Contact’’ your phone to HFL (See page 376)
‘‘List’’ Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 376)
366
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:25:22 31SZA620_372
‘‘Security’’ Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 381)
‘‘Change Passcode’’ Change your security passcode (See page 382)
Features
‘‘System Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
Set up’’ ‘‘Call Notification’’
(See page 382)
‘‘Auto Transfer’’ Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle (See page 382)
Press HFL
Talk button ‘‘Clear’’ Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode (See page 383)
‘‘Change Language’’ Change language from English to French (See page 384)＊
‘‘Tutorial’’ Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 363)
‘‘Hands Free Help’’ Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 363)
＊ : Canadian models
CONTINUED
367
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:25:36 31SZA620_373
To use HFL, you need to pair your Phone Setup To pair a cell phone:
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to This command group is available for 1. Press and release the HFL Talk
the system. paired cell phones. button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
Phone pairing tips you information about the pairing
You cannot pair your phone while process. If it is not the first phone
the vehicle is moving. you are pairing, say ‘‘Phone
setup’’ and say ‘‘Pair.’’
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to 2. Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone’s manual. your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
Up to six phones can be paired. pairing code and begin searching
for your phone.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL. 3. When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
If after three minutes your phone the options and enter the 4-digit
is not ready to pair or a phone is code from the previous step.
not found, the system will time out
and return to idle. 4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.
368
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:25:51 31SZA620_374
To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone: To hear the names of all paired
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk phones:
button before a command. button before a command. Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
Features
3. If there is more than one phone 3. HFL will ask you which phone you
paired to the system, HFL will ask want to delete. Follow the HFL 3. HFL will read out all the paired
you which phone’s name you want prompts to continue with the phone’s names.
to change. Follow the HFL deletion.
prompts and rename the phone.
CONTINUED
369
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:26:07 31SZA620_375
To hear which paired phone is To change from the currently linked To change the pairing code setting:
currently linked: phone to another paired phone: Press and release the HFL Talk
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
button before a command. button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Set pairing code’’ after the
2. Say ‘‘Status’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘Next phone’’ after the prompts.
prompts.
3. HFL will tell you which phone is 3. If you want HFL to create a
linked to the system. 3. HFL disconnects the linked phone random code each time you pair a
and searches for another paired phone, say ‘‘Random.’’ If you want
phone. to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘Fixed’’
4. Once another phone is found, it is and follow the HFL prompts.
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or

paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
370
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:26:21 31SZA620_376
Making a Call To make a call using a phone To make a call using a name in the
You can make calls using any phone number: HFL phonebook:
number or a name in the HFL Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk
phonebook. You can also redial the button before a command. button before a command.
last number called.
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between 2. Follow the HFL prompts and say 2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
Features
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 the phone number you want to dial. the name stored in the HFL
meters). phonebook that you want to call.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
During a call, HFL allows you to talk confirm the number and say 3. Follow the HFL prompts to
up to 30 minutes after you remove ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ confirm the name and make the
the key from the ignition switch. call.
However, this may weaken the Once connected, you will hear the
vehicle’s battery. person you called through the audio
speakers.
CONTINUED
371
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:26:32 31SZA620_377
To redial the last number called by To make a call from an imported

HFL: phonebook:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Redial.’’
1. Press the INFO button, then select 3. Select a phonebook you want to
‘‘Cellular Phonebook .’’ choose a phone number from.
2. Select ‘‘Search Imported If the phonebook you select is PIN-

Phonebook .’’ protected, you will need to enter the
PIN to access it. See page 379 for
more information.
372
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:26:46 31SZA620_378
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, an incoming
call notification (if activated) will
play and interrupt the audio system
if it is on.
Press the HFL Talk button to answer

the call, or the HFL Back button to
Features
hang up.
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFL Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To search for a specific name in the 4. Select the name. All the phone
phonebook, enter the keyword for numbers stored for that name will To return to the original call, press
either the first or last name. be listed. the HFL Talk button again. If you
5. Select the phone number, and don’t want to answer the incoming
To display all names in the HFL begins dialing. call, disregard it and continue with
phonebook, select the ‘‘List ’’ option. your original call. If you want to hang
If you choose ‘‘Store in up the original call and answer the
HandsFreeLink,’’ the phone new call, press the HFL Back button.
number will be stored in HFL, so
that you can call it using HFL’s name
tag by voice.
373
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:27:00 31SZA620_379
Transferring a Call Muting a Call Send Numbers or Names During

You can transfer a call from HFL to You can mute your voice to the a Call
your phone, or from your phone to person you are talking to during a HFL allows you to send numbers or
HFL. call. names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
Press and release the HFL Talk To mute your voice during a call, system.
button and say ‘‘Transfer.’’ press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Mute.’’ To send a name or number during a
call:
To unmute your voice, press and Press and release the HFL Talk
release the HFL Talk button and say button before a command.
‘‘Mute’’ again.
1. Say ‘‘Send.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say

the name or number you want to
send.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to send

the tones and continue the call.
NOTE: To send a pound (＃), say

‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
374
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:27:20 31SZA620_380
Phonebook NOTE: To edit the number stored in a name:

You can store up to 50 names with Avoid using duplicate name Press and release the HFL Talk
their associated numbers in HFL. entries. button before a command.
The numbers you store can be not
only phone numbers but other types, Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name 1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
such as account numbers or entry.
passwords, which can be sent during 2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.
a menu-driven call. It is easier for HFL to recognize a
Features
multisyllabic or longer name. For 3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
To store a phonebook entry: example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of the name entry you want to edit.
Press and release the HFL Talk ‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
button before a command. ‘‘John.’’ 4. When asked, say the new number
for that name.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
2. Say ‘‘Store’’ after the prompts. complete the edit.
3. Say a name you want to list as your

phonebook entry.
4. Say the number you want to store

for the name entry.

‘‘Enter’’ to store the entry.
CONTINUED
375
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:27:38 31SZA620_381
To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk from your cell phone directly to the
button before a command. button before a command. HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’ Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
3. Say the name you want to delete 3. HFL begins reading the names in
and follow the HFL prompts to the order they were stored. 2. Say ‘‘Receive contact ’’ after the
complete the deletion. prompts.
4. If you hear a name you want to call,
immediately press the HFL Talk 3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a
button and say ‘‘Call.’’ number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and

name the number, or say
‘‘Discard’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
5. Follow the HFL prompts if you

want to store another number.
376
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:27:54 31SZA620_382
Cellular Phonebook Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:

(available on some phones) The entire phonebook data of the Once a phonebook has been
cell phone that is linked to HFL can imported, you can search the phone
If you select Cellular Phonebook be imported to the navigation system. numbers by the person’s name.
from the Information screen menu,
you will see four HFL options. IMPORTED PHONEBOOK PIN ICON
For a list of cell phones that are
Features
compatible with this feature:
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.

com or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.honda.ca, or call

(888) 9-HONDA-9.
IMPORTED DATE
Select ‘‘Import Cellular Select ‘‘Search Imported

Phonebook ,’’ and HFL will begin Phonebook ,’’ and a list of imported
importing the phonebook. Select phonebooks will be displayed.
‘‘OK ’’ after the import is completed.
Select a phonebook from the list.
CONTINUED
377
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:28:10 31SZA620_383
Select a person from the list. Up to

three category icons are displayed in
the left side of the list:
Preference Fax
Home Car
Mobile Voice
Work Other
If the phonebook is PIN-protected, To search for a specific name in the
you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN. phonebook, enter the keyword for
Pager
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the These indicate how many numbers

phonebook, select the ‘‘List ’’ option. are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
Select the person’s number you want

to call, and press the HFL Talk
button.
378
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:28:24 31SZA620_384
Delete Imported Phonebook: After making a selection, the PIN Number

You can delete any imported following screen will appear. You can add, change, or remove a
phonebook. PIN number from any phonebook.
Select ‘‘Delete Imported

Phonebook ,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Features
Select a phonebook you want to
delete. If the phonebook is PIN-
protected, you will need to enter the
4-digit PIN number.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ then ‘‘OK ’’ to complete

the deletion. To add a PIN:
If you have selected a phonebook
without a PIN, you will see the above
display.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You will

have to re-enter the PIN for
confirmation.
CONTINUED
379
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:28:32 31SZA620_385
To change the PIN to a new number: To remove a PIN:

Select ‘‘PIN number,’’ then select
‘‘Do not use PIN’’ after you enter
the current PIN.
Select the phonebook you want. The The display will change as shown
display will change as shown above. above.
Enter the current PIN for this Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
phonebook. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN
for verification.
380
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:28:43 31SZA620_386
System Setup To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the NOTE: Once a passcode is set, you
This command group allows you to HFL system for security purposes: will need to enter it to use HFL each
change or customize HFL basic Press and release the HFL Talk time you start the vehicle. If you
settings. button before a command. forget the code, your dealer will have
to reset it for you, or you will have to
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ clear the entire system (see page
383 ).
2. Say ‘‘Security’’ after the prompts.
Features
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.

confirm the number.
CONTINUED
381
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:29:00 31SZA620_387
To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or a To activate or deactivate the auto
Press and release the HFL Talk prompt as the incoming call transfer function:
button before a command. notification＊: If you get into the vehicle while you
Press and release the HFL Talk are on the phone, the call can be
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ button before a command. automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
2. Say ‘‘Change passcode’’ after the 1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Call notification’’ after the Press and release the HFL Talk
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say prompts. button before a command.
the new 4-digit passcode.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say 1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
4. Follow the HFL prompts to ‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt .’’ You
confirm the number. can also say ‘‘Off ’’ for no audible 2. Say ‘‘Auto transfer’’ after the
incoming call notification. prompts.
＊ : The default setting is a ring tone. 3. HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.
382
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:29:13 31SZA620_388
To clear the system: You can also clear the system when Quick Language Selection
This operation clears the passcodes, you have forgotten the passcode and Canadian models only
paired phones, all names in the HFL cannot access HFL. When HFL asks To quickly change the language:
phonebook, and all imported you for the passcode, say ‘‘System Press and release the HFL Talk
phonebook data. clear.’’ Paired phones, all names in button before a command.
the HFL phonebook and all imported
Press and release the HFL Talk phonebook data will be lost. 1. Say the language you want to
button before a command. change to in that language.
Features
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ 2. Follow the HFL prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Clear’’ after the prompts.

continue to complete the clearing
procedure.
383
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:29:23 31SZA620_389
Change Language If you have not named your paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Canadian models only phone in the language you just The Bluetooth name and logos are
To change the system language selected, HFL will ask you to name it registered trademarks owned by
between English and French: in the current language. Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
Press and release the HFL Talk such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
button before a command. When French is your currently Ltd. is under license. Other
selected language, you can give voice trademarks and trade names are
1. Say ‘‘Change language.’’ commands in French. those of their respective owners.

change the language to English or
French.
384
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:29:28 31SZA620_390
As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
Features
operation.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
385
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:29:35 31SZA620_391
Parking Sensor System
On Touring models The system has two front corner

Your vehicle has a parking sensor sensors, two rear corner sensors,
system. The system lets you know and two rear center sensors.
the approximate distance between The rear center sensors work when
your vehicle and most obstacles the shift lever is in reverse (R).
while you are parking. When the
system is on and your vehicle is The corner sensors do not work
nearing an obstacle, you will hear a when the shift lever is in drive (D),
beeper and see system messages on and the vehicle speed is more than 5
the multi-information display. mph (8 km/h).
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM SWITCH
To activate the system, push the

switch on the dashboard with the
ignition in the ON (II) position. The
indicator in the switch comes on
when the system is on. To turn the
system off, push the switch again.
All obstacles may not always be

sensed. Even when the system is on,
you should look for obstacles near
your vehicle to make sure it is safe to
park.
386
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:29:48 31SZA620_392
Multi-Information Display Corner Sensor Operation

Messages and Beeper Operation Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle
About 18-24 in About 14-18 in About 14 in

(45-60 cm) (35-45 cm) (35 cm) or less
Distance
Features
Upper left Upper left Upper left
indicator stays on indicator stays on indicator stays on
When you turn the system on, all
indicators will appear on the multi-
Indicator
information display, and a beeper
sounds once.
When the system senses an obstacle,

the appropriate indicator comes on,
and a beeper sounds as shown in the Continuous
Beeper Short beeps Very short beeps
following tables. beep
CONTINUED
387
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:29:57 31SZA620_393
Rear Center Sensor Operation
About 24-40 in About 18-24 in About 14-18 in About 14 in

(60-100 cm) (45-60 cm) (35-45 cm) (35 cm) or less
Distance
Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom

indicator stays on indicator stays on indicator stays on indicator stays on
Indicator
Continuous
Beeper Long beeps Short beeps Very short beeps
beeps
388
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:30:11 31SZA620_394
Features
Within about 24 in (60 cm) Within about 40 in (100 cm)
If the system develops a problem, The range of the corner sensors and The system may not function
you will see a ‘‘CHECK PARKING the rear center sensors are limited. properly under these conditions:
SENSOR SYSTEM’’ message on the Each corner sensor is capable of
multi-information display, and a sensing an obstacle only when your The sensors are covered with
beeper sounds continuously. Very vehicle is 24 in (60 cm) or closer. snow, ice, mud, etc.
often, a sensor covered with mud, ice, The rear center sensor senses an
snow, etc. is the cause of this obstacle that is behind your vehicle When the vehicle is on a rough
message. Check the sensors first. If 40 in (100 cm) or closer. road, on grass, or on a hill.
the message stays on or the beeper
does not stop, have the system Do not put any accessories on or After the vehicle has been sitting
checked by your dealer. around the sensors. out in hot or cold weather.
CONTINUED
389
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:30:23 31SZA620_395
Parking Sensor System, Rearview Camera and Monitor
When the system is affected by Rearview Camera and Monitor For the best picture, always keep the
some electrical equipment or On EX-L and Touring models rearview camera clean, and do not
devices generating an ultrasonic cover the camera lens. To avoid
wave. scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
When operating the vehicle in bad
weather. Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
The system may not sense thin or back up slowly and carefully, and
low objects, or sonic-absorptive look behind you for obstacles.
materials such as snow, cotton, or
sponge.
The system cannot sense objects
directly under the bumper.
Canadian Owners: Whenever you shift to reverse (R)

This device complies with Industry with the ignition switch in the ON
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is (II) position, the rear view is shown
subject to the following two conditions: on the navigation system screen. On
(1) this device may not cause vehicles without a navigation system,
interference, and (2) this device must the rear view is shown on the left
accept any interference that may cause side of the inside mirror.
This ISM device complies with Canadian

ICES-001.
390
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:30:32 31SZA620_396
Rearview Camera and Monitor
On vehicles with navigation system On EX-L models without navigation Monitor brightness is adjusted
When in reverse, the navigation system automatically by sensors. If you use
buttons are locked out, except the the monitor continuously at high
interface dial on the dashboard. Turn REARVIEW MONITOR temperature, the monitor will
the knob clockwise to make the gradually dim.
camera image brighter, and counter-
clockwise to darken the image. The inside mirror will be hot when
you use the monitor for an extended
Features
period of time.
SENSOR If a bright light (such as sunlight) is

shining on the inside mirror, the
SENSOR image may be difficult to see.
MONITOR OFF BUTTON
You can turn the monitor on and off

by pressing the monitor off button
when the shift lever is in reverse.
The monitor turns on everytime you
shift to reverse, even if you turned it
off the last time.
391
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:30:35 31SZA620_397
392
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:30:39 31SZA620_398
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 394

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 394
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 395
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 395
need to know how to properly store Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 396
luggage or packages. The Opening and Closing the
information in this section will help Hood ........................................ 397
you. If you plan to add any Oil Check .................................... 398
accessories to your vehicle, please Engine Coolant Check .............. 398
read the information in this section Fuel Economy ................................ 399
Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 402
Carrying Cargo .............................. 404
393
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:30:55 31SZA620_399
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Some gasoline today is blended with

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate oxygenates such as ethanol or
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use operate on oxygenated gasoline
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause containing up to 10% ethanol by
During this period: a persistent, heavy metallic rapping volume and up to 15% MTBE by
noise that can lead to engine damage. volume. Do not use gasoline
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid containing methanol.
acceleration. We recommend quality gasolines
containing detergent additives that If you notice any undesirable
Avoid hard braking for the first help prevent fuel system and engine operating symptoms, try another
200 miles (300 km). deposits. service station or switch to another
In addition, in order to maintain good brand of gasoline.
Do not change the oil until the performance, fuel economy, and
scheduled maintenance time. emissions control, we strongly Premium fuel is recommended when
recommend, in areas where it is towing in certain conditions (see
Do not tow a trailer. available, the use of gasoline that page 446 ).
does NOT contain manganese-based
You should also follow these fuel additives such as MMT. For further important fuel-related
recommendations with an information for your vehicle, or
overhauled or exchanged engine, or Use of gasoline with these additives information on gasoline that does not
when the brakes are replaced. may adversely affect performance, contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
and cause the malfunction indicator owners.honda.com. In Canada, visit
lamp on your instrument panel to www.honda.ca for additional
come on. If this happens, contact information on gasoline.
your dealer for service.
394
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:31:07 31SZA620_400
Service Station Procedures
Refueling If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

even though the tank is not full,
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE FUEL FILL CAP there may be a problem with your
TETHER
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery system.
The system helps keep fuel vapor
from going into the atmosphere. Try
filling at another pump. If this does
not fix the problem, consult your
dealer.
Before Driving
HOLDER Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
1. Park with the driver’s side closest 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. burned or seriously injured
to the service station pump. You may hear a hissing sound as when handling fuel.
pressure inside the tank equalizes.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling Place the cap in the holder on the Stop the engine, and keep
on the handle located under the fuel fill door. heat, sparks, and flame away.
lower left corner of the dashboard. Handle fuel only outdoors.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel Wipe up spills immediately.
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes. CONTINUED
395
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:31:19 31SZA620_401
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Tighten Fuel Cap Message normal driving once you tighten or
until it clicks at least once. On vehicles with navigation system replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
another message, press the INFO
On vehicles without navigation button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
system message will appear each time you
If you do not properly tighten the restart the engine until the system
cap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL turns the message off.
CAP’’ message on the information
display (see page 86 ). If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
On vehicles with navigation system system, the malfunction indicator
If you do not properly tighten the lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN cap was not already tightened, turn
FUEL CAP’’ message on the multi- the engine off, and check or
information display. retighten the fuel fill cap until it
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic clicks at least once. The MIL should
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until system will detect a loose or missing go off after several days of normal
it latches. fuel fill cap as an evaporative system driving once the cap is tightened or
leak. The first time a leak is detected replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message have your vehicle inspected by a
appears on the multi-information dealer. For more information, see
display. Turn the engine off, and page 522 .
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
396
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:31:31 31SZA620_402
Opening and Closing the Hood

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE SUPPORT ROD
GRIP
Before Driving
LATCH CLIP
1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front 3. Holding the grip, pull the support
parking brake. Pull the hood edge of the hood near the center. rod out of its clip. Insert the end
release handle located under the Slide your hand to your left until into the designated hole in the
lower left corner of the dashboard. you feel the hood latch handle. hood.
The hood will pop up slightly. Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift up the hood. To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, hole. Put the support rod back into
or if you can open the hood without its holding clip. Lower the hood to
lifting the handle, the mechanism about a foot (30 cm) above the
should be cleaned and lubricated. fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
397
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:31:44 31SZA620_403
Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

DIPSTICK RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MIN MAX
Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and Look at the coolant level in the
engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 475 for
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower mark, information on adding the proper
cloth or paper towel. see Adding Engine Oil on page 472 . coolant.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
into its hole. Checks on page 467 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
398
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:31:55 31SZA620_404
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison. City MPG Highway MPG
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments. Combined Fuel Estimated Annual
Economy Fuel Cost
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA achieved is also provided. per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
estimates include: data) divided by the combined fuel
Combined Fuel Economy − economy.
City MPG − Represents urban Represents a combination of city and
driving in light traffic. A range of highway driving. The scale For more information on fuel
miles per gallon achieved is also represents the range of combined economy ratings and factors that
provided. fuel economy for other vehicles in affect fuel economy, visit www.
the class. fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
Highway MPG − Represents a vehicles.gc.ca)
mixture of rural and interstate Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, Provides an estimated annual fuel
typical of longer trips in free-flowing cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
traffic. A range of miles per gallon km) per year multiplied by the cost
399
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:32:12 31SZA620_405
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity Observe the speed limit −
The following factors can lower your motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
vehicle’s fuel economy: Certification Seal (see page on fuel economy at speeds above
Aggressive driving (hard 472). 45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
acceleration and braking) Maintain proper tire inflation speed and you reduce the drag.
Excessive idling, accelerating and − An underinflated tire increases Trailers, car top carriers, roof
braking in stop-and-go traffic ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces racks and bike racks are also big
Cold engine operation (engines fuel economy. contributors to increased drag.
are more efficient when warmed Avoid carrying excess weight in Avoid excessive idling − Idling
up) your vehicle − It puts a heavier results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
Driving with a heavy load or the load on the engine, increasing fuel per liter).
air conditioner running consumption.
Improperly inflated tires Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
Improving Fuel Economy mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Vehicle Maintenance Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
A properly maintained vehicle economy.
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce Drive Efficiently
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance Drive moderately − Rapid
messages displayed on the acceleration, abrupt cornering,
information display (see Owner’s and hard braking increase fuel
Maintenance Checks on page 467 ). consumption.
For example:
400
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:32:24 31SZA620_406
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air Checking Your Fuel Economy

conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible. Gallons of Miles per
Plan and combine trips − Miles driven fuel Gallon
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Before Driving
100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy. 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 2) Reset trip counter to zero.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
accurate measures of fuel economy. 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
401
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:32:36 31SZA620_407
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
modifications or add any accessories, modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
be sure to read the following vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 524 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding proper operation of your vehicle.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular windows. Accessories installed in
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and these areas may interfere with
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should proper operation of the side
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s curtain airbags.
handling, stability, and reliability. computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and Before installing any electronic
tire pressure monitoring system. accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
402
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:32:47 31SZA620_408
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Non-Honda wheels, because they

Removing parts from your vehicle, are a universal design, can cause
or replacing components with excessive stress on suspension
non-Honda components could components and will not be
seriously affect your vehicle’s compatible with the tire pressure
handling, stability, and reliability. monitoring system (TPMS).
Some examples are: Larger or smaller wheels and tires

Lowering your vehicle with a can interfere with the operation of
non-Honda suspension kit that your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
Before Driving
significantly reduces ground other systems.
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps Modifying your steering wheel or
or other raised objects, which any other part of your vehicle’s
could cause the airbags to deploy. safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can If you plan to modify your vehicle,
affect the handling, stability, and consult your dealer.
reliability.
403
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:32:57 31SZA620_409
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT storage areas:
GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKETS Glove box

Door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
Console compartment
Storage compartment
Roof-rack (if equipped)
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
CARGO AREA/UNDER
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS FLOOR STORAGE WELL
404
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:33:11 31SZA620_410
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (4)The resulting figure equals the

The maximum load for your vehicle available amount of cargo and
is 1,320 lbs (600 kg). Overloading or improper luggage load capacity. For
loading can affect handling and example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
See Tire And Loading Information stability and cause a crash in equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
label attached to the driver’s which you can be hurt or killed. five 150 lb. passengers in your
doorjamb. vehicle, the amount of available
Follow all load limits and other cargo and luggage load capacity is
Label Example loading guidelines in this 650 lbs.
manual. (1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
Before Driving
Steps for Determining Correct Load (5)Determine the combined weight
Limit − of luggage and cargo being loaded
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The on the vehicle. That weight may
combined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
cargo should never exceed XXX cargo and luggage load capacity
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s calculated in Step 4.
This figure includes the total weight placard.
of all occupants, cargo, and (6)If your vehicle will be towing a
accessories, and the tongue load if (2)Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
you are towing a trailer. of the driver and passengers that be transferred to your vehicle.
will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
(3)Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
the driver and passengers from your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs. CONTINUED
405
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:33:26 31SZA620_411
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Example 1
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
Max Load (1,320 lbs) (150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs) (1,020 lbs) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
(600 kg) (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) (464 kg) are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Example 2
Max Load (1,320 lbs) (150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs) (720 lbs)
(600 kg) (68 kg x 4 = 272 kg) (328 kg)
Example 3
Max Load (1,320 lbs) (150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs) (570 lbs)
(600 kg) (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) (260 kg)
406
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:33:36 31SZA620_412
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area If you carry large items that
Compartment or on a Roof Rack prevent you from closing the
Store or secure all items that could Distribute cargo evenly on the tailgate or the glass hatch, exhaust
be thrown around and hurt floor of the cargo area, placing the gas can enter the passenger area.
someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and To avoid the possibility of carbon
as far forward as possible. Tie monoxide poisoning, follow the
Be sure items placed on the floor down items that could be thrown instructions on page 61 .
behind the front seats cannot roll about the vehicle during a crash or
underneath and interfere with the sudden stop. If you carry any items on a roof
proper operation of the seats, the rack, be sure the total weight of
Before Driving
sensors under the seats, or the If you fold down the second or the rack and the items does not
driver’s ability to operate the third row seats, tie down items exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
pedals. that could be thrown about the
vehicle during a crash or sudden If you use an accessory roof rack,
Keep all cargo below the bottom stop. the roof rack weight limit may be
of the windows. If it is higher, it lower. Refer to the information
could interfere with the proper that came with your roof rack.
operation of the side curtain
airbags.
Keep the glove box closed while

driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
407
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:33:46 31SZA620_413
Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net Cargo Hooks

The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items GROCERY HOOK
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be tied down, as the net
may not prevent them from being
thrown about the vehicle in a crash
or a sudden stop.
Optional Cargo Cover

The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area behind the third CARGO
row seats. When the third row seats HOOKS
are folded down, the cargo cover can
be extended over the larger area. Do The four hooks on the side panels Your vehicle also has grocery
not install the cover over the larger can be used to install a net for hook(s) on the side panels and on
area if the third row seats are not securing items. Each hook is the back of the third row seats in the
folded down. designed to hold up to 56.2 lbs (25.5 cargo area.
kg) of weight. They are designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
the hook.
408
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:33:51 31SZA620_414
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ......................... 410

starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ......................... 410
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine........................ 411
automatic transmission. It also Check Starter System
includes important information on Message .................................. 412
parking your vehicle, the braking Automatic Transmission............... 413
system, the Variable Torque VTM-4 System ............................. 418
Management 4-wheel drive Parking ............................................ 419
(VTM-4 ) system, the vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring System
stability assist (VSA ), aka (TPMS) ....................................... 420
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Braking System.............................. 428
system, the tire pressure monitoring Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 429
Driving
system (TPMS), and facts you need Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
if you are planning to tow a trailer or aka Electronic Stability
drive off-highway. Control (ESC), System ......... 431
Towing a Trailer ............................ 434
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 449
409
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:34:09 31SZA620_415
Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive
Driving Guidelines Do not modify your vehicle in any Preparing to Drive

Your vehicle has higher ground way that would raise the center of You should do the following checks
clearance that allows you to travel gravity. and adjustments before you drive
over bumps, obstacles, and rough your vehicle.
terrain. It also provides good Do not carry heavy cargo on the
visibility so you can anticipate roof. 1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
problems earlier. and outside lights are clean and
4WD models only unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
Because your vehicle rides higher Your vehicle is equipped with a four- or ice.
off the ground, it has a high center wheel drive (4WD) system. When
of gravity that can cause it to roll the system senses a loss of front- 2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility wheel traction, it automatically
vehicles have a significantly higher transfers some power to the rear 3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
roll over rate than other types of wheels. This gives you better looks low, use a gauge to check its
vehicles. traction and mobility. pressure.
To prevent rollovers or loss of You still need to exercise the same 4. Check that any items you may be
control: care when accelerating, steering, and carrying are stored properly or
braking that you would in a two- fastened down securely.
Take corners at slower speeds wheel drive vehicle.
than you would with a passenger 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
vehicle. See page 449 for off-highway driving page 154 ).
guidelines.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
410
2011 Pilot
10/01/28 14:48:16 31SZA620_416
Preparing to Drive, Starting the Engine
6. Check the adjustment of the Starting the Engine starter motor runs for about 6 to 9
inside and outside mirrors (see Your vehicle’s starter system has an seconds until the engine starts.
page 170 ). auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START If you hold the ignition switch in
7. Check the steering wheel (III) position, this feature keeps the the START (III) position for more
adjustment (see page 133 ). engine’s starter motor running until than 7 seconds, the starter motor,
the engine starts. Follow these depending on the outside
8. Make sure the doors, the tailgate, instructions to start the engine: temperature, runs for about 10 to
and the glass hatch are securely 25 seconds until the engine starts.
closed and locked. 1. Apply the parking brake.
If the engine does not start, wait at
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that 2. In cold weather, turn off all least 10 seconds before trying
Driving
your passengers have fastened electrical accessories to reduce again.
their seat belts (see page 17 ). the drain on the battery.
10.When you start the engine, check 3. Make sure the shift lever is in
the gauges and indicators in the Park. Press on the brake pedal. The immobilizer system protects your
instrument panel, and the vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
messages on the information 4. Without touching the accelerator coded key (or other device) is used, the
display or multi-information pedal, turn the ignition switch to engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
display (depending on models) the START (III) position, then more inf ormation, see page 135 .
(see pages 67 , 68 , 82 , and release the ignition switch. You do
94 ). not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the CONTINUED
411
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:34:34 31SZA620_417
Starting the Engine
Check Starter System Message If this message is on, the ignition

On vehicles with navigation system switch has to be held in the
The engine is harder to start in cold START (III) position manually
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at U.S. until the engine starts. The
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 ignition switch can be held in that
meters) adds to this problem. position up to 15 seconds.
Even though you may be able to

Canada start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starter
system, have your dealer inspect
your vehicle.
If there is a problem with the starter

system, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
STARTER SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON (II) position. You will also see
this message when the auto control
mode of the starter system has a
problem.
412
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:34:46 31SZA620_418
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators If the malfunction indicator lamp Shifting

comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
Driving
U.S. model is shown. TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
These indicators on the instrument 96 ). To shift from any position, press
panel show which position the shift firmly on the brake pedal and the
lever is in. release button on the side of the
shift lever. You cannot shift out of
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a Park when the ignition switch is in
few seconds when you turn the the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
CONTINUED
413
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:34:54 31SZA620_419
To shift from: Do this: If you have done all of the above and Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
P to R Press the brake pedal and the still cannot move the lever out of need to restart a stalled engine, or if
shift lever release button. Park, see Shift Lock Release on it is necessary to stop briefly with
R to P page 416 . the engine idling. Shift to the Park
N to R Press the shift lever release position if you need to leave your
D to 2 button. To avoid transmission damage, come vehicle for any reason. Press on the
2 to 1 to a complete stop before shifting brake pedal when you are moving
1 to 2 into Park. The shift lever must be in the shift lever from neutral to
2 to D Park before you can remove the key another gear.
D to N Move the shift lever. from the ignition switch.
N to D
R to N Reverse (R) − Press the brake
D3 to D Press the D3 button. pedal and the release button on the
D to D3 front of the shift lever to shift from
Park to reverse. To shift from
Park (P) − This position mechani- reverse to neutral, come to a
cally locks the transmission. Use complete stop, and then shift. Press
Park whenever you are turning off or the release button before shifting
starting the engine. To shift out of into reverse from neutral.
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and the release button on the
shift lever. Make sure your foot is off
the accelerator pedal.
414
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:35:03 31SZA620_420
Drive (D) − Use this position for Drive (D3) − To use D3, press the Second (2) − This position locks
your normal driving. The D3 button when the shift lever is in the transmission in second gear. It
transmission automatically selects a the ‘‘D’’ position. This position is simi- does not downshift to first gear
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your lar to D, except only the first three when you come to a stop.
speed and acceleration. You may gears are selected instead of all five.
notice the transmission shifting up at Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly Use second gear:
higher engine speeds when the terrain, or to provide engine braking For more power when climbing.
engine is cold. This helps the engine when going down a steep hill. D3 can To increase engine braking when
warm up faster. also keep the transmission from going down steep hills.
cycling between third and fourth For starting out on a slippery
gears in stop-and-go driving. surface or in deep snow.
When driving downhill with a
Driving
trailer.
CONTINUED
415
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:35:13 31SZA620_421
First (1) − To shift from second to Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release
first, press the release button on the If you exceed the maximum speed This allows you to move the shift
side of the shift lever. This position for the gear you are in, the engine lever out of Park if the normal
locks the transmission in first gear. speed will enter into the tachometer’s method of pushing on the brake
By upshifting and downshifting red zone. If this occurs, you may feel pedal and pressing the release
through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can the engine cut in and out. This is button does not work.
operate the transmission much like a caused by a limiter in the engine’s
manual transmission without a computer controls. The engine will 1. Set the parking brake.
clutch pedal. run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone. 2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
416
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:35:22 31SZA620_422
RELEASE BUTTON 6. Remove the key from the shift

lock release slot, then install the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the underside.
Insert the key back into the
ignition switch, press the brake
pedal, and restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock

release, it means your vehicle is
COVER developing a problem. Have the
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift 4. Insert the built-in key into the shift
lock release slot cover to prevent lock release slot.
scratches. Use a small flat-tip
screwdriver or metal fingernail file 5. Push down on the key while you
to carefully pry up the edge of the press the release button on the
cover and remove it from the slot. shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
417
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:35:36 31SZA620_423
VTM-4 System
4WD models only To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock, do
The variable torque management 1. The vehicle must be stopped with any of the following:
4WD (VTM-4) system automatically the engine running. Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
transfers varying amounts of engine 2. Move the shift lever to first (1),
torque to the rear wheels under second (2), or reverse (R) gear. Move the shift lever to D or D3.
lower traction conditions. 3. Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
The indicator in the button comes Turn the ignition switch to the
If more traction is needed when your on. LOCK (0) position.
vehicle is stuck, or is likely to
become stuck, you can use the To get unstuck, apply light pressure The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
VTM-4 LOCK button to increase to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin disengage when the vehicle speed
torque to the rear wheels. the front tires for more than a few exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The
seconds. Because of the amount of indicator in the button will remain on.
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction. Do not continuously spin the f ront tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the f ront tires can cause transmission
or rear dif f erential damage.
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear dif f erential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
418
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:35:48 31SZA620_424
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips Never park over dry leaves, tall
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof (if grass, or other flammable
the parking brake is set firmly, or equipped) and the windows are materials. The hot three way
your vehicle may roll if it is parked closed. catalytic converter could cause
on an incline. these materials to catch on fire.
Turn off the lights.
Set the parking brake before you put If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the transmission in Park. This keeps Place any packages, valuables, etc. the front wheels away from the
the vehicle from moving and putting in the cargo area or take them curb.
pressure on the parking mechanism with you.
in the transmission. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
Lock the doors and the tailgate. turn the front wheels toward the
Driving
Make sure the glass hatch is curb.
closed securely.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Except LX models
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
419
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:35:58 31SZA620_425
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
On vehicles without navigation system Low Tire Pressure Driving on a significantly under
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Indicator inflated tire causes the tire to
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) When the low tire pressure indicator overheat and can lead to tire failure.
that turns on every time you start the is on, one or more of your tires is Underinflation also reduces fuel
engine and monitors the pressure in significantly underinflated. You efficiency and tire tread life, and may
your tires while driving. should stop and check your tires as affect the vehicle’s handling and
soon as possible, and inflate them to stopping ability.
Each tire has its own pressure the proper pressure as indicated on
sensor (not including the spare tire). the vehicle’s tire information placard. Because tire pressure varies by
If the air pressure of a tire becomes temperature and other conditions,
significantly low while driving, the If you think you can safely drive a the low tire pressure indicator may
sensor in that tire immediately sends short distance to a service station, come on unexpectedly.
a signal that causes the low tire proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
pressure indicator to come on. the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire

pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 508 ).
If you cannot make the low tire

pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
420
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:36:12 31SZA620_426
For example, if you check and fill Each tire, including the spare, should Tire Pressure Monitoring
your tires in a warm area, then drive be checked monthly when cold, and System (TPMS) Indicator
in extremely cold weather, the tire set to the recommended inflation This indicator comes on and stays on
pressure will be lower than pressure as specified on the tire if there is a problem with the tire
measured and could be underinflated information label and in the owner’s pressure monitoring system.
and cause the low tire pressure manual (see page 497 ).
indicator to come on. Or, if you If this happens, the system will shut
check and adjust your tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitor off and no longer monitor tire
in cooler conditions, and drive into pressures. Have the system checked
extremely hot conditions, the tire The appropriate tire indicator and by your dealer as soon as possible.
may become overinflated. However, low tire pressure indicator comes on
the low tire pressure indicator will if a tire becomes significantly If the low tire pressure indicator or
Driving
not come on if the tires are underinflated. See Low Tire TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
overinflated. Pressure Indicator on page 74 . system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
Refer to page 496 for tire inflation pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
guidelines. page 432 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
Although your tire pressure is pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly. When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
421
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:36:21 31SZA620_427
Changing a Tire with TPMS The low tire pressure indicator or As required by the FCC:
If you have a flat tire, the low tire the TPMS indicator will go off, after This device complies with Part 15 of the
pressure indicator will come on. several miles (kilometers) driving, FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
Replace the flat tire with the when you replace the spare tire with following two conditions: (1) This device
compact spare tire (see page 508 ). the specified regular tire equipped may not cause harmful interference, and
with the tire pressure monitor sensor. (2) this device must accept any
Each wheel (except the compact interference received, including
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a Never use a puncture-repairing agent interference that may cause undesired
tire pressure sensor. You must use in a flat tire. If used, you will have to operation.
TPMS specific wheels. It is replace the tire pressure sensor.
recommended that you always have Have the flat tire repaired by your Changes or modifications not expressly
your tires serviced by your dealer or dealer as soon as possible. approved by the party responsible for
qualified technician. compliance could void the user’s
After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire This device complies with Industry
pressure indicator stays on. This is Canada Standard RSS-210.
normal; the system is not monitoring Operation is subject to the following two
the spare tire pressure. Manually conditions: (1) this device may not cause
check the spare tire pressure to be interference, and (2) this device must
sure it is correct. After several miles accept any interference that may cause
(kilometers) driving with the undesired operation of the device.
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
422
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:36:33 31SZA620_428
On vehicles with navigation system Low Tire Pressure/ If you think you can safely drive a
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire TPMS Indicator short distance to a service station,
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) When the low tire pressure/TPMS proceed slowly to the station, then
that turns on every time you start the indicator is on, one or more of your inflate the tire to the recommended
engine and monitors the pressure in tires is significantly underinflated. pressure.
your tires while driving. You should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them If the tire is flat, or if the tire
Each tire has its own pressure to the proper pressure as indicated pressure is too low to continue
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire on the vehicle’s tire information driving, replace the tire with the
becomes significantly low, the placard. compact spare tire (see page 509 ).
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire It is possible that the pressures Driving on a significantly under-
Driving
pressure/TPMS indicator in the shown on the multi-information inflated tire causes the tire to
instrument panel to come on. If this display and the pressures you overheat and can lead to tire failure.
happens, you will see which tire is manually measure are slightly Under-inflation also reduces fuel
losing pressure on the multi- different. efficiency and tire tread life, and may
information display along with a If the difference is significant or you affect the vehicle’s handling and
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’ cannot make the low tire pressure/ stopping ability.
message. TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after Because tire pressure varies by
inflating the tires to the specified temperature and other conditions,
values, have your dealer check the the low tire pressure/TPMS
system as soon as possible. indicator may come on unexpectedly.
CONTINUED
423
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:36:43 31SZA620_429
For example, if you check and fill Although your tire pressure is Tire Pressure Monitor
your tires in a warm area, then drive monitored, you must manually check
in extremely cold weather, the tire the tire pressures monthly.
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated Each tire, including the spare, should
and cause the low tire pressure/ be checked monthly when the
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if vehicle is cold, and set to the
you check and adjust your tire recommended inflation pressure as
pressure in cooler conditions, and specified on the vehicle placard and
drive into extremely hot conditions, in the owner’s manual (see page
the tire may become overinflated. 497 ).
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
To select the tire pressure monitor,
Refer to page 496 for tire inflation press the INFO button several times
guidelines. with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops You will see the above display on the
flashing after approximately 1 multi-information display when all
minute, then stays on. You will also tire pressures are normal.
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 96 ).
424
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:36:52 31SZA620_430
Driving
U.S. models Canadian models
To see the inflation pressures of all Each tire pressure is shown in PSI Each tire has its own pressure
four tires, press the SEL/RESET (U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
button. The display changes as models). becomes significantly low, the
shown above. sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multi-
information display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message. CONTINUED
425
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:37:02 31SZA620_431
TPMS System Failure
If any of the tires has low pressure, If there is a problem with the TPMS, If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the tire pressure monitor also shows the tire pressure monitor shows a you will see the above message on
the above message to warn you ‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’ the multi-information display.
about the low tire pressure when you message and the tire pressure
select the display by pressing the readings are not displayed. If this If you see this message, the system
INFO button several times. happens, you will first see a system is off and is not monitoring the tire
Following this display, press the warning message ‘‘CHECK TPMS pressures. Have the system checked
SEL/RESET button to see each tire SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information by your dealer as soon as possible.
pressure. When you continue driving display.
after installing the spare tire, you will Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
also see this message on the multi- indicator begins to flash, then stays
information display. on (see page 423 ).
426
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:37:12 31SZA620_432
If the low tire pressure/TPMS After the flat tire is replaced with the your tires serviced by your dealer or
indicator comes on, or the multi- spare tire, the low tire pressure/ a qualified technician.
information display shows a TPMS indicator stays on while Never use a puncture-repairing agent
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message, driving. After several miles in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
the VSA system automatically turns (kilometers) driving, this indicator replace the tire pressure sensor.
on even when the VSA system is begins to flash, then stays on again. Have the flat tire repaired by your
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS dealer as soon as possible.
switch (see page 432 ). If this SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
happens, you cannot turn the VSA information display. This is normal;
system off by pressing the VSA OFF the system cannot monitor the spare
switch again. tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
Driving
When you restart the vehicle with correct.
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message will also be This indicator and the warning
displayed on the multi-information message on the multi-information
display after several miles display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving. (kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
Changing a Tire with TPMS regular tire equipped with the tire
If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure monitor sensor.
pressure/TPMS and tire monitor Each wheel is equipped with a tire
indicators will come on. Replace the pressure sensor mounted inside the
indicated flat tire with the compact tire behind the valve stem. You must
spare tire (see page 508 ). use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have CONTINUED
427
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:37:21 31SZA620_433
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Braking System
As required by the FCC: Braking System Constant application of the brakes

This device complies with Part 15 of the Your vehicle is equipped with disc when going down a long hill builds
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the brakes at all four wheels. A power up heat and reduces their effective-
following two conditions: (1) This device assist helps reduce the effort needed ness. Use the engine to assist the
may not cause harmful interference, and on the brake pedal. The emergency brakes by taking your foot off the
(2) this device must accept any brake assist system increases the accelerator and downshifting to a
interference received, including stopping force when you depress the lower gear.
interference that may cause undesired brake pedal hard in an emergency
operation. situation. The anti-lock brake system Check the brakes after driving
(ABS) helps you retain steering through deep water. Apply the
Changes or modifications not expressly control when braking very hard. brakes moderately to see if they feel
approved by the party responsible for normal. If not, apply them gently and
compliance could void the user’s Resting your foot on the pedal keeps frequently until they do. Be extra
authority to operate the equipment. the brakes applied lightly, builds up cautious in your driving.
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
This device complies with Industry reduces brake pad life. In addition,
Canada Standard RSS-210. fuel economy can be reduced. It also
Operation is subject to the following two keeps your brake lights on all the
conditions: (1) this device may not cause time, confusing drivers behind you.
428
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:37:31 31SZA620_434
Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Braking System Design Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake
The hydraulic system that operates The anti-lock brake system (ABS) pedal when the ABS activates, and
the brakes has two separate circuits. helps prevent the wheels from may hear some noise. This is normal:
Each circuit works diagonally across locking up, and helps you retain it is the ABS rapidly pumping the
the vehicle (the left-front brake is steering control by pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will
connected with the right-rear brake, brakes rapidly, much faster than a need to press on the brake pedal
etc.). If one circuit should develop a person can do it. very hard before the ABS activates.
problem, you will still have braking However, you may feel the ABS
at two wheels. The electronic brake distribution activate immediately if you are trying
(EBD) system, which is part of the to stop on snow or ice.
Brake Wear Indicators ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
All four brakes have audible brake braking distribution according to
Driving
wear indicators. vehicle loading.
If the brake pads need replacing, you You should never pump the brake pedal.
will hear a distinctive, metallic Let the ABS work for you by always
screeching sound when you apply keeping firm, steady pressure on the
the brake pedal. If you do not have brake pedal. This is sometimes
the brake pads replaced, they will referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
429
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:37:45 31SZA620_435
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or
If this indicator comes on, the anti- and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the
lock function of the braking system released, the EBD system may also vehicle. It only helps with steering
has shut down. The brakes still work be shut down. control during braking.
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have On vehicles with navigation system ABS will not prevent a skid that
your dealer inspect your vehicle as If this happens, you will also see results from changing direction
soon as possible. ‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ and abruptly, such as trying to take a
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’ corner too fast or making a sudden
On vehicles with navigation system messages on the multi-information lane change. Always drive at a safe
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS display. speed for the road and weather
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- conditions.
information display (see page 95 ). Test your brakes as instructed on
page 523 . If the brakes feel normal, ABS cannot prevent a loss of
If the indicator comes on while drive slowly and have your vehicle stability. Always steer moderately
driving, test the brakes as instructed repaired by your dealer as soon as when you are braking hard. Severe
on page 523 . possible. Avoid sudden hard braking or sharp steering wheel movement
which could cause the rear wheels to can still cause your vehicle to veer
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of into oncoming traffic or off the road.
control.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
The VSA indicator will come on longer distance to stop on loose or
along with the ABS indicator. uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
430
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:37:59 31SZA620_436
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator NOTE: The main function of the
system helps to stabilize the vehicle VSA system is generally known as
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink. The system also includes a traction
assists you in maintaining traction control function.
while accelerating on loose or Vehicle Stability Assist
slippery road surfaces. It does this (VSA) System Indicator If the indicator does not come on
by regulating the engine’s output and If this indicator comes on while when the ignition switch is turned to
by selectively applying the brakes. driving, pull to the side of the road the ON (II) position, there may be a
when it is safe, and turn off the problem with the VSA system. Have
When VSA activates, you may notice engine. Reset the system by your dealer inspect your vehicle as
that the engine does not respond to restarting the engine. If the VSA soon as possible.
Driving
the accelerator in the same way it system indicator stays on or comes
does at other times. There may also back on while driving, have the VSA On vehicles with navigation system
be some noise from the VSA system inspected by your dealer. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
the VSA activation indicator blink. information display if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
431
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:38:13 31SZA620_437
On vehicles without navigation system VSA OFF Switch VSA is turned on every time you
If the low tire pressure indicator or start the engine, even if you turned it
TPMS indicator comes on, see off the last time you drove the
page 420 . vehicle.
On vehicles with navigation system In certain unusual conditions when

If the low tire pressure/TPMS your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
indicator comes on, see page 423 . mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
Or, if the multi-information display to free it with the VSA temporarily
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS switched off. When the VSA system
SYSTEM’’ message with the is off, the traction control system is
indicator flashing, see page 96 . also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
In this case, you cannot turn off the you are not able to free it when the
VSA using the OFF switch again. This switch is under the driver’s side VSA is on.
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
Without VSA, your vehicle will have off, press and hold it until you hear a Immediately after freeing your
normal braking and cornering ability, beep. vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
but it will not have VSA traction and again. We do not recommend driving
stability enhancement. When VSA is off, the VSA activation your vehicle with the VSA and
indicator comes on as a reminder. traction control systems switched off.
432
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:38:20 31SZA620_438
VSA and Tire Sizes Hill Start Assist

Driving with varying tire or wheel Your vehicle is equipped with a hill
sizes may cause the VSA to start assist feature to help prevent
malfunction. When replacing tires, the vehicle from rolling on inclines
make sure they are of the same size as you move your foot from the
and type as your original tires (see brake pedal to the accelerator.
page 502 ).
This feature starts operating a few
If you install winter tires, make sure seconds after you are in any drive
they are the same size as those that gear position (when faced uphill) or
were originally supplied with your in reverse (when faced downhill).
vehicle. Exercise the same caution This feature requires that the
Driving
during winter driving as you would if vehicle has come to a complete stop
your vehicle was not equipped with before it can work.
VSA.
Hill start assist may not hold a
heavily loaded vehicle, such as when
your vehicle is connected to a trailer,
or prevent your vehicle from rolling
downhill on a very steep or slippery
slope.
433
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:38:30 31SZA620_439
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed Load Limit

primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to Exceeding any load limit or
tow a trailer if you carefully observe improperly loading your vehicle
the load limits, use the proper and trailer can cause a crash in
equipment, and follow the guidelines which you can be seriously hurt
in this section. or killed.
Break-In Period Check the loading of your

Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle and trailer carefully
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km) before starting to drive.
(see page 394 ).
Be sure to read the Off-Highway

Driving Guidelines section on page Total Trailer Weight
449 if you plan to tow off paved The maximum allowable weight of
surfaces. the trailer and everything in or on it
depends on the number of occupants
in your vehicle and the type of trailer
being towed (see page 438 ).
Towing a trailer that is too heavy can

seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
434
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:38:42 31SZA620_440
Towing a Trailer
and cause it to sway. Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR):
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The maximum allowable weight of
(GVWR): the vehicle, all occupants, all
The maximum allowable weight of accessories, all cargo, and the
the vehicle, all occupants, all tongue load must not exceed:
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is: 4WD models:
2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
4WD models: on the front axle
6,096 lbs (2,765 kg) 3,362 lbs (1,525 kg) ＊1
3,251 lbs (1,475 kg) ＊2
Driving
2WD models: on the rear axle
5,952 lbs (2,700 kg)
Tongue Load ＊1 : Except LX models
The weight that the tongue of a fully ＊2 : LX models
loaded trailer puts on the hitch
should be 5 to 10 percent of the total 2WD models:
trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8 2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
to 15 percent of total trailer weight on the front axle
for all other trailers. (See page 3,196 lbs (1,450 kg)
438 for limits for your towing on the rear axle
situation). Too much tongue load
reduces front-tire traction and
steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
435
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:38:50 31SZA620_441
Towing a Trailer
Gross Combined Weight Rating Estimating Loads To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
(GCWR): The best way to confirm that all Add the weight of your trailer (as
The maximum allowable weight of loads are within limits is to check quoted by the manufacturer) with
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer them at a public scale. For public everything in or on the trailer. Then
with the proper hitch is: scales in your area, check your local check the tables on page 438 to
phone book, or contact your trailer make sure you do not exceed the
4WD models: dealer or rental agency for limit for your conditions.
9,579 lbs (4,345 kg) assistance.
2WD models:
8,466 lbs (3,840 kg) To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
The GCWR must be reduced 2 we recommend that you estimate
percent for every 1,000 feet (305 your total trailer weight and tongue
meters) of elevation. load as described next.
436
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:39:04 31SZA620_442
Towing a Trailer
To Estimate the Tongue Load 2WD models 4WD models

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
If the Estimated If the Estimated
2. Measure and record the distance difference is: tongue load is: difference is: tongue load is:
from the ground to the bottom of
the trailer hitch. 5/8’’ 150 lbs (68 kg) 5/8’’ 150 lbs (68 kg)
1 1/4’’ 250 lbs (114 kg) 1 1/4’’ 250 lbs (114 kg)
3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to 1 3/4’’ 350 lbs (159 kg) 1 3/4’’ 350 lbs (159 kg)
the hitch. 2 1/4’’ 450 lbs (205 kg)
4. Measure again from the ground to If the difference is more than 1 ¾

the same spot on the bottom of the inch, you have too much load on the If the difference is more than 2 ¼
Driving
hitch. tongue. Redistribute the load or inch, you have too much load on the
remove cargo as needed. tongue. Redistribute the load or
5. Subtract the second measurement remove cargo as needed.
from the first measurement, then
refer to the following table.
437
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:39:15 31SZA620_443
Towing a Trailer
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:

2WD models
Number of Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load＊＊
Occupants＊
2 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
3 3,300 lbs (1,497 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
4 3,100 lbs (1,406 kg) 230 lbs (104 kg)
5 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
6 2,800 lbs (1,270 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
7 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
8 Towing is Not Recommended
4WD models
Number of Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load＊＊
Occupants＊
2 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
3 4,300 lbs (1,950 kg) 400 lbs (181 kg)
4 4,100 lbs (1,860 kg) 330 lbs (150 kg)
5 4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 270 lbs (122 kg)
6 3,800 lbs (1,724 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
7 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
8 Towing is Not Recommended
＊ The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (68
kg), and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximum
trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page 435 ).
＊＊ Recommended tongue load should be 5−10% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8−15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
438
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:39:25 31SZA620_444
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads 4. If you cannot weigh the rear axle

To accurately check your loads at directly, you can calculate the rear
the public scale, the vehicle and gross axle weight by subtracting
trailer should be fully loaded, and all the weight in step 1 from the
occupants should stay in the vehicle weight in step 2.
while the attendant watches the Limit (4WD models): 3,175 lbs
scale. (1,440 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 3,031 lbs
(1,375 kg)
2. Check the gross vehicle weight.
(2,765 kg)
Driving
(2,700 kg)
3. Check the rear gross axle weight.

1. Check the front gross axle weight. Limit (4WD models): 3,362 lbs
Limit: 2,921 lbs (1,325 kg) (1,525 kg)
(1,450 kg)
CONTINUED
439
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:39:34 31SZA620_445
Towing a Trailer
5. Check the gross combined weight. 6. Check the weight of the hitched 7. Check the weight of the unhitched
Limit (4WD models): 9,579 lbs trailer. Write this number down. trailer. Limit: See page 438 .
(4,345 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 8,466 lbs 8. Calculate the tongue load.
(3,840 kg) Subtract the weight in step 6 from
Remember, maximum gross the weight in step 7.
combined weight should be Limit: See page 438 .
decreased 2% for every 1,000 feet Recommended: see page 435 .
(305 meters) of elevation. Range: 5-10% for boat trailers
8-15% for other trailers
440
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:39:47 31SZA620_446
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Hitch Trailer Brakes

Accessories Read the trailer manufacturer’s Honda recommends that any trailer
Towing generally requires a variety instructions, and select the with a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs
of supplemental equipment. To appropriate draw bar for the height (450 kg) or more has its own brakes.
ensure the best quality, we of the trailer you will be towing.
recommend that you purchase There are two common types of
Honda equipment whenever possible. Weight Distributing Hitch trailer brakes: surge and electric.
A weight distributing hitch is not Surge brakes are common for boat
Your dealer offers trailer packages recommended for use with your trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
that include a ball mount, hitch plug, vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
and hitch pin. A wiring harness kit is weight distributing hitch may reduce If you choose electric brakes, be
also available from your dealer. handling, stability, and braking sure they are electronically actuated.
Driving
performance. Do not attempt to tap into your
Discuss your needs with your trailer vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
sales or rental agency, and follow the matter how successful it may seem,
guidelines in this section. Also make any attempt to attach trailer brakes
sure that all equipment is properly to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
installed and maintained, and that it will lower braking effectiveness and
meets federal, state, province, create a potential hazard.
territory, and local regulations.
See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
CONTINUED
441
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:39:58 31SZA620_447
Towing a Trailer
A factory installed, 4-pin gray Use this illustration to identify each Safety Chains
connector is located under the terminal in the trailer brake Always use safety chains when you
instrument panel near the top of the controller connector. tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
parking brake pedal. This connector are secured to the trailer and hitch,
has all of the circuits required to ELECTRIC BRAKE BRAKE and that they cross under the tongue
install most electric trailer brake (BROWN/WHITE) (20A) and can catch the trailer if it
(PURPLE)
controllers. A jumper harness to becomes unhitched. Leave enough
adapt your electric trailer brake slack to allow the trailer to turn
controller to the vehicle is included corners easily, but do not let the
with the optional Genuine Honda chains drag on the ground.
trailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailer
hitch kit, see your dealer. Sway Control
This device is recommended if your
Have a qualified mechanic install GROUND STOP trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
your trailer brake controller (BLACK) (SKY BLUE) dealer or rental agency can tell you
following the trailer brake controller what kind of sway control you need
manufacturer’s instructions. Failure and how to install it.
to properly install the trailer brake
controller may increase the distance Trailer Mirrors
it takes for you to stop your vehicle Many states and provinces require
when towing a trailer. special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
442
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:40:10 31SZA620_448
Towing a Trailer
Spare Tires Trailer Lights

When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size LEFT TURN SIGNAL RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle AND BRAKE LIGHTS AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(RED) (WHITE)
and trailer. When replacing the
compact spare with a full size spare, ELECTRIC BRAKE
TAILLIGHTS (BROWN/WHITE)
remove the plastic spacer (see page (GREEN)
501 ). Store the plastic spacer and BACK-UP LIGHTS
(YELLOW)
compact spare together. Reinstall
the spacer before once again stowing GROUND
the compact spare. (BLACK)
＋B CHARGE
GROUND
Driving
(BLUE)
See page 502 for proper tire size, (BLACK)
page 515 for how to store a full size
wheel and tire, and page 509 for Trailer lights and equipment must Your vehicle is equipped with a
information on changing a flat tire. comply with federal, state, province/ connector to install an optional trailer
territory, and local regulations. lighting connector that mates with
Remember to unhitch the trailer Check trailer light requirements for your vehicle. You can get this
before changing a flat. Ask your the areas where you plan to tow, and optional connector from your dealer.
trailer sales or rental agency where use only equipment designed for
and how to store the trailer’s spare your vehicle. Refer to the above illustration for
tire. wiring information.
CONTINUED
443
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:40:24 31SZA620_449
Towing a Trailer
We recommend that you have your Towing Equipment Connecting the Trailer Connectors
dealer install a Honda wiring harness On Touring models
and converter. This harness has 7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
been designed for your vehicle. LID RETAINING
TAB
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you SOCKET RETAINING
can get the connector and pins that TAB
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary with 7-PIN TRAILER

trailer type and brand, you should TRAILER HITCH CONNECTOR
also have a qualified mechanic install 7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
a suitable connector between the Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer
vehicle and the trailer. hitch as standard equipment. The 7-pin trailer connector is needed
for the trailer lights. To connect the
The jumper harness and trailer connector:
brake fuse are stored in the glove
box. 1. Make sure the connector and the
socket are free of dirt, moisture,
Also see page 441 for trailer-related or other foreign material.
information.
2. Open the socket lid by pulling it up.
444
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:40:35 31SZA620_450
Towing a Trailer
3. Insert the connector securely into Trailer Connector Sockets Trailer Jumper Harness
the socket. On Touring models On Touring models
Hook the retaining tab on the SMALL ＋B ELECTRIC BRAKE

LIGHT CHARGE GROUND (BROWN/WHITE)
inner side of the lid against the (GREEN) (BLUE) (BLACK) BRAKE LIGHTS
retaining tab of the connector to
(SKY BLUE)
prevent disconnection during LEFT
RIGHT
operation. TURN/
TURN/ STOP
STOP (WHITE)
(RED)
BRAKE
GROUND BACK LIGHT ELECTRIC (20A)
Driving
(BLACK) (YELLOW) BRAKE (BLUE)
(BROWN/
7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET WHITE)
Refer to the above illustrations for The trailer jumper harness is used to
wiring information. install the controller for the electric
trailer brakes. For more information,
see Trailer Brakes on page 441 .
Trailer Brake Fuse

Insert the trailer brake fuse into the
secondary under-hood fuse box (see
page 529 ).
445
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:40:49 31SZA620_451
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist The lights and brakes on your Driving Safely With a Trailer
When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working The added weight, length, and
driving away, be sure to check the properly. height of a trailer will affect your
following: vehicle’s handling and performance,
Your vehicle tires and spare are in so driving with a trailer requires
The vehicle has been properly good condition and properly some special driving skills and
serviced, and the suspension and inflated. techniques.
the cooling system are in good
operating condition. Towing performance can be For your safety and the safety of
affected by high altitude, high others, take time to practice driving
The trailer has been properly temperature, or when climbing maneuvers before heading for the
serviced and is in good condition. steep grades. Therefore, premium open road, and follow the guidelines
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline in this section.
All weights and loads are within with pump octane number of 91 or
limits. higher) is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590
The hitch, safety chains, and any kg).
other attachments are secure.
The trailer tires and spare are in
All items on and in the trailer are good condition and inflated as
properly secured and cannot shift recommended by the trailer
while you drive. maker.
446
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:40:58 31SZA620_452
Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears When towing a fixed-sided trailer Making Turns and Braking
Drive slower than normal in all (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph Make turns more slowly and wider
driving situations, and obey posted (88 km/h). At higher speeds, the than normal. The trailer tracks a
speed limits for vehicles with trailers. trailer may sway or affect vehicle smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
Use D position when towing a trailer handling. can hit or run over something the
on level roads. D3 is the proper shift vehicle misses.
lever position to use when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘ Driving Allow more time and distance for
on Hills’’ on the next page for braking. Do not brake or turn
additional gear information.) suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Driving
CONTINUED
447
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:41:12 31SZA620_453
Towing a Trailer
Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Retrieving a Boat

When climbing hills, closely watch Crosswinds and air turbulence If the vehicle’s tires slip when
your temperature gauge. If it nears caused by passing trucks can disrupt retrieving a boat from the water,
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air your steering and cause the trailer to shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if sway. When being passed by a large lock (see page 418 ). Disengage
necessary, pull to the side of the vehicle, keep a constant speed, and VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
road to let the engine cool. steer straight ahead. Do not try to out of the water to prevent damage
make quick steering or braking to the VTM-4 system.
If the automatic transmission shifts corrections.
frequently while going up a hill, shift Towing Your Vehicle
to D3. Backing Up Your vehicle is not designed to be
Always drive slowly and have towed behind a motor home. If your
If you must stop when facing uphill, someone guide you when backing up. vehicle needs to be towed in an
use the foot brake or parking brake. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel, emergency, see page 531 .
Do not try to hold the vehicle in then turn the wheel to the left to get
place by pressing on the accelerator, the trailer to move to the left. Turn
as this can cause the automatic the wheel to the right to move the
transmission to overheat. trailer to the right.
When driving down hills, reduce Parking

your speed and shift down to D3. Do Follow all normal precautions when
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it parking, including putting the
takes longer to slow down and transmission in Park and firmly
stop when towing a trailer. setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
448
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:41:25 31SZA620_454
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information Important Safety Precautions

Your vehicle has been designed To avoid loss of control or rollover,
primarily for use on pavement. But Improperly operating this be sure to follow all precautions and
its higher ground clearance allows vehicle on or off-pavement can recommendations.
you to occasionally travel on unpaved cause a crash or rollover in
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic which you and your passengers Be sure to store cargo properly
sites, and similar locations. It is not could be seriously injured or and do not exceed your cargo load
designed for trail-blazing, mountain killed. limits (see page 405 and 434 ).
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities. Follow all instructions and Whenever you drive, make sure
guidelines in this owner’s you and your passengers always
If you decide to drive on unpaved manual. wear seat belts.
Driving
roads, you will find that it requires Keep your speed low, and
somewhat different driving skills. don’t drive faster than Keep your speed low, and never
Your vehicle will also handle conditions permit. go faster than the conditions allow.
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra It’s up to you to continually assess
attention to the precautions and tips the situation and drive within the
in this section, and get acquainted limits.
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
449
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:41:37 31SZA620_455
Check Out Your Vehicle Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Before you leave the pavement, be For better traction on all surfaces, Debris in the road can damage your
sure to do all scheduled maintenance accelerate slowly and gradually build suspension or other components.
and service, and inspect your vehicle up speed. If you try to start too fast Because your vehicle has a high
for any problems. Pay special on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you center of gravity, driving over a large
attention to the condition of the tires, might not have enough traction to obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
and check the tire pressures. get underway, and you may dig into a deep hole can cause your
yourself a hole. Starting with the vehicle to tip or roll over.
After you return to the pavement, shift lever in D position will help you
carefully inspect your vehicle to have a smoother start on snow or ice. Driving on Slopes
make sure there is no damage that If you can’t clearly see all conditions
could make driving it unsafe. Keep in mind that you will usually or obstacles on a slope, walk the
Recheck the condition of the tires need more time and distance to slope before you drive on it. If you
and the tire pressures. brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces. have any doubt whether or not you
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’ can safely drive on the slope, don’t
Remember the brakes; let the anti-lock braking do it. Find another route.
The route presents limits (too steep system pump them for you. If you are driving up a hill and find
or bumpy roads). You have limits that you cannot continue, do not try to
(driving skill and comfort). And your turn around. Your vehicle could roll
vehicle has limits (traction, stability, over. Slowly back down the hill,
and power). following the same route you took up
the hill.
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
450
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:41:51 31SZA620_456
Crossing a Stream The banks and surface under the If You Get Stuck
Before driving through water, stop, water provide good traction. The If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4
get out if necessary, and make sure water may hide hazards such as Lock (see page 418 ). Carefully try to
that: rocks, holes, or mud. go in the direction (forward or
reverse) that you think will get you
The water is not deep enough to If you decide it is safe to drive unstuck. Do not spin the tires at high
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or through water, choose a suitable speeds. It will not help you get out
exhaust pipe. You could stall and speed and engage the VTM-4 Lock. and may cause damage to the
not be able to restart your engine. Proceed without shifting or changing transmission or VTM-4 system.
The water can also damage speeds, and do not stop the vehicle
important vehicle components. or shut off the engine. If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
Driving
The banks are sloped so you can After driving through water, test and rear tow hooks designed for this
drive out. your brakes. If they got wet, gently purpose.
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
The water is not flowing too fast. until they operate normally.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow If the water is deeper than the wheel
rushing water can wash the hubs, some additional service may
ground from under your tires and be required. This service is not
cause you to lose traction and covered by your warranties.
possibly roll over.
CONTINUED
451
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:42:00 31SZA620_457
Use a nylon strap to attach your Towing a Trailer Off-Road

vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and You may be able to safely tow a
carefully take out the slack in the lightweight trailer (such as a
strap. Once the strap is tight, the motorcycle or small tent trailer) off-
recovery vehicle should apply force. road if you follow these guidelines.
Remember that the recovery vehicle Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
needs good traction to avoid or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
becoming stuck, too. kg).
You should never use a jack to try to Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
get unstuck. Your vehicle could and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else. Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps

or other obstacles.
452
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:42:06 31SZA620_458
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 454

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Information ............. 455
maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations............................... 470
maintenance safety precautions. Engine Compartment Covers....... 471
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 472
This section also includes Changing the Engine Oil and
instructions on how to read the Filter ............................................ 473
maintenance information messages Engine Coolant ............................... 475
on the information display or multi- Windshield Washers ..................... 477
information display (depending on Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 478
models), and instructions for simple Rear Differential Fluid .................. 480
maintenance tasks you may want to Transfer Assembly Fluid .............. 480
take care of yourself. Brake Fluid ..................................... 481
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 482
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to Timing Belt ..................................... 482
perform more complex maintenance Lights .............................................. 483
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 490
to purchase the service manual. See Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 490
page 557 for information on how to Floor Mats ...................................... 491
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Wiper Blades .................................. 492
Tires ................................................ 496
Checking the Battery .................... 504
Vehicle Storage .............................. 505
Interior Care ................................... 506
453
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:42:20 31SZA620_459
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Wear eye protection and engine and exhaust system cool
section should be performed by a protective clothing when working down before touching any parts.
certified technician or other qualified with the battery or compressed air.
mechanic. Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
Important Safety Precautions instructed to do so.
To eliminate potential hazards, read Improperly maintaining this
the instructions before you begin, vehicle, or failing to correct a
and make sure you have the tools problem before driving can
and skills required. cause a crash in which you can Failure to properly follow
be seriously hurt or killed. maintenance instructions and
Make sure your vehicle is parked precautions can cause you to
on level ground, the parking brake Always follow the inspection be seriously hurt or killed.
is set, and the engine is off. and maintenance
recommendations and Always follow the procedures
To clean parts, use a commercially schedules in this owner’s and precautions in this owner’s
available degreaser or parts manual. manual.
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or Potential Vehicle Hazards Some of the most important safety
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, Carbon Monoxide poison from precautions are given here. However,
and flames away from the battery engine exhaust. Be sure there is we cannot warn you of every
and all fuel-related parts. adequate ventilation whenever you conceivable hazard that can arise in
operate the engine. performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
Burns from hot parts. Let the should perform a given task.
454
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:42:31 31SZA620_460
Maintenance Information
Your vehicle displays engine oil life The remaining engine oil life is Engine Oil Life Display
and maintenance service items on shown on the display according to On vehicles without navigation system
the information display or multi- this table:
information display (depending on
models) to show you when you Calculated Engine Displayed
should have your dealer perform Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
engine oil replacement and indicated 100 %−91 % 100 %
maintenance services. 90 %−81 % 90 %
80 %−71 % 80 %
Based on the engine operating 70 %−61 % 70 %
conditions and accumulated engine 60 %−51 % 60 %
revolutions, the onboard computer in 50 %−41 % 50 % ENGINE OIL
your vehicle calculates the remaining 40 %−31 % 40 % LIFE DISPLAY SELECT/
RESET KNOB
engine oil life and displays it as a 30 %−21 % 30 % U.S. model is shown.
Maintenance
percentage. 20 %−16 % 20 %
15 %−11 % 15 % To see the current engine oil life,
10 %−6 % 10 % turn the ignition switch to the ON
5 %−1 % 5% (II) position, and press the select/
0% 0% reset knob repeatedly until the
engine oil life display appears (see
page 83 ).
CONTINUED
455
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:42:40 31SZA620_461
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
INDICATOR MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S) ‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown.
If the remaining engine oil life is 15 The 15 and 10 percent oil life When the remaining engine oil life is
to 6 percent, you will see the engine indicators remind you that your 5 to 1 percent, you will see a
oil life indicator every time you turn vehicle will soon be due for ‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
the ignition switch to the ON (II) scheduled maintenance. same maintenance item code(s),
position. The maintenance every time you turn the ignition
information indicator will also come switch to the ON (II) position.
on, and the maintenance item
code(s) for other scheduled
maintenance items needing service
will be displayed near the ‘‘OIL
LIFE’’ message.
456
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:42:54 31SZA620_462
The maintenance item code or codes NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED

indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 458 ).
You can switch the information

display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1 U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown.
percent, the maintenance
information indicator ( ) comes When the remaining engine oil life is If you do not perform the indicated
Maintenance
on every time you turn the ignition 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator maintenance, negative distance
switch to the ON (II) position, then it will blink. The display comes on traveled is displayed and begins to
goes out if you switch the every time you turn the ignition blink after the vehicle has been
information display. switch to the ON (II) position. The driven 10 miles (10 km) or more.
maintenance information indicator
When you see this message, have ( ) also comes on and remains Negative distance traveled means
the indicated maintenance on in the instrument panel. When your vehicle has passed the
performed by your dealer as soon as you see this message, immediately maintenance required point.
possible. have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer. Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
CONTINUED
457
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:43:09 31SZA620_463
To change the information display Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
from the engine oil life display to the Items Display
odometer or the trip meter, press On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles without navigation system
and release the select/reset knob. Your dealer will reset the display
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S) after completing the required
When the engine oil life is 0 percent maintenance service. You will see
or negative distance traveled, the ‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
maintenance information indicator display the next time you turn the
( ) remains on even if you ignition switch to the ON (II)
change the information display. position.
Immediately have the service If maintenance service is done by

performed, and make sure to reset someone other than your dealer,
the display as described as follows. MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM reset the maintenance information as
U.S. model is shown. follows:
All maintenance items displayed on 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

the information display are in code. (II) position.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 469 . 2. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
458
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:43:20 31SZA620_464

SEL/RESET BUTTON
ENGINE OIL INFO (▲/▼)

U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown. LIFE DISPLAY BUTTON
3. Press the select/reset knob for 4. Press the select/reset knob for
Maintenance
about 10 seconds. The engine oil another 5 seconds. The To see the current engine oil life,
life and the maintenance item maintenance item code(s) will turn the ignition switch to the ON
code(s) will blink. disappear, and the engine oil life (II) position, and push and release
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ the INFO (▲/▼) button on the
steering wheel repeatedly, until the
engine oil life is displayed (see page
88 ).
CONTINUED
459
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:43:26 31SZA620_465
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S) SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

When the remaining engine oil life is The system message indicator on To cancel the system message, press
15 percent or less, the display shows the instrument panel will also come and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
a ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ message on, and a beeper will sound. on the steering wheel. At this time,
along with the maintenance item the system message indicator will
code(s) for other scheduled also be turned off. Then the display
maintenance items needing service. will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the
maintenance item code(s) along with
the engine oil life on the multi-
information display.
460
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:43:34 31SZA620_466
You will also see the system The system message indicator on
message every time you turn the the instrument panel will also come
ignition switch to the ON (II) on, and a beeper will sound.
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
The maintenance item code(s)

indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 465 ).
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see the
above display. The display then
changes to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’
Have the indicated maintenance
done as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
461
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:43:40 31SZA620_467
You will also see the system

message every time you turn the
dealer.
U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown.
To cancel the system message, press If the indicated maintenance service

and release the INFO (▲/▼) button is not done and the engine oil life
on the steering wheel. At this time, reaches 0 percent, you will see a
the system message indicator will ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message
also be turned off. Then the display along with the maintenance item
will change to the engine oil life code(s) on the multi-information
display. You will see a ‘‘SERVICE’’ display.
message and along with the
maintenance item code(s) on the
multi-information display.
462
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:43:49 31SZA620_468
The system message indicator on The system message will appear

the instrument panel will also come again by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
on, and a beeper will sound. button after canceling it.
When you see this message, have You will also see the system
the indicated maintenance done by message every time you turn the
your dealer immediately. ignition switch to the ON (II)
dealer.
Maintenance
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
not be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the engine oil
life blinking and a ‘‘SERVICE’’
message along with the maintenance
item code(s) on the multi-
CONTINUED
463
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:43:59 31SZA620_469
The system message will appear

again by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button after canceling it.
You will also see the system

message every time you turn the
U.S. U.S.
dealer.
Negative distance traveled means

Canada Canada your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
If the indicated required service is To cancel the system message, press
not done and the remaining engine and release the INFO (▲/▼) button Immediately have the service
oil life becomes 0%, the multi- on the steering wheel. At this time, performed, and make sure to reset
information display will show a the system message indicator will the display as described on page 465 .
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message, not be turned off. Then the display
the total distance traveled after the will change to the engine oil life
remaining oil life became 0%, and the display. You will see the negative
maintenance item code(s). distance traveled blinking and a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
maintenance item code(s) on the
multi-information display.
464
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:44:13 31SZA620_470
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Items Display
On vehicles with navigation system On vehicles with navigation system
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by

MAINTENANCE someone other than your dealer,
SUB ITEM(S)
MAINTENANCE reset the maintenance information as
MAIN ITEM follows: 3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
Maintenance
U.S. model is shown. button on the steering wheel for
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON more than 10 seconds. The
All maintenance items displayed on (II) position. remaining engine oil life reset
the information display are in code. mode will be shown on the multi-
For an explanation of these 2. Press the SEL/RESET button on information display.
maintenance codes, see page 469 . the steering wheel until you see
the engine oil life display.
CONTINUED
465
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:44:20 31SZA620_471
Important Maintenance Your authorized Honda dealer

Precautions knows your vehicle best and can
If you have the required service provide competent, efficient service.
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the However, service at a dealer is not
service, the system will not show the mandatory to keep your warranties
correct maintenance intervals. This in effect. Maintenance may be done
can lead to serious mechanical by any qualified service facility or
problems because you will no longer person who is skilled in this type of
have an accurate record of when automotive service. Make sure to
maintenance is needed. have the service facility or person
U.S. model is shown. reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the of completion, and have the person
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press who does the work fill out your
the SEL/RESET button to reset Honda Service History or Canadian
the engine oil life display. The Maintenance Log. Check your
maintenance item code(s) will warranty booklet for more
disappear, and the engine oil life information.
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
466
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:44:30 31SZA620_472
We recommend the use of Honda U.S. Vehicles: Owner’s Maintenance Checks

parts and fluids whenever you have Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following
maintenance done. These are repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If
manufactured to the same high- devices and systems may be done you are unsure of how to perform
quality standards as the original by any automotive repair any check, turn to the appropriate
components, so you can be confident establishment or individual using page listed.
of their performance and durability. parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards. Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
According to state and federal page 398 .
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked Engine coolant level − Check the
with ＃ will not void your emissions radiator reserve tank every time
warranties. However, all you fill the fuel tank. See page 398 .
Maintenance
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the Automatic transmission − Check
intervals indicated by the odometer/ the fluid level monthly. See page
trip meter display or the multi- 478 .
CONTINUED
467
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:44:35 31SZA620_473
Brakes − Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 481 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
497 .
Lights − Check the operation of

the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 483 .
468
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:44:45 31SZA620_474
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil＊1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil＊1 and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km).
Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
Driveshaft boots diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA) (24,000 km).
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect drive belt
Exhaust system＃ 3 Replace transmission and transfer＊2 fluid
Fuel lines and connections＃ 4 Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
＊1 : If the message, ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the If you drive regularly in very high temperatures
display is reset, change the engine oil every year. (over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures
(under−20°F, −29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every
＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 467 . 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
NOTE : Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display, 5 Replace engine coolant
replace the brake fluid every 3 years. 6 Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid＊2
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires
differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the maintenance information. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
469
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:44:50 31SZA620_475
Fluid Locations
POWER STEERING FLUID

(Red cap)
BRAKE FLUID
WASHER FLUID (Black cap)
(Blue cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK AUTOMATIC

(Orange loop) TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
470
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:44:56 31SZA620_476
Engine Compartment Covers
The component parts in the engine

compartment are protected by the AIR INTAKE COVER
cover. You may need to remove the HOLDING CLIP
cover and the air intake cover when
you perform some simple FRONT BULKHEAD COVER
maintenance work.
Covers are secured by holding clips.
To remove the front bulkhead cover

and the air intake cover, remove the
holding clips with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Maintenance
471
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:45:07 31SZA620_477
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil The oil viscosity or weight is
Oil is a major contributor to your provided on the container’s label.
engine’s performance and longevity. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 round protection of your vehicle to
detergent oil displaying the API improve cold weather starting and
Certification Seal. This seal indicates fuel economy.
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda motor oil in your vehicle.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any Ambient Temperature
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could API CERTIFICATION SEAL
damage the engine.
472
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:45:19 31SZA620_478
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and

You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter
it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter
given for a conventional motor oil: it according to the maintenance
displays the API Certification Seal, messages shown on the information
and it is the proper weight. You must display or multi-information display
follow the oil and filter change (depending on models). The oil and
intervals shown on the odometer/ filter collect contaminants that can
trip meter display or on the multi- damage your engine if they are not
information display. removed regularly.
Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires WASHER DRAIN BOLT
Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from
additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle 2. Open the hood, and remove the
Maintenance
affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
performance and durability. type hydraulic lift for this service. drain bolt and washer from the
Unless you have the knowledge and bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
proper equipment, you should have into an appropriate container.
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
1. Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
CONTINUED
473
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:45:31 31SZA620_479
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 4. Install a new oil filter according to 7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
the instructions that come with it. Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
Make sure to clean off any dirt seconds. If it does not, turn off the
and dust on the contacting surface engine, and check your work.
of a new oil filter.
8. Let the engine run for several
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, minutes, then check the drain bolt
then reinstall the drain bolt. and oil filter for leaks.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m) 9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
6. Refill the engine with the recom- the oil level on the dipstick. If
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the mended oil. necessary, add more oil.
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your Engine oil change capacity
dealer) is required. (including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) Improper disposal of engine oil can be
Make sure the oil filter gasket is harmf ul to the environment. If you
not stuck to the contacting surface change your own oil, please dispose of
of the engine. If it is, remove it the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
before installing a new oil filter. container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
474
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:45:41 31SZA620_480
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the
is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
Removing the radiator cap
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not while the engine is hot can
available, you may use another cause the coolant to spray out,
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a seriously scalding you.
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant Always let the engine and
MIN MAX recommended for aluminum engines. radiator cool down before
Continued use of any non-Honda removing the radiator cap.
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
CONTINUED
475
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:45:53 31SZA620_481
Engine Coolant
3. Remove the radiator cap by

pushing down and turning
RADIATOR CAP counterclockwise. MAX
4. The coolant level should be up to

the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and

carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment. RESERVE TANK MIN
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
are cool. tighten it fully. Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling on the reserve tank.
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without Do not add any rust inhibitors or
pressing down. other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
476
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:46:02 31SZA620_482
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer reservoir at least windshield washer fluid. This
monthly during normal use. increases the cleaning capability and Do not use engine antif reeze or a
prevents freezing in cold weather. vinegar/water solution in the
U.S. 2WD models windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
Check the fluid level by removing When you refill the reservoir, clean can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
the cap and looking at the level the edges of the windshield wiper a vinegar/water solution can damage
gauge. blades with windshield washer fluid the windshield washer pump. Use only
on a clean cloth. This will help to commercially-available windshield
If equipped condition the blade edges. washer f luid.
The washer level indicator will come
on when the level is low (see page
80 ).
Maintenance
On 4WD models with navigation
system
If the washer fluid is low, a ‘‘LOW
WASHER FLUID’’ message appears
on the multi-information display.
477
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:46:11 31SZA620_483
Automatic Transmission Fluid
The transmission should be drained

DIPSTICK
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on the information
display or multi-information display
(depending on models).
Check the fluid level with the engine

UPPER MARK
at normal operating temperature.
LOWER MARK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut DIPSTICK
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
no longer than 90 seconds) before from the transmission, and wipe it the transmission securely as
doing step 2. with a clean cloth. shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check

the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
478
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:46:21 31SZA620_484
Automatic Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower The transmission should be drained

mark, add fluid into the dipstick and refilled with new fluid when this
hole to bring it to the level service is indicated by a maintenance Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
between the upper and lower message on the multi-information (automatic transmission f luid). Do not
marks. display. mix with other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully If you are not sure how to add fluid, Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
so you do not spill any. Clean up contact your dealer. deterioration in transmission operation
any spill immediately; it could and durability, and could result in
damage components in the engine damage to the transmission.
compartment. Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Always use Honda Genuine Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
ATF-Z1 (automatic transmission Honda new vehicle warranty.
Maintenance
fluid).
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back

into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the

dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
479
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:46:30 31SZA620_485
Rear Differential Fluid, Transfer Assembly Fluid
Rear Differential Fluid Always use Honda VTM-4 Transfer Assembly Fluid
4WD models only Differential Fluid, and have your 4WD models only
dealer replace the rear differential The transfer assembly should be
FILLER BOLT fluid. drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display or multi-
Always use hypoid gear oil GL4 or

GL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or
80W-90. Have the fluid replaced by
your dealer.
CORRECT LEVEL
The rear differential should be

drained and refilled with new fluid
information display. This service
may be needed more often under
certain driving conditions (see page
469 ).
480
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:46:38 31SZA620_486
Brake Fluid
Replace the brake fluid when this Always use Honda Heavy Duty
service is indicated on a maintenance Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
message on the information display available, you should use only DOT 3
or multi-information display or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
(depending on models). container, as a temporary
replacement.
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly. Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid MIN MAX
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
The fluid level should be between
Maintenance
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not the MIN and MAX marks on the side
compatible with your vehicle’s of the reservoir. If the level is at or
braking system and can cause below the MIN mark, your brake
extensive damage. system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
481
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:46:50 31SZA620_487
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid Always use Honda Power Steering Timing Belt
Fluid. You may use another power The timing belt should be replaced
UPPER LEVEL steering fluid as an emergency at the intervals shown in the
replacement, but have the power maintenance information schedule.
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible. Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
A low power steering fluid level can (Canada) if you regularly drive your
indicate a leak in the system. Check vehicle in any of the following
the fluid level frequently, and have conditions:
the system inspected as soon as
possible. In very high temperatures
LOWER LEVEL (over 110°F, 43°C).
If you are not sure how to add In very low temperatures
Check the level on the side of the fluid, contact your dealer. (under −20°F, −29°C).
reservoir when the engine is cold. Frequently towing a trailer.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
UPPER LEVEL mark. or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
482
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:47:00 31SZA620_488
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight/Daytime BULB

The headlights were properly aimed Running Light Bulb
when your vehicle was new. If you Your vehicle has halogen headlight
regularly carry heavy items in the bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
cargo area or pull a trailer, it by its base, and protect the glass
readjustment may be required. from contact with your skin or hard
Adjustments should be done by your objects. If you touch the glass, clean
dealer or another qualified it with denatured alcohol and a clean
technician. cloth.
CONNECTOR
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch The high beam headlight bulb, the
Maintenance
on the glass can cause the bulb to low beam headlight bulb, and
overheat and shatter. daytime running light bulb are
replaced the same way.
1. Open the hood.
If you need to change the

headlight bulb on the driver’s side,
remove the front end of the air
intake duct by pulling it out.
CONTINUED
483
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:47:13 31SZA620_489
Lights
BULB BULB Replacing Front Turn Signal/

Parking and Side Marker Light
Bulbs
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT
BULB
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
2. Remove the electrical connector 4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
from the bulb by pushing on the and turn it one-quarter turn SOCKET
tab and pulling the connector clockwise to lock it in place.
down. 1. Open the hood.
5. Push the electrical connector onto
3. Remove the bulb by turning it the new bulb. 2. Remove the socket by turning it
about one-quarter turn one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
counterclockwise. 6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
484
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:47:25 31SZA620_490
Lights
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

Except LX models
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
SIDE MARKER LIGHT BULB it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,

perspiration, or a scratch on the glass 1. Place a cloth on the edge of the
Maintenance
SOCKET can cause the bulb to overheat and cover to prevent scratches.
shatter. Remove the covers by carefully
4. Push the new bulb straight into prying on the edge with a small
the socket until it bottoms. flat-tip screwdriver.
5. Insert the socket back into the

headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
CONTINUED
485
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:47:36 31SZA620_491
Lights
CONNECTOR Replacing Rear Bulbs

(in Rear Pillar)
2. Remove the front fog light

assembly from the bumper.
1. Open the tailgate. 3. Place a cloth on the inner edge of
3. Remove the electrical connector the assembly to prevent scratches.
from the bulb by pushing on the 2. Remove the two mounting bolts Loosen the assembly by carefully
tab and pulling the connector with an 8 mm wrench. prying on the top and side edges
down. with a small flat-tip screwdriver.
Use your fingers to further pull it
4. Remove the bulb from the fog loose.
light assembly by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise. 4. Remove the assembly from the
mounting holes by pulling it out.
486
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:47:45 31SZA620_492
Lights
8. Push the new bulb straight into Side Turn Signal Lights
the socket until it bottoms. On Touring models
Each outside mirror has side turn
TABS 9. Turn on the lights to make sure signal lights. The lights should be
BULB the new bulb is working. replaced by your dealer.
10.Put the socket back into the light

assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
11.Align the two tabs on the light

assembly with the mounting holes
and install the rear light assembly
SOCKET in the rear pillar. Tighten the two
Maintenance
bolts securely.
5. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight,
back-up light, side marker light, or
turn signal light.
6. Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
7. Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket.
487
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:47:56 31SZA620_493
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake 7. Put the lens back on the light

Light Bulb assembly, and tighten the
mounting bolts securely.
8. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
LENS SEGMENT
9. Put the light assembly back into
the vehicle. Install the screws and
tighten them securely.
Reinstall the lens segments.
1. Place a cloth on the edge of the 4. Remove the two mounting screws
lens segment to prevent scratches. from the light assembly.
Remove each lens segment by
carefully prying on its edge with a 5. Remove the lens from the light
small flat-tip screwdriver. assembly.
2. Remove the screw under each lens. 6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
3. Pull the high-mount brake light into the socket until it bottoms.
assembly out of the vehicle.
488
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:48:05 31SZA620_494
Lights
Replacing a Rear License Plate

Bulb
SCREWDRIVER LENS
BULB
CLOTH
LENS
Maintenance
1. Place a cloth on the edge of the 3. Turn on the parking lights and
lens segment to prevent check that the new bulb is
scratching. Insert a small flat-tip working.
screwdriver between the left edge
of the lens and the housing. The 4. Put the lens back into the light
lens will come down. assembly, right side first. Push on
the left edge until it snaps into
2. Pull the bulb straight out of its place.
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
489
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:48:14 31SZA620_495
Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Dust and Pollen Filter Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
This filter removes the dust and belt anchors can cause the belts to
pollen that is brought in from the LOOP retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
outside through the heating and the loops with a clean cloth
cooling system/climate control dampened in mild soap and warm
system. water or isopropyl alcohol.
Have your dealer replace the filter

the models). It should be replaced
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you
drive primarily in urban areas that If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
have high concentrations of soot in brush with a mixture of mild soap
the air, or if the flow from the and warm water to clean them. Do
heating and cooling system/climate not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
control system becomes less than solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
usual. you use the vehicle.
490
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:48:20 31SZA620_496
Floor Mats
Front If you remove a floor mat, make sure Rear

to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
The floor mats that came with your If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
Maintenance
vehicle hook over the floor mat make sure it fits properly and that it
anchors. This keeps the floor mats can be used with the floor mat
from sliding forward, possibly anchors. Do not put additional floor
interfering with the pedals, or mats on top of the anchored mats.
backwards, making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
491
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:48:31 31SZA620_497
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper

WIPER ARMS
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
LOCK TAB
To replace the front wiper blades: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm:
1. Raise each wiper arm off the Press and hold the lock tab.
windshield, lifting the driver’s side Slide the blade assembly toward
first, then the passenger’s side. the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade, make

Do not open the hood when the wiper sure not to drop the wiper blade or
arms are raised, or you will damage the wiper arm down on the windshield.
hood and the wiper arms.
492
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:48:42 31SZA620_498
Wiper Blades
BLADE BLADE 5. Slide the new wiper blade into the

holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the

window.
Windshield: Lower the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
Maintenance
by grabbing the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
CONTINUED
493
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:48:50 31SZA620_499
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
To replace the rear wiper blade: 2. Slide the blade out of the wiper 3. Examine the new wiper blades. If
arm. they have no plastic or metal
1. Raise the wiper arm off the glass reinforcement along the back
hatch and hold it. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
494
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:48:55 31SZA620_500
Wiper Blades
4. Slide the new blade into the wiper
Maintenance
arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
5. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windshield or the hatch glass.
495
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:49:06 31SZA620_501
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Even though your vehicle is
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated equipped with TPMS, we
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of recommend that you visually check
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding your tires every day. If you think a
comfort. tire might be low, check it
The following pages give more immediately with a tire gauge.
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel Use a gauge to measure the air
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to pressure in each tire at least once a
fail from being overheated. month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
Overinflated tires can make your 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride more harshly, are month. Remember to check the
worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road spare tire at the same time.
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly.
be seriously hurt or killed.
The tire pressure monitoring system
Follow all instructions in this (TPMS) warns you when a tire
owner’s manual regarding tire pressure is low. See page 420 or
inflation and maintenance. 423 for more information.
496
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:49:18 31SZA620_502
Tires
Check the air pressures when the While tubeless tires have some Recommended Tire Pressures
tires are cold. This means the ability to self-seal if they are The following chart shows the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 punctured, you should look closely recommended cold tire pressures for
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 for punctures if a tire starts losing most normal and high-speed driving
km). Add or release air, if needed, to pressure. conditions.
match the recommended cold tire
pressures. You should get your own tire Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
pressure gauge and use it whenever for Normal Driving
If you check air pressures when the you check your tire pressures. This P245/65R17 105T Front/Rear:
tires are hot (driven for several will make it easier for you to tell if a 32 psi (220 kPa ,
miles/kilometers), you will see pressure loss is due to a tire problem 2.2 kgf/cm )
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 and not due to a variation between
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold gauges. The compact spare tire pressure is:
readings. This is normal. Do not let 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Maintenance
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be For convenience, the recommended
underinflated. tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about

your tires, see page 540 .
497
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:49:31 31SZA620_503
Tires
Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Service Life

Every time you check inflation, you The service life of your tires is
should also examine the tires for dependent on many factors,
damage, foreign objects, and wear. including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
You should look for: loading, inflation pressure,
Bumps or bulges in the tread or maintenance history, speed, and
side of the tire. Replace the tire if environmental conditions (even
you find either of these conditions. when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side inspections and inflation pressure
of the tire. Replace the tire if you TREAD WEAR INDICATORS maintenance, it is recommended that
can see fabric or cord. you have annual inspections
Your tires have wear indicators performed once the tires reach five
Excessive tread wear. molded into the tread. When the years old. It is also recommended
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 that all tires, including the spare, be
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the removed from service after 10 years
tread. This shows there is less than from the date of manufacture,
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on regardless of their condition or state
the tire. of wear.
A tire this worn gives very little The last four digits of the TIN (tire
traction on wet roads. You should identification number) are found on
replace the tire if you can see three the sidewall of the tire and indicate
or more tread wear indicators. the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 542 ).
498
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:49:44 31SZA620_504
Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

In addition to proper inflation, Replace your tires with radial tires of
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front the same size, load range, speed
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire rating, and maximum cold tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer pressure rating (as shown on the
check the wheel alignment. tire’s sidewall).
Have your dealer check the tires if Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
you feel a consistent vibration while your vehicle can reduce braking
driving. A tire should always be ability, traction, and steering
rebalanced if it is removed from the accuracy. Using tires of a different
wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional size or construction can cause the
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS and vehicle stability assist
balanced. This increases riding system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
Maintenance
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate
balance. the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display or multi-
On vehicles with aluminum wheels, models). Move the tires to the
improper wheel weights can damage positions shown in the diagram each
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use time they are rotated. If you
only Honda wheel weights f or purchase directional tires, rotate
balancing. only front-to-back.
CONTINUED
499
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:49:50 31SZA620_505
Tires
The ABS works by comparing the It is best to replace all four tires at Also be sure you use only TPMS
speed of the wheels. When replacing the same time. If that is not possible specific wheels. If you do not, the
tires, use the same size originally or necessary, replace the two front tire pressure monitoring system will
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size tires or two rear tires as a pair. not work.
and construction can affect wheel Replacing just one tire can seriously
speed and may cause the system to affect your vehicle’s handling.
activate.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
When the tires are rotated, make sure that the wheel’s specifications
sure the air pressures are checked. match those of the original wheels.
500
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:49:59 31SZA620_506
Tires
Installing improper tires on your

vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of

tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
SPACER BOLTS (10 mm)
If you store a full size tire on the To remove the spacer, loosen the
Maintenance
hoist, remove the spacer. two bolts.
Otherwise the hoist will not fully
return to its original position. Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
501
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:50:09 31SZA620_507
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving Snow Tires

Wheels: Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All If you mount snow tires on your
17 x 7 1/2J Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- vehicle, make sure they are radial
weather tread design suitable for tires of the same size and load range
Tires: most winter driving conditions. as the original tires. Mount snow
P245/65R17 105T tires on all four wheels. The traction
For the best performance in snowy provided by snow tires on dry roads
See page 540 for information about or icy conditions, you should install may be lower than your original tires.
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page snow tires or tire chains. They may Check with the tire dealer for
542 for tire size and labeling be required by local laws under maximum speed recommendations.
information. certain conditions.
502
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:50:19 31SZA620_508
Tires
Tire Chains Wheels

Mount tire chains on your tires when Clean the wheels as you would the
required by driving conditions or Using the wrong chains, or not rest of the exterior. Wash them with
local laws. Install them only on the properly installing chains, can the same solution, and rinse them
front tires. damage the brake lines and thoroughly.
cause a crash in which you can
Because your vehicle has limited tire be seriously injured or killed. Aluminum alloy wheels have a
clearance, Honda strongly protective clear-coat that keeps the
recommends using the chains listed Follow all instructions in this aluminum from corroding and
below. owner’s manual regarding the tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
selection and use of tire chains. harsh chemicals (including some
SCC Super Z-6＃SZ-435 commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
When installing chains, follow the clean the wheels, use a mild
Maintenance
manufacturer’s instructions and detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
mount them as tightly as you can. Traction devices that are the wrong
Drive slowly with chains installed. If size or improperly installed can
you hear them contacting the body damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
or chassis, stop and investigate. suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
Make sure the chains are installed driving if they are hitting any part of
tightly, and that they are not the vehicle.
contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove the chains as
soon as you start driving on cleared
roads.
503
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:50:28 31SZA620_509
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the terminals for corrosion (a

white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a The battery gives off explosive
solution of baking soda and water. It hydrogen gas during normal
will bubble up and turn brown. When operation.
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a A spark or flame can cause the
cloth or paper towel. Coat the battery to explode with enough
terminals with grease to help prevent force to kill or seriously hurt you.
further corrosion.
Wear protective clothing and a
If additional battery maintenance is face shield, or have a skilled
needed, see your dealer or a technician do the battery
Check the condition of the battery qualified technician. maintenance.
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the WARNING: Battery posts,
battery explains the test indicator’s terminals, and related accessories If the radio fuse is removed, the
colors. contain lead and lead compounds. audio system will disable itself. The
Wash your hands after handling. next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
If you need to connect the battery to frequency display. Use the preset
a charger, disconnect both cables to buttons to enter the digit code (see
prevent damaging your vehicle’s page 313 ).
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
504
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:50:40 31SZA620_510
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles with navigation system Vehicle Storage
If your vehicle’s battery is The navigation system will also If you need to park your vehicle for
disconnected, or goes dead, the time disable itself. The next time you turn an extended period (more than 1
setting will be reset to 1:00. To set on the ignition switch, the system month), there are several things you
the time again, follow the setting will require you to enter a PIN should do to prepare it for storage.
procedure (see page 314 ). before it can be used. Refer to the Proper preparation helps prevent
navigation system manual. deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior

completely.
Maintenance
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put

the transmission in Park.
CONTINUED
505
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:50:51 31SZA620_511
Vehicle Storage, Interior Care
Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a Leather

‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made On EX-L and Touring models
If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as Vacuum dirt and dust from the
longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such leather frequently. Pay close
supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, attention to the pleats and seams.
tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint. Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with a 90% water and 10%
Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the neutral wool detergent solution.
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth.
indoors). operating temperature (the Remove any dust or dirt on leather
cooling fans cycle on and off surfaces immediately.
Disconnect the battery. twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a

silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
506
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:50:56 31SZA620_512
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 508

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 509
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 516
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 517
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 519
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 521
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 521
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 522
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 523
on getting your vehicle towed. Fuses ............................................... 524
Fuse Locations ............................... 528
Emergency Towing ....................... 531
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 532

507
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:51:10 31SZA620_513
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a If you store a full size tire on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get hoist, remove the spacer.
your regular tire repaired or replaced, Otherwise the hoist will not fully
and put it back on your vehicle as return to its original position.
soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the On vehicles without navigation system
compact spare tire every time you The low tire pressure indicator
check the other tires. It should be comes on and stays on after you
inflated to: replace the flat tire with the compact
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) spare tire. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
Follow these precautions: compact spare tire, the TPMS TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off. Replace the tire when you can see
This tire gives a harsher ride and the tread wear indicator bars. The
less traction on some road On vehicles with navigation system replacement should be the same size
surfaces. Use greater caution After the flat tire is replaced with the and design tire, mounted on the
while driving. spare tire, the low tire pressure/ same wheel. The spare tire is not
TPMS indicator stays on. After designed to be mounted on a regular
Do not mount snow chains on a several miles (kilometers) driving wheel, and the spare wheel is not
compact spare. with the spare, this indicator begins designed for mounting a regular tire.
to flash, then stays on again. You will
Do not use your compact spare also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
tire on another vehicle unless it is SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
the same make and model. information display (see page 426 ).
508
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:51:21 31SZA620_514
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,

stop in a safe place to change it. CARGO AREA
Drive slowly along the shoulder until FLOOR
you get to an exit or an area to stop JACK
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for

TOOLS
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the SPARE TIRE

jack.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, 4. Push the rear edge of the handle
and turn the ignition switch to the to raise the handle loop and pull up
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and LOCK (0) position. Have all the loop to raise the cargo area
non-slippery ground. Put the passengers get out of the vehicle floor.
transmission in Park. Apply the while you change the tire. Remove the cargo area floor.
parking brake.
3. Open the tailgate.
CONTINUED
509
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:51:30 31SZA620_515
COVER PLASTIC COVER
WHEEL NUT
WRENCH
KNOB
5. The tools and jack are under the 6. The spare tire is stored
cargo area behind a cover on the underneath the rear cargo area.
passenger’s side. Remove the Remove the plastic cover and the The wheel nut wrench supplied with
cover and take the jack out of the rubber cap on the cargo area your vehicle is specially adapted to f it
tool kit case. lining to access the shaft for the the hoist shaf t. Do not use any other
spare tire hoist. tool.
7. Fold down the third row seat (see 8. Put the extension with the wheel
page 161 ). nut wrench on the hoist shaft.
Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
510
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:51:39 31SZA620_516
BRACKET JACKING POINTS
9. Keep turning the wheel nut 11.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn 12.Place the jack under the jacking
wrench to create slack in the cable. with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tire you need to
change.

10.Remove the bracket from the
spare tire.
CONTINUED
511
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:51:47 31SZA620_517
CONNECTOR BUTTON WHEEL NUT WRENCH
DIAL
HOOK
EXTENSION
DIAL STAY CONNECTOR BUTTON
13.Turn the dial at the bottom of the 14.Attach the stay to the extension, 15.Insert the hook at the end of the
jack clockwise until the top of the then attach the wheel nut wrench stay into the opening on the dial at
jack contacts the jacking point. to the end of the extension. the bottom of the jack.
Make sure the jacking point tab is Make sure the stay, the extension,
resting in the jack notch. and the wheel nut wrench are
securely attached.
512
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:51:56 31SZA620_518
18.Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
19.Lower the vehicle to the ground,

and remove the jack.
BRAKE HUB
16. Turn the jack dial (wheel nut 17. Before mounting the spare tire,
wrench) clockwise as shown to wipe any dirt off the mounting
raise the vehicle until the flat tire surface of the wheel and hub with

is off the ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
CONTINUED
513
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:52:02 31SZA620_519
21.Remove the center cap from the 22.Insert the hoist bracket into the
flat tire, and place the flat tire center hole of the flat tire.
under the hoist, with the valve
stem facing up.
20.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in

the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
514
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:52:11 31SZA620_520
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
Always raise the spare tire hoist, even Loose items can fly around the
if you are not stowing a tire. If the interior in a crash and could
hoist is lef t down, it will be damaged seriously injure the occupants.
during driving and need to be replaced.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
25.Store the jack and the tools in the securely before driving.
tool box.
26.Refer to Changing a Tire with

TPMS (see page 422 or 427 ).
23.Slowly turn the extension with the

wheel nut wrench clockwise to
take up the slack of the hoist cable.

Make sure the bracket is seated in
the center hole of the flat tire.
24.Turn the extension with the wheel

nut wrench clockwise until the flat
tire rests against the underbody of
the vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.
515
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:52:25 31SZA620_521
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t Check these things: If the headlights dim noticeably or
start falls into two areas, depending Check the transmission interlock. go out when you try to start the
on what you hear when you turn the The transmission must be in Park engine, either the battery is
ignition switch to the START (III) or neutral or the starter will not discharged or the connections are
position: operate. corroded. Check the condition of
You hear nothing, or almost the battery and terminal connec-
nothing. The engine’s starter Turn the ignition switch to the ON tions (see page 504 ). You can
motor does not operate at all, or (II) position. Turn on the then try jump starting the vehicle
operates very slowly. headlights, and check their from a booster battery (see page
brightness. If the headlights are 517 ).
You can hear the starter motor very dim or do not come on at all,
operating normally, or the starter the battery is discharged. See The Starter Operates Normally
motor sounds like it is spinning Jump Starting on page 517 . In this case, the starter motor’s
faster than normal, but the engine speed sounds normal, or even faster
does not start up and run. Turn the ignition switch to the than normal, when you turn the
START (III) position. If the ignition switch to the START (III)
Nothing Happens or the Starter headlights do not dim, check the position, but the engine does not run.
Motor Operates Very Slowly condition of the fuses. If the fuses
When you turn the ignition switch to are OK, there is probably Are you using a properly coded
the START (III) position, you do not something wrong with the key? An improperly coded key will
hear the normal noise of the engine electrical circuit for the ignition cause the immobilizer system
trying to start. You may hear a switch or starter motor. You will indicator in the instrument panel
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or need a qualified technician to to blink rapidly (see page 78 ).
nothing at all. determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 531 .
516
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:52:40 31SZA620_522
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Are you using the proper starting Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
procedure? Refer to Starting the Although this seems like a simple 1. Open the hood, and check the
Engine on page 411 . procedure, you should take several physical condition of the battery.
precautions. In very cold weather, check the
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel condition of the electrolyte. If it
gauge; the warning indicator may seems slushy or frozen, do not try
not be working. jump starting until it thaws.
A battery can explode if you do
There may be an electrical not follow the correct procedure,
problem, such as no power to the seriously injuring anyone
fuel pump. Check all the fuses nearby. If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
(see page 525 ). electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Keep all sparks, open flames, Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
If you find nothing wrong, you will and smoking materials away battery can cause it to rupture.
need a qualified technician to find from the battery.
the problem. See Emergency 2. Turn off all the electrical acces-

Towing on page 531 . sories: heater, A/C, climate
You cannot start your vehicle by control, audio system, lights, etc.
pushing or pulling it. Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
CONTINUED
517
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:52:51 31SZA620_523
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter

motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once the vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
BOOSTER BATTERY your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
The numbers in the illustration show 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
you the order to connect the jumper to the negative (−) terminal on and then from the booster battery.
cables. the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap Keep the ends of the jumper cables
3. Connect one jumper cable to the as shown. Do not connect this away from each other and any metal
positive (＋) terminal on your jumper cable to any other part of on the vehicle until everything is
vehicle’s battery. Connect the the engine. disconnected. Otherwise, you may
other end to the positive (＋) cause an electrical short.
terminal on the booster battery.
518
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:53:01 31SZA620_524
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle’s 1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
temperature gauge should stay in Put the transmission in Park, and
the midrange under most conditions. Steam and spray from an set the parking brake. Turn off all
If it climbs to the red mark, you overheated engine can the accessories, and turn on the
should determine the reason (hot seriously scald you. hazard warning lights.
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
Do not open the hood if steam 2. If you see steam and/or spray
If the vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. coming from under the hood, turn
take immediate action. The only off the engine. Wait until you see
indication may be the temperature no more signs of steam or spray,
gauge climbing to or above the red then open the hood.
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood. 3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,

Driving with the temperature gauge the engine should start to cool
pointer at the red mark can cause down almost immediately. If it
serious damage to the engine. does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
CONTINUED
519
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:53:13 31SZA620_525
If the Engine Overheats
4. If the temperature gauge stays at 9. Start the engine, and set the
the red mark, turn off the engine. temperature to maximum heat
Removing the radiator cap (climate control to AUTO at
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, while the engine is hot can ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
such as a split radiator hose. cause the coolant to spray out, radiator up to the base of the filler
Everything is still extremely hot, seriously scalding you. neck. If you do not have the
so use caution. If you find a leak, it proper coolant mixture available,
must be repaired before you Always let the engine and you can add plain water.
continue driving (see Emergency radiator cool down before Remember to have the cooling
Towing on page 531 ). removing the radiator cap. system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, can.
check the coolant level in the 8. Using gloves or a large heavy
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant cloth, turn the radiator cap 10.Put the radiator cap back on
if the level is below the MIN mark. counterclockwise, without pushing tightly. Run the engine, and check
down, to the first stop. After the the temperature gauge. If it goes
7. If there was no coolant in the pressure releases, push down on back to the red mark, the engine
reserve tank, you may need to add the cap, and turn it until it comes needs repair (see Emergency
coolant to the radiator. Let the off. Towing on page 531 ).
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera- 11.If the temperature stays normal,
ture gauge, or lower, before check- check the coolant level in the
ing the radiator. radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
520
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:53:28 31SZA620_526
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System
Indicator off the engine. Turn on the hazard Indicator
This indicator should never come on warning indicators. If the charging system indicator
when the engine is running. If it comes on brightly when the engine
starts flashing or stays on, the oil 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. is running, the battery is not being
pressure has dropped very low or Open the hood, and check the oil charged.
lost pressure. Serious engine level (see page 398 ). An engine
damage is possible, and you should very low on oil can lose pressure On vehicles with navigation system
take immediate action. during cornering and other driving You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
maneuvers. CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
On vehicles with navigation system the multi-information display (see
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the page 95 ).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on level back to the full mark on the
the multi-information display when dipstick (see page 472 ). Immediately turn off all electrical
this indicator comes on. accessories. Try not to use other
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil electrically operated controls such as

pressure indicator. If it does not go the power windows. Keep the engine
out within 10 seconds, turn off the running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil engine. There is a mechanical discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical problem that needs to be repaired
damage almost immediately. Turn of f before you can continue driving Go to a service station or garage
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get (see Emergency Towing on page where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. 531 ). assistance.
521
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:53:39 31SZA620_527
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the battery in your vehicle has

while driving, it means one been disconnected or gone dead,
of the engine’s emissions control If you keep driving with the these codes may be erased. It takes
systems may have a problem. Even malf unction indicator lamp on, you can several days of driving under various
though you may feel no difference in damage your vehicle’s emissions conditions to set the codes again.
your vehicle’s performance, it can controls and engine. Those repairs may
reduce your fuel economy and cause not be covered by your vehicle’s To check if they are set, turn the
increased emissions. Continued warranties. ignition switch to the ON (II)
operation may cause serious damage. position, without starting the engine.
On vehicles with navigation system The malfunction indicator lamp will
If you have recently refueled your You will also see a ‘‘CHECK come on for 20 seconds. If it then
vehicle, the indicator coming on EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on goes off, the readiness codes are set.
could be due to a loose or missing the multi-information display (see If it blinks five times, the readiness
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it page 95 ). codes are not set. If possible, do not
clicks at least once. Tightening the take your vehicle for an emissions
cap will not turn the indicator off Readiness Code test until the readiness codes are set.
immediately; it can take several days Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness Refer to Emissions Testing for
of normal driving. codes’’ that are part of the on-board more information (see page 550 ).
diagnostics for the emissions
If the indicator comes on repeatedly, systems. In some states, part of the
even though it may turn off as you emissions testing is to make sure
continue driving, have your vehicle these codes are set. If they are not
checked by the dealer as soon as set, the test cannot be completed.
possible.
522
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:53:51 31SZA620_528
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada If the fluid level is low, take your Slow down by shifting to a lower
The brake system vehicle to a dealer, and have the gear, and pull to the side of the road
indicator normally brake system inspected for leaks or when it is safe. Because of the long
comes on when you turn the ignition worn brake pads. distance needed to stop, it is
switch to the ON (II) position, and as hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
a reminder to check the parking However, if the brake pedal does not should have it towed, and repaired as
brake. It will stay on if you do not feel normal, you should take soon as possible (see Emergency
fully release the parking brake. immediate action. A problem in one Towing on page 531 ).
part of the system’s dual circuit
If the brake system indicator comes design will still give you braking at If you must drive the vehicle a short
on while driving, the brake fluid level two wheels. You will feel the brake distance in this condition, drive
is probably low. Press lightly on the pedal go down much farther before slowly and carefully.
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. the vehicle begins to slow down, and
If it does, check the brake fluid level you will have to press harder on the If the ABS indicator and the VSA
the next time you stop at a service pedal. system indicator come on with the
station (see page 481 ). brake system indicator, have your

On vehicles with navigation system vehicle inspected by your dealer
On vehicles with navigation system You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE immediately.
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
FLUID’’ message on the multi- information display (see page 95 ).
523
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:54:02 31SZA620_529
Fuses
REAR LID UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)
TAB
The vehicle’s fuses are located in The rear fuse box is located at the
four fuse boxes. left side of cargo area. UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)
TAB
The interior fuse box is underneath The primary under-hood fuse box is
the dashboard on the driver’s side. located on the passenger’s side. The
secondary fuse box is located next to
the battery.
To open it, push the tabs as shown.
524
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:54:12 31SZA620_530
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE BLOWN

If something electrical in your BLOWN
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
528 , 529 , and 530 , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. Check each of the large fuses in
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the under-hood fuse boxes by
headlights and all other looking through the top at the wire

accessories are off. inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
2. Remove the cover from the fuse screwdriver.
box.
CONTINUED
525
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:54:19 31SZA620_531
Fuses
BLOWN
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a

spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
FUSE PULLER might blow out again. This does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
4. Check the smaller fuses in the 5. Look for a burned wire inside the Replace the fuse with one of the
under-hood fuse boxes and rear fuse. If it is burned out, replace it correct rating as soon as you can.
fuse box, and all the fuses in the with one of the spare fuses of the
interior and rear fuse boxes by same rating or lower.
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
526
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:54:25 31SZA620_532
Fuses
If the radio fuse is removed, the

audio system will disable itself. The
Replacing a f use with one that has a next time you turn on the radio you
higher rating greatly increases the will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
chances of damaging the electrical frequency display. Use the preset
system. If you do not have a buttons to enter the digit code (see
replacement f use with the proper rating page 313 ) .
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the

same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle

checked by a qualified technician.
527
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:54:34 31SZA620_533
Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 120 A Main Fuse 13 20 A Front Passenger’s Power

− Not Used Seat Reclining
2 80 A OP Main 14 20 A Front Passenger’s Power
50 A IG Main Seat Slide
3 − Not Used 15 7.5 A Oil Level
− Not Used 16 20 A Head Light Hi Main
4 50 A Head Light Main 17 20 A Radio
40 A Power Window Main 18 15 A IG Coil
5 − Not Used 19 15 A Main
6 30 A Condenser Fan 20 7.5 A MG Clutch
7 30 A Cooling Fan 21 15 A DBW
8 30 A Rear Defroster 22 10 A Interior Light
9 40 A Blower 23 10 A Back Up
10 20 A Front Fog Light
11 15 A Sub
12 10 A ACM
528
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:54:45 31SZA620_534
Fuse Locations
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX REAR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
5 30 A Rear Blower
6 30 A VSA Motor
7 15 A Hazard
8 20 A Power Tailgate Closer
9 20 A Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining
10 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Slide
11 20 A Stop & Horn
12 15 A Rear Console Accessory
Socket
13 10 A Rear Wiper
14 20 A Trailer E-Brake
No. Amps. Circuits Protected 15 20 A A/C Inverter No. Amps. Circuits Protected

16 15 A Center Console Accessory
1 40 A Power Tailgate Motor Socket 1 20 A Small Light
2 20 A VTM-4 17 20 A Trailer Charge 2 7.5 A Stop Lamp
3 30 A Trailer Main 18 15 A Front Accessory Socket 3 7.5 A Back Lamp
4 40 A VSA FSR 19 15 A Rear Accessory Socket 4 7.5 A Turn Lamp, Hazard
20 20 A Glass Hatch Motor
21 15 A Rear Heated Seat
22 30 A Head Light Washer Motor
529
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:54:55 31SZA620_535
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
6 − Not Used 22 7.5 A VBSOL2

7 10 A Auto Light 23 7.5 A STRLD
8 7.5 A Auto Light 24 − Not Used
9 7.5 A ODS 25 − Not Used
10 7.5 A Meter 26 20 A Driver’s Power Window
11 10 A SRS 27 20 A HAC OP
12 10 A Right Daytime Running Light 28 20 A Moonroof
13 10 A Left Daytime Running Light 29 20 A Door Lock
14 7.5 A Small Lights (Interior) 30 20 A Front Passenger’s Power
15 10 A Small Lights (Exterior) Window
16 15 A Right Head Light Low 31 30 A Audio Amp＊
17 15 A Left Head Light Low 32 20 A Passenger’s Side Rear
No. Amps. Circuits Protected 18 20 A Daytime Running Light Main Power Window
19 15 A Small Lights Main 33 20 A Driver’s Side Rear Power
1 7.5 A VTM-4 20 − Not Used Window
2 15 A Fuel Pump 7.5 A TPMS 34 − Not Used
3 10 A ACG 21 20 A Head Light Low Main 35 10 A ACC
4 7.5 A VSA 36 10 A HAC
5 15 A Heated Seat 37 7.5 A Day Light
38 30 A Wiper
＊ : On vehicles with rear entertainment system
530
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:55:01 31SZA620_536
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, The only way you can safely tow 4WD models only
call a professional towing service or your vehicle is with flat-bed
organization. Never tow your vehicle equipment. The operator will load
with just a rope or chain. It is very your vehicle on the back of a truck.
dangerous. Any other method of towing will Towing with only two tires on the
damage the drive system. When you ground will damage parts of the 4WD
contact the towing agency, inform system. It should be transported on a
them a flat-bed is required. f lat-bed truck or trailer.

531
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:55:10 31SZA620_537
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, Front WHEEL NUT

mud, or snow, call a towing service WRENCH
to pull it out (see the previous page). COVER
For very short distances, such as

freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchors in the front and rear
bumpers.
TOWING HOOK
1. Remove the cover, put cloth on the 2. Remove the towing hook and
edge of the cover to prevent wheel nut wrench placed behind a
scratches and carefully pry with a cover under the cargo area.
small flat-tip screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file. 3. Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
The cover is attached to the nut wrench.
bumper with a tether.
532
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:55:15 31SZA620_538
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Rear
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
TRAILER HITCH

533
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:55:17 31SZA620_539
534
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:55:22 31SZA620_540
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 536

you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 538
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 540
includes information you should Tire Labeling .................................. 542
know about your vehicle’s tires and Tire Pressure Monitoring System
emissions control systems. (TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation............................. 544
Emissions Controls........................ 547
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 549
Emissions Testing ......................... 550
535
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:55:28 31SZA620_541
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers located in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
536
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:55:33 31SZA620_542
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

ENGINE NUMBER
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
537
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:55:55 31SZA620_543
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 190.9 in (4,850 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 78.5 in (1,995 mm) 21.00 US gal (79.5 )
Height 70.9 in (1,802 mm)＊1 Engine Change ＊1
1.98 US gal (7.5 )
72.7 in (1,846 mm)＊2 coolant Total 2.48 US gal (9.4 )
Wheelbase 109.3 in (2,775 mm) Engine oil Change＊2
Track Front 67.7 in (1,720 mm) Including 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Rear 67.5 in (1,715 mm) filter
Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
＊1 : U.S. LX models ＊2 : Except U.S. LX models filter
Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Weights Automatic 2WD Change 3.6 US qt (3.4 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the tire information label atta- transmission Total 8.6 US qt (8.1 )
ched to the driver’s doorjamb. fluid 4WD Change 3.6 US qt (3.4 )
Gross combined weight 8,466 lbs (3,840 kg)＊2 Total 8.6 US qt (8.1 )
rating (GCWR)＊1 9,579 lbs (4,345 kg)＊3 Rear Change 2.79 US qt (2.64 )
differential Total 3.01 US qt (2.85 )
＊1 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305 fluid (4WD)
meters) of elevation. Transfer Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 )
＊2 : 2WD models ＊3 : 4WD models assembly Total 0.48 US qt (0.45 )
fluid (4WD)
Air Conditioning Windshield U.S. vehicles 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) washer Canadian 6.9 US qt (6.5 )
Charge quantity 21.2−22.9 oz (600−650 g) reservoir vehicles
Lubricant type ND-OIL8
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
Seating Capacities engine
Total 8 Reserve tank capacity:
Front 2 0.196 US gal (0.74 )
Second 3 ＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Third 3
538
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:56:25 31SZA620_544
Specifications
Lights Fuses
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Interior See page 530 or the fuse label
Low 12 V − 55 W (H11) attached on the side panel.
Daytime running lights 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Rear See page 529 or the fuse label
Front side marker lights 12 V − 3 CP attached to the inside of the fuse
Front turn signal/ 12 V − 28/8 W box lid.
parking lights Under-hood See page 528 and 529 or the fuse
Front fog lights＊ 12 V − 55 W (H11) box cover.
Rear turn signal/taillights 12 V − 21/5 W
Stop/taillights 12 V − 21/5 W Engine
Rear side marker lights 12 V − 5W Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC
Back-up lights 12 V − 18 W VCM 6-cylinder (V6) gasoline engine
License plate lights 12 V − 5W Bore x Stroke 3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
Individual map lights Front 12 V − 8W Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
Rear 12 V − 4 CP Compression ratio 10.5 : 1
Cargo area lights 12 V − 8W Spark plugs DENSO: SXU22HCR11
High-mount brake lights 12 V − 5W NGK: ILZKR7B11
Vanity mirror lights 12 V − 1.4 W
Door courtesy lights 12 V − 2 CP Alignment
Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
＊ : Except LX models Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
Camber Front −0°30’
Battery Rear −0°30’
Capacity 12 V − 60 AH/5 HR Caster Front 4°12’
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR
Tires
Size Front/Rear P245/65R17 105T
Spare T165/80D17 104M
Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
539
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:56:35 31SZA620_545
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
540
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:56:41 31SZA620_546
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
541
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:56:57 31SZA620_547
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size 105 − Load index (a numerical code
have a number of markings. Those Whenever tires are replaced, they associated with the maximum
you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the load the tire can carry).
below. same size. The following is an
example of tire size with an T − Speed symbol (an
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE explanation of what each component alphabetical code indicating
(1) means. the maximum speed rating).
P245/65R17 105T Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The tire identification number (TIN)
P − Vehicle type (P indicates is a group of numbers and letters
passenger vehicle). that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
245 − Tire width in millimeters. tire.
65 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section DOT B97R FW6X 2202

height as a percentage of its
width). DOT − This indicates that the tire
(1) meets all requirements of
R − Tire construction code (R the U.S. Department of
(4) (3) (2) indicates radial). Transportation.
(1) Tire Size 17 − Rim diameter in inches. B97R − Manufacturer’s
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure identification mark.
(4) Maximum Tire Load
542
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:57:08 31SZA620_548
Tire Labeling
FW6X − Tire type code. Glossary of Tire Terminology Maximum Load Rating − Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
2202 − Date of manufacture. Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air permissible inflation pressure for
Year pressure when the vehicle has been that tire.
Week parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Recommended Inflation Pressure −
The cold tire inflation pressure
Load Rating − Means the maximum recommended by the manufacturer.
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) −
Means the projections within the
Maximum Inflation Pressure − The principal grooves designed to give a
maximum tire air pressure that the visual indication of the degrees of
tire can hold. wear of the tread.
543
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:57:16 31SZA620_549
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if As an added safety feature, your Driving on a significantly under
provided), should be checked vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflated tire causes the tire to
monthly when cold and inflated to pressure monitoring system (TPMS) overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the inflation pressure recommended that illuminates a low tire pressure Underinflation also reduces fuel
by the vehicle manufacturer on the telltale efficiency and tire tread life, and may
vehicle placard or tire inflation affect the vehicle’s handling and
pressure label. stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a when one or more of your tires is Please note that the TPMS is not a
different size than the size indicated significantly under-inflated. substitute for proper tire
on the vehicle placard or tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
inflation pressure label, you should Accordingly, when the low tire responsibility to maintain correct tire
determine the proper tire inflation pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
pressure for those tires.) should stop and check your tires as not reached the level to trigger
soon as possible, and inflate them to illumination of the TPMS low tire
the proper pressure. pressure telltale.
544
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:57:24 31SZA620_550
On vehicles without navigation system Always check the TPMS malfunction

Your vehicle has also been equipped telltale after replacing one or more
with a TPMS malfunction indicator tires or wheels on your vehicle to
to indicate when the system is not ensure that the replacement or
operating properly. The TPMS alternate tires and wheels allow the
malfunction indicator is provided by TPMS to continue to function
a separate telltale, which displays the properly.
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
545
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:57:31 31SZA620_551
On vehicles with navigation system TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

Your vehicle has also been equipped variety of reasons, including the
with a TPMS malfunction indicator installation of replacement or
to indicate when the system is not alternate tires or wheels on the
operating properly. The TPMS vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
malfunction indicator is combined functioning properly.
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a Always check the TPMS malfunction
malfunction, the telltale will flash for telltale after replacing one or more
approximately one minute and then tires or wheels on your vehicle to
remain continuously illuminated. ensure that the replacement or
This sequence will continue upon alternate tires and wheels allow the
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long TPMS to continue to function
as the malfunction exists. properly.
When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
546
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:57:41 31SZA620_552
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act crankcase ventilation valve routes
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ them from the crankcase back to the
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile intake manifold. They are then
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that drawn into the engine and burned.
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls Evaporative Emissions Control
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain System
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. tank, an evaporative emissions
ment. Under certain conditions of Scheduled maintenance is on page control canister filled with charcoal
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC 469 . adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ canister while the engine is off. After
＊
Carbon monoxide does not contri- In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
bute to smog creation, but it is a with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
poisonous gas. requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
547
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:57:54 31SZA620_553
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is tion.
multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
548
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:58:04 31SZA620_554
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER CONVERTERS
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine well maintained.
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
near it. Park your vehicle away from formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
high grass, dry leaves, or other protect your vehicle’s three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not
flammables. catalytic converter. running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
549
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:58:14 31SZA620_555
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the 5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by hold it there until the temperature
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
systems. These codes are erased scale (about 3 minutes).
when the battery is disconnected, 1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
and set again only after several days but not completely, full (around 6. Without touching the accelerator
of driving under a variety of 3/4). pedal, let the engine idle for 20
conditions. seconds.
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient

temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
550
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:58:20 31SZA620_556
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban 9. Make sure the vehicle has been
major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes. parked with the engine off for 30
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let minutes.
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 the vehicle coast for several
minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the If the testing facility determines the
D. Do not use the cruise control. accelerator pedal or the brake readiness codes are still not set, see
When traffic allows, drive for 90 pedal. your dealer.
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
551
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:58:23 31SZA620_557
552
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:58:26 31SZA620_558
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 554

Warranty Coverages ..................... 555
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 556
Authorized Manuals ...................... 557

553
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:58:36 31SZA620_559
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Customer Relations us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Honda Canada Inc.
If you encounter a problem that your Vehicle Identification Number
dealership does not solve to your Visit www.honda.ca for contact (see page 536 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with information
the dealership’s management. The Name and address of the dealer
service manager or general manager Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 who services your vehicle
can help. Almost all problems are Fax: 1-877-939-0909
solved in this way. Date of purchase
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
If you are dissatisfied with the Islands: Odometer reading of your vehicle
decision made by the dealership’s Vortex Motor Corp.
management, contact Honda Bella International Your name, address, and tele-
Customer Service. P.O. Box 190816 phone number
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
U.S. Owners: A detailed description of the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Tel: (787) 620-7546 problem
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Name of the dealer who sold the
1919 Torrance Boulevard vehicle to you
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
554
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:58:49 31SZA620_560
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. coverage for a replacement battery
Please read your warranty booklet purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty − for details.

covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the emissions control systems and Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty − provides
accessories, against defects in − all exterior body panels are coverage for as long as the pur-
materials and workmanship. covered for rust-through from the chaser of the muffler owns the
inside for the specified time period vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects with no mileage limit.
Warranty and Emissions Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Performance Warranty − these two Accessory Limited Warranty − all these warranties. Please read the
warranties cover your vehicle’s Honda accessories are covered 2011 Honda warranty information
emissions control systems. Time, under this warranty. Time and booklet that came with your vehicle
mileage, and coverage are mileage limits depend on the type of for precise information on warranty
conditional. Please read your accessory and other factors. Please coverages. Your vehicle’s original
warranty booklet for exact read your warranty booklet for tires are covered by their
information. details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda Canadian Owners
replacement parts against defects in Please refer to the 2011 warranty
materials and workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
555
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:58:54 31SZA620_561
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 1-888-327-4236
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administration (NHTSA), in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or 20590.
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
556
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:05 31SZA620_562
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S.only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
Go online at www. helminc. com for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356. Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
Publication Form Description troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
Form Number in your vehicle.
61SZA02 2011 Honda Pilot Service Manual
61SZA02EL 2011 Honda Pilot Body Repair Manual:
Authorized Manuals
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
61SZA30 2011 Honda Pilot Body Repair Manual of damaged body parts.
31SZA620 2011 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual
31SZA820 2011 Honda Pilot
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
31SZAM20 2011 Honda Pilot Honda Service History
31SZAQ20 2011 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide
HON Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired
557
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:14 31SZA620_564
Index
A Auto Control Mode, Starting Specifications ............................. 539

Engine ......................................... 411 Before Driving ............................... 393
AAC ................................................. 300 Auto Door Lock ............................. 116 Belts, Seat ..................................... 9, 22
Accessories and Modifications .... 402 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .... 139 Beverage Holders .......................... 181
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Auto Door Unlock.......................... 117 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 361
Position) ...................................... 137 Automatic Climate Control........... 199 Booster Seats ................................... 58
Accessory Power Sockets............. 186 Automatic Lighting........................ 127 Brakes
AC Power Outlet ............................ 187 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 24 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 429
Active Head Restraints ................. 158 Automatic Speed Control.............. 350 Break-in, New Linings .............. 394
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 473 Automatic Transmission............... 413 Bulb Replacement ............. 486, 488
Advanced Airbags............................ 31 Capacity, Fluid ........................... 538 Fluid ............................................ 481
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 11, 26 Checking Fluid Level ................ 478 Parking ........................................ 169
Airbag System Components ........... 26 Shifting ........................................ 413 System Indicator .................. 71, 523
Air Conditioning System....... 192, 199 Shift Lever Position Wear Indicators ......................... 429
Rear A/C Control .............. 197, 204 Indicators ................................ 413 Braking System.............................. 428
Air Outlets (Vents) ........................ 206 Shift Lever Positions ................. 414 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 394
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 496 Shift Lock Release ..................... 416 Brightness Control,
Antifreeze ....................................... 475 Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 310 Instruments ................................ 131
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator Light ..................... 72, 430 B
Operation .................................... 429
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 313 Battery
Anti-theft Steering Column Charging System
INDEX
Lock ............................................. 137 Indicator............................ 70, 521
Audio System ......... 208, 210, 226, 252 Jump Starting ............................. 517
Maintenance ............................... 504 CONTINUED
I
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:20 31SZA620_565
Index
Bulb Replacement When to....................................... 455 Compass.......................................... 353

Back-up Lights ........................... 486 Charging System Indicator .... 70, 521 Console Compartment .................. 180
Brake Lights............................... 486 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 410 Consumer Information.................. 554
Fog Lights .................................. 485 Childproof Door Locks ................. 144 Controls, Instruments and .............. 65
Front Parking Lights ................. 484 Child Safety ...................................... 39 Conversation Mirror ..................... 184
Front Side Marker Lights......... 484 Booster Seats ............................... 58 Coolant
Headlights .................................. 483 Child Seats .............................. 44, 47 Adding ......................................... 475
Rear Bulbs .................................. 486 Important Safety Reminders ...... 39 Checking ..................................... 398
Specifications ............................. 539 Infants ........................................... 44 Proper Solution .......................... 475
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 484 Larger Children ........................... 57 Temperature Gauge .................... 82
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 483 LATCH.......................................... 49 Crankcase Emissions Control
Risks with Airbags....................... 40 System......................................... 547
C Small Children.............................. 45 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 78
Tether ........................................... 54 Cruise Control Operation ............. 350
Cancel Button................................. 352 Warning Labels ............................ 62 Cup Holders.................................... 181
Capacities Chart............................. 538 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 40 Customer Service Office .............. 554
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 61 Child Seats ........................................ 47 Customize Settings .......................... 97
Cargo Area Light ........................... 178 LATCH Anchorage Points ......... 49 Door/Window Setup ................. 115
Cargo Hook .................................... 408 Tether Anchorage Points ..... 55, 56 Lighting Setup............................ 110
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 404 Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 490 Meter Setup ................................ 103
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii Climate Control System ................ 199 Position Setup ............................ 108
Certification Label ......................... 536 Clock ............................................... 314 Setting to Default....................... 100
Chains, Tires .................................. 503 Coat Hooks ..................................... 185
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 509 Code, Audio System ...................... 313 D
Changing Oil CO in the Exhaust ......................... 547
How to ......................................... 473 Compact Spare Tire....................... 508 DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
II
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:26 31SZA620_566
Index
Dashboard .................................... 3, 66 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Towing ........................................ 531
Daytime Running Lights............... 128 Driving ............................................ 409 Emergency Brake .......................... 169
Dead Battery .................................. 517 Economy ..................................... 399 Emergency Flashers ..................... 130
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 556 Driving Position Memory Emergency Towing ....................... 531
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 130 System......................................... 173 Emissions Controls........................ 547
Defrosting the Windows....... 194, 203 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 490 Emissions Testing ......................... 550
Differential Fluid ........................... 538 DVD Player Error Messages ....... 345 Engine
Dimensions ..................................... 538 DVD Player .................................... 320 Check Starter System ............... 412
Dimming the Headlights .............. 126 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 82
Dipstick E If it Won’t Start .......................... 516
Automatic Transmission........... 478 Malfunction Indicator
Engine Oil ................................... 398 Economy, Fuel ............................... 399 Lamp ................................. 70, 522
Directional Signals ........................... 73 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Oil Life ........................................ 455
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 429 System......................................... 431 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 70, 521
Disc Care ........................................ 285 Emergencies................................... 507 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 472
Disc Changer ......................... 242, 274 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 517 Overheating................................ 519
Disc Changer Error Brake System Indicator ............ 523 Specifications ............................. 539
Messages ............................ 251, 284 Changing a Flat Tire ................. 509 Speed Limiter ............................. 416
Disc Player ..................... 218, 242, 274 Charging System Indicator ...... 521 Starting........................................ 411
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 474 Checking the Fuses................... 525 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 547
Doors Driving with a Flat Tire ............ 508 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 61
Indicator .................................. 13, 95 Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 130 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Jump Starting ............................. 517 System......................................... 548
INDEX
Locking and Unlocking ............. 138
Lockout Prevention ................... 144 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 521
Power Door Locks ..................... 138 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 522
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 540 Overheated Engine ................... 519 CONTINUED
III
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:32 31SZA620_567
Index
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Folding the Third Seat .................. 161 Gas Station Procedures................. 395
Belts by ......................................... 20 Four-way Flashers ......................... 130 Gauges
Front Airbags ............................. 11, 29 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 82
F Front Seat ....................................... 154 Fuel ................................................ 82
Adjusting..................................... 154 Speedometer ................................ 82
Fan, Interior ........................... 193, 202 Airbags .................................... 11, 29 Tachometer .................................. 82
Features, Comfort and Heaters........................................ 164 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Convenience ............................... 191 Fuel .................................................. 394 Rating) ........................................ 435
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 395 Fill Door and Cap....................... 395 GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Filters Gauge ............................................ 82 Rating) ........................................ 436
Dust and Pollen .......................... 490 Octane Requirement ................. 394 Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 413
Oil ................................................ 473 Oxygenated ................................ 394 Glass Hatch .................................... 148
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 130 Reserve Indicator......................... 80 Glove Box ....................................... 183
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 509 Tank, Filling the......................... 395 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Floor Mats ...................................... 491 Tighten Fuel Cap ....................... 396 Rating) ........................................ 435
Fluids Fuel Economy ................................ 399
Automatic Transmission........... 478 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 525 H
Brake ........................................... 481
Power Steering........................... 482 G Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 483
Rear Differential ........................ 480 HandsFreeLink ............................ 361
Transfer Assembly .................... 480 Gas Mileage, Improving................ 400 HFL Buttons............................... 361
Windshield Washer ................... 477 Gasoline .......................................... 394 Hazard Warning Flashers............. 130
FM Stereo Radio Gauge ............................................ 82
Reception .................................... 308 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 80
Fog Lights ...................................... 128 Octane Requirement ................. 394
Folding the Second Seat ............... 160 Tank, Refueling ......................... 395
IV
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:37 31SZA620_568
Index
Headlights ...................................... 126 Ignition Seat Belt ........................................ 69

Aiming ......................................... 483 Keys............................................. 134 SRS ................................................ 72
Automatic Lighting ................... 127 Switch .......................................... 137 System Message .................... 77, 94
Daytime Running Lights .......... 128 Timing Control System ............. 548 Tire Pressure Monitor ................ 75
High Beam Indicator ................... 78 Immobilizer System....................... 135 Turn Signal and Hazard
High Beams, Turning on .......... 126 Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Warning .................................... 73
Lights On Indicator ..................... 78 Indicators, Instrument Panel.... 67, 68 VSA Activation ............................. 73
Low Beams, Turning on ........... 126 ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 72 VSA System .................................. 73
Reminder Chime........................ 126 A/T Temp..................................... 76 Individual Map Lights ................... 177
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 483 Brake (Parking and Brake Infant Restraint ................................ 44
Turning on .................................. 126 System) ............................. 71, 523 Infant Seats ....................................... 44
Headphones.................................... 346 Charging System ................. 70, 521 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 496
Head Restraints ............................. 157 Cruise Control .............................. 78 INFO Buttons ................................... 87
Heated Mirror ................................ 172 Cruise Main .................................. 78 Inside Mirror .................................. 170
Heaters, Seats ................................ 164 DRL (Daytime Running Inspection, Tire .............................. 498
Heating and Cooling.............. 192, 199 Lights)....................................... 79 Instrument Panel ....................... 67, 68
High-Low Beam Switch ................ 126 Fog Lights .................................... 78 Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 131
HomeLink Universal High Beam .................................... 78 Instruments and Controls ............... 65
Transceiver................................. 357 Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 78 Integrated Sunshade ..................... 183
Hood, Opening the ........................ 397 Lights On ...................................... 78 Interface Dial.................................. 252
Horn ............................................ 4, 123 Low Fuel ....................................... 80 Interior Lights ................................ 176
Low Oil Pressure ................. 70, 521 Introduction ......................................... i
I Low Tire Pressure ....................... 74 iPod ................................................ 288
INDEX
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 522
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 536 Security System ........................... 81
Side Airbag Off ............................ 72 CONTINUED
V
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:44 31SZA620_569
Index
J Locks Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 171

Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 137 Modifications.................................. 403
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 511 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 395 Modifying Your Vehicle................ 403
Jack, Tire ........................................ 509 Glove Box ................................... 183 Moonroof ........................................ 168
Jump Starting ................................. 517 Lockout Prevention ................... 144 MP3 ......................... 219, 243, 280, 300
Power Door ................................ 138 Multi-Information Display .............. 87
K Tailgate ............................... 144, 145
Low Coolant Level ......................... 398 N
Keys ................................................. 134 Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 80
Keyless Memory Settings ............ 153 Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 70, 521 Neutral Gear Position.................... 414
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 538 New Vehicle Break-in ................... 394
L Luggage, Storing (cargo) ............. 404 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 536
Label, Certification ........................ 536 M
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 126 O
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 17, 23 Maintenance ................................... 453
Light Control Switch ..................... 176 Information ................................. 455 Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 394
Lights Owner’s Maintenance Odometer .................................... 83, 89
Bulb Replacement ..................... 483 Checks .................................... 467 Odometer, Trip .......................... 83, 89
Indicator .................................. 67, 68 Safety........................................... 454 Off-Highway Driving ..................... 449
Interior ........................................ 176 Schedule ..................................... 469 Off-Road Precautions .................... 449
Parking ........................................ 126 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 522
Turn Signal ................................. 126 Memory, Driving Position ............ 173
Load Limit .............................. 405, 434 Message Display .............................. 95
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 137 Message Indicator ........................... 77
Meters, Gauges ................................ 82
VI
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:51 31SZA620_570
Index
Oil PGM-FI System.............................. 548 Readiness Codes ............................ 550

Change, How to ......................... 473 Pollen Filter .................................... 490 Rear A/C Unit ........................ 197, 204
Change, When to ....................... 455 Power Door Locks ......................... 138 Rear Audio Control Panel ............. 321
Checking Engine ....................... 398 Power Seat Adjustments ............... 154 Rear Entertainment System ......... 317
Life, Engine ................................ 455 Power Socket Locations................ 179 Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 486
Pressure Indicator ............... 70, 521 Power Windows ............................. 165 Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 390
Selecting Proper Viscosity Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 20 Rearview Mirror ............................ 170
Chart ....................................... 472 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 Rear Window Defogger ........ 194, 203
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 137 Additional Safety Precautions .... 21 Rear Window Wiper and
Outside Mirrors ............................. 171 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 20 Washer ........................................ 125
Outside Temperature ................ 85, 90 Protecting Children ......................... 39 Reclining the Seat Backs ...... 154, 155
Overheating, Engine ..................... 519 General Guidelines ...................... 39 Reclining the Second Seats .......... 159
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 467 Protecting Infants ........................ 44 Reminder Indicators ........................ 69
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 394 Protecting Larger Children ........ 57 Remote Audio Controls................. 311
Protecting Small Children .......... 45 Remote Control (RES) .................. 322
P Using Child Seats with Remote Transmitter ...................... 150
Tethers...................................... 54 Replacement Information
Panel Brightness Control ............. 131 Using LATCH .............................. 49 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 473
Park Gear Position......................... 414 Fuses ........................................... 525
Parking ............................................ 419 R Light Bulbs ................................. 483
Parking Brake ................................ 169 Schedule ..................................... 469
Parking Brake and Brake Radiator Overheating .................... 519 Timing Belt ................................. 482
System Indicator .................. 71, 523 Radio/Disc Sound
INDEX
Tires ............................................ 499
Parking Lights................................ 126 System ........................ 210, 227, 253 Wiper Blades .............................. 492
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 419 Radio Theft Protection.................. 313
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 36 RDS ................................. 213, 230, 257 CONTINUED
VII
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 19:59:56 31SZA620_571
Index
Replacing Seat Belt After a Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 23 Setting the Clock ........................... 314
Crash ............................................. 25 Maintenance ................................. 25 Shifting the Automatic
Reporting Safety Defects＊ ........... 556 Reminder Light and Transmission .............................. 413
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 398 Beeper ................................. 22, 69 Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 413
Restraint, Child ................................ 39 System Components.................... 22 Shift Lock Release ......................... 416
Reverse Gear Position................... 414 Use During Pregnancy................ 20 Side Airbags ..................................... 32
Rotation Tire .................................. 499 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 17 Off Indicator ................................. 35
Seats ................................................ 154 Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 34
S Adjusting the Second Seat ........ 159 Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Folding the Second Seat ........... 160 Replacement in .................. 484, 485
Safety Belts................................... 9, 22 Folding the Third Seat .............. 161 Signaling Turns ................................ 73
Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 556 Head Restraints ......................... 157 Snow Tires ...................................... 502
Safety Features .................................. 8 Heaters........................................ 164 Sound System......................... 208, 252
Airbags .......................................... 11 Position Memory ....................... 173 Spare Tire
Door Locks ................................... 13 Third Row Access ..................... 161 Inflating............................... 497, 508
Head Restraints ........................... 16 Security System ............................. 349 Specifications ............................. 539
Seat Belts .................................. 9, 17 Sensors Specifications Charts..................... 538
Seats & Seat-Backs ................ 15, 16 Driver’s Seat Position Sensor ..... 31 Speed Control ................................. 350
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 62 Front Passenger’s Weight Speed Limiter ................................. 416
Safety Messages ............................... iii Sensors...................................... 31 Speedometer .................................... 82
Satellite Radio, XM .............. 236, 266 Impact Sensors....................... 27, 28
Seat Belts ...................................... 9, 17 Serial Number ................................ 536
Additional Information ................ 22 Service Intervals ............................ 455
Automatic Seat Belt Service Manual＊ ............................ 557
Tensioners ................................ 24 Service Information ....................... 455
Cleaning ...................................... 490 Service Station Procedures .......... 395
VIII
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 20:00:02 31SZA620_572
Index
SRS, Additional Information........... 26 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 183 Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 24
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 Sun Visor......................................... 184 Tether Anchorage Points ............... 55
Airbag Service .............................. 37 Supplemental Restraint System Theft Protection, Radio................. 313
Airbag System Components ....... 26 Servicing ....................................... 37 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 549
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 35 SRS Indicator.......................... 35, 72 Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .. 133
How Your Front Airbags System Components.................... 26 Timing Belt ..................................... 482
Work.......................................... 29 Synthetic Oil ................................... 473 Tire Chains ..................................... 503
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 509
How Your Side Curtain Airbags T Tire Labeling .................................. 542
Work.......................................... 34 Tire Pressure Monitoring
SRS Indicator.............................. 35, 72 Tachometer ...................................... 82 System (TPMS) ............. 420, 544
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 137 Tailgate ........................................... 144 Low Tire Pressure
Starting the Engine........................ 411 Glass Hatch ................................ 148 Indicator............................ 74, 423
Auto Control Mode.................... 411 Open Indicator ....................... 13, 95 Tire Pressure Monitor ........ 91, 424
In Cold Weather at High Opening the ................................ 144
Altitude ................................... 412 Power .......................................... 145
With a Dead Battery ................. 517 Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 486
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 519 Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 507
Steering Wheel Technical Descriptions
Adjustment ................................. 133 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 540
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 137 Emissions Control Systems ...... 547
Buttons ....................... 311, 350, 361 Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 549
INDEX
Stereo Sound
System ................ 208, 209, 226, 252 Temperature Gauge ........................ 82
Storage Compartment ................... 182 Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 207
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 505 Temperature, Outside ..................... 90 CONTINUED
IX
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 20:00:09 31SZA620_573
Index
Tires ................................................ 496 Treadwear ...................................... 498 VSA System Indicator ......... 73, 431
Air Pressure ............................... 496 Trip Computer ................................. 92 Vehicle Storage .............................. 505
Checking Wear .......................... 498 Trip Meter .................................. 83, 89 Ventilation ...................................... 195
Compact Spare ........................... 508 Turn Signals ..................................... 73 VIN .................................................. 536
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 540 Viscosity, Oil................................... 472
Inflation ....................................... 496 U Voice Control System............ 200, 252
Inspection ................................... 498 VTM-4 Lock ................................... 418
Maintenance ............................... 499 Unexpected, Taking Care
Replacing .................................... 499 of the ........................................... 507 W
Rotating....................................... 499 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 540
Snow ............................................ 502 Unleaded Gasoline......................... 394 WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Specifications ............................. 539 USB Adapter Cable ............... 290, 301 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 62
Tire Chains ................................. 503 USB Flash Memory Device .......... 298 Warranty Coverages＊ ................... 555
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 509 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 474 Washer, Windshield
Towing Checking the Fluid Level ......... 477
A Trailer ...................................... 434 V Level Indicator ............................. 80
Emergency Wrecker ................. 531 Operation .................................... 124
Equipment and Accessories ..... 441 Vanity Mirror ................................. 185 Wheels
Weight Limit .............................. 434 Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 405 Adjusting the Steering .............. 133
Trailer Loading .......................... 434 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 538 Alignment and Balance ............. 499
Trailer Towing Tips .................. 446 Vehicle Identification Number..... 536 Aluminum Alloy Wheels ........... 503
Transmission Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ) Cleaning ...................................... 503
Checking Fluid Level ................ 478 System..................................... 431 Compact Spare ........................... 508
Fluid Selection............................ 479 VSA Activation Wrench, Nut ............................... 510
Identification Number............... 536 Indicator ..................... 73, 95, 431
Shifting the Automatic .............. 413 VSA Off Switch .......................... 432
X
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 20:00:14 31SZA620_574
Index
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 166
Operating the Power ................. 165
Rear, Defogger .......................... 130
Windshield
Cleaning ...................................... 124
Defroster ............................ 194, 203
Washers ...................................... 124
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 492
Operation .................................... 124
Rear Windshield Wiper and
Washer .................................... 125
WMA ....................... 219, 243, 280, 300
Worn Tires ..................................... 498
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 531
X
XM Radio .............................. 236, 266
＊: U.S. only
XI
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 20:00:38 31SZA620_577
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: 4WD models only Brake Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Rear Differential Fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
number of 87 or higher. Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
(see page 480 ). DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Premium fuel is recommended replacement (see page 481 ).
when towing in certain conditions 4WD models only
(see page 446 ). Transfer Assembly Fluid: Tire Pressure (measured cold):
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity Front/Rear:
Fuel Tank Capacity: hypoid gear oil, API service 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
21.00 US gal (79.5 ) classified GL4 or GL5 only. Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Recommended Engine Oil: Power Steering Fluid:
API Premium grade 5W-20 Honda Power Steering Fluid
detergent oil (see page 472 ). preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
Oil change capacity (including temporary replacement. Do not
filter): use ATF (see page 482 ).
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid)
(see page 479 ).
2011 Pilot
10/01/26 18:22:26 31SZA620_001
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of

ADDRESS the Pilot. You may find descriptions of
STREET equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The information and specifications included

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time
POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
ADDRESS en français, veuillez demander à
STREET votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33SZAC20
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
2011 Pilot

2011 Honda Pilot Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 Honda Pilot Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

10/01/26 18:22:32 31SZA620_002

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance information shown in

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders

Service Diagnostic Recorders

A Few Words About Safety

Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

Important Handling Information

2011 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual

Owner's Identification Form

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3

Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures)

Contents Before Driving Technical Information

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your Vehicle at a Glance

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS＊3 HAZARD WARNING

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Restrain All Children Don’t Drink and Drive

Important Safety Precautions

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Why Wear Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

In addition, most states and all

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles with navigation system

Driver and Passenger Safety

1. Close and Lock the Doors

Your vehicle has a door-

Protecting Adults and Teens

Locking the doors, the glass hatch,

Locking the doors, the glass hatch

On vehicles with navigation system

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs 4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far

Adjust the seat-back to an

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Protecting Adults and Teens

5.Fasten and Position the Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

Improperly positioning the seat

Make sure all seat belts are

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you are pregnant, the best way to

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts